The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and

The Royal Norwegian Navy

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations

Part 1 Chapter 1:

Naval and Naval Support Vessels 2013

The Naval Systems Division of the Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation hereby

settles the Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations for use within the Norwegian Armed Forces.

Haakonsvern, 01.07.2013

Morten Jacobsen (by authority) Rear Admiral

Head of Naval Systems Division

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1: Naval and Naval Support Vessels Page 2


The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations Part 1 Chapter 1: Naval and Naval Support Vessels This booklet mainly includes the Royal Norwegian Navy’s supplementary requirements and regulations to the January 2013 edition of the DNV Rules for Ships and High Speed, Lightcraft and Naval Surface Craft Pt.5 Ch.14. The foundation of NRAR, as well as details about the relation between the rules within this booklet, the other parts of NRAR, and other rules and regulations, can be found in NRAR Pt.0.

CONTENTS Section 1 General Regulations...................................................................................8 Section 2 Arrangements...........................................................................................13 Section 3 Design Loads ...........................................................................................21 Section 4 Structural Strength ...................................................................................32 Section 5 Stability, Watertight and Weathertight Integrity .....................................60 Section 6 Piping Systems.........................................................................................69 Section 7 Machinery, Propulsion and Positioning.................................................121 Section 8 Electric Power Generation and Transfer................................................137 Section 9 Control and Monitoring .........................................................................172 Section 10 Fire Safety..............................................................................................205 Section 11 Fire Safety Requirements for FRP Naval Vessels .................................220 Section 12 Safe Evacuation of Personnel ................................................................227 Section 13 Radiation Hazards..................................................................................234 Section 14 Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............................................................237 Section 15 Storage Rooms for Explosives...............................................................254

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1: Contents Page 3


Contents SECTION 1 GENERAL REGULATIONS............8 A Introduction................................................................... 8 A 100 Purpose............................................................................ 8 A 200 The examination system for naval surface vessels......... 8 A 300 International codes and regulations ................................ 9 B Examination Principles ................................................ 9 B 100 Application...................................................................... 9 B 200 Class notations ................................................................ 9 C Definitions.................................................................... 10 C 100 Terms ............................................................................ 10 D Classification of Newbuildings................................... 11 D 100 Risk and vulnerability analysis..................................... 11 D 200 General requirements for documentation ..................... 11 D 300 Classification basis ....................................................... 11 D 400 Yard qualification ......................................................... 12 D 500 Working relations ......................................................... 12 D 600 Certification of components and equipment................. 12 D 700 Confidentiality .............................................................. 12 D 800 Area identification ........................................................ 12 E Deviations from the Rules .......................................... 12 E 100 General.......................................................................... 12 SECTION 2 ARRANGEMENTS ..........................13 A Deck Arrangements .................................................... 13 A 100 Deck definitions............................................................ 13 A 200 Rescue area ................................................................... 13 A 300 Guard-rails and handholds............................................ 13 B Watertight and gas tight compartments................... 14 B 10 Watertight and gas tight bulkheads, decks and compartments. General. ................................................................. 14 B 100 Main Watertight bulkheads........................................... 14 B 200 Main Watertight bulkheads (for HS, LC ans NSC)...... 15 B 300 Collision bulkhead (for HS, LC and NSC)................... 16 B 400 Watertight bulkheads .................................................... 16 B 500 Gas tight bulkheads....................................................... 16 B 600 Watertight and gas tight decks...................................... 17 B 700 Watertight compartments.............................................. 17 B 800 Gas tight compartments ................................................ 18 C Zones ............................................................................ 18 C 100 General principles ......................................................... 18 C 200 Fire control zones.......................................................... 18 C 300 Damage control zones................................................... 18 C 400 Gas tight division .......................................................... 18 C 500 Hazardous areas ............................................................ 19 D Accommodation .......................................................... 19 D 100 General.......................................................................... 19 E Stores............................................................................ 19 E 100 General.......................................................................... 19 F Escape routes............................................................... 19 F 100 General.......................................................................... 19 SECTION 3 DESIGN LOADS ..............................21 A General Requirements................................................ 21 A 100 General.......................................................................... 21 A 200 Direct calculations and model tests (for HS, LC and NSC) 21 A 300 Vertical design acceleration (for HS, LC and NSC) .... 27 B Hull Girder Loads (for HS, LC and NSC) ............... 27 B 100 Longitudinal still water loads (for HS, LC and NSC) .. 27 B 200 Longitudinal wave bending loads (for HS, LC and NSC) 28 B 300 Horizontal bending moment and shear force (for HS, LC and NSC) 28 B 400 Torsional moment (for HS, LC and NSC).................... 28 C Local Loads (for HS, LC and NSC) .......................... 28 C 100 Sea pressures (for HS, LC and NSC)............................ 28 C 200 Slamming and impact pressures (for HS, LC and NSC) 29 C 300 Liquid pressure in tanks (for HS, LC and NSC) .......... 29 C 400 Dry cargo, stores and equipment (for HS, LC and NSC) 29 C 500 Loads on foundations.................................................... 30 D Operational Loads ...................................................... 30 D 100 General.......................................................................... 30

E Accidental Loads .........................................................30 E 100 Local damage ................................................................30 E 200 Global damage...............................................................31 SECTION 4 STRUCTURAL STRENGTH......... 32 A General requirements .................................................32 A 100 Structural strength .........................................................32 A 200 Plan and particulars .......................................................42 A 300 Structural Categorisation, Material Selection and Inspection Principles ......................................................................42 B Structural Arrangement.............................................43 B 100 Main structure ...............................................................43 B 200 Bulkheads ......................................................................45 B 300 Mast for support of sensors and sensor’s systems ........46 C Local Strength .............................................................46 C 100 Minimum thickness .......................................................46 C 200 Local structure...............................................................46 C 300 Damage of local structure .............................................46 C 400 Acceptance criteria – damaged condition .....................46 D Global Strength ...........................................................46 D 100 General ..........................................................................46 D 200 Direct calculations (for HS, LC and NSC) ...................47 D 300 Intact condition..............................................................47 D 400 Damaged condition .......................................................47 E Weld Connections........................................................48 E 100 Application of fillet welds.............................................48 E 200 Qualification of welding procedures and welders ........48 E 300 Fabrication and welding requirements ..........................49 E 400 Production welding .......................................................52 E 500 Welding of stainless steel..............................................53 E 600 Post weld heat treatment ...............................................53 E 700 Grinding.........................................................................54 E 800 Production tests .............................................................54 E 900 Dimensional control and tolerance requirements .........54 E 1000 Non-destructive testing and inspection ...................55 F Buckling (for HS, LC and NSC) ................................58 F 100 General (for HS, LC and NSC) .....................................58 G Direct Strength Calculations......................................58 G 100 Modelling of hull structure (for HS, LC and NSC) ......58 G 200 Modelling of hull structure............................................59 H Hull structure design, Aluminium alloy....................59 I Hull structure design, Fibre composite and sandwich constructions .................................................................................59 SECTION 5 STABILITY, WATERTIGHT AND WEATHERTIGHT INTEGRITY................................ 60 A General .........................................................................60 A 100 Applicability..................................................................60 A 200 Plans and Calculations ..................................................60 A 300 Exceptions .....................................................................60 A 400 Additional Requirements ..............................................60 B Freeboard, External Watertight Integrity (for HS, LC and NSC).................................................................................60 B 100 Applicability..................................................................60 B 200 Design waterline............................................................60 B 300 External doors ...............................................................60 B 400 Side and stern doors ......................................................61 B 500 External hatches ............................................................61 B 600 Air pipes ........................................................................61 B 700 Ventilators .....................................................................61 B 800 Scuppers and discharge .................................................61 B 900 Freeing ports..................................................................61 B 1000 Windows..................................................................61 B 1100 Deadlights................................................................61 C Intact Stability Requirements ....................................62 C 100 Loading Conditions .......................................................62 C 200 Calculation of stability ..................................................62 C 300 Calculation of effects from external loads ....................62 C 400 Intact stability for monohull vessel ...............................62 C 500 Intact stability for multihull vessel................................63 C 600 Excessive metacentric height, displacement vessels ....63 D Internal Watertight Integrity.....................................63 D 100 Watertight subdivision ..................................................63 D 200 Extent of damage for monohull vessels ........................64 D 300 Extent of damage for multihull vessels.........................64 D 400 Survival criteria after damage, all vessels.....................65 E Inclining test procedure..............................................65



E 100 Description of procedure .............................................. 65 F Draught- and Load line marks .................................. 65 F 100 General.......................................................................... 65 G Estimates and Calculations of Weights and Centres of Gravity ...................................................................................... 66 G 100 Definitions..................................................................... 66 G 200 Preliminary Weight Estimate........................................ 67 G 300 Detailed Weight Estimate ............................................. 68 SECTION 6 PIPING SYSTEMS...........................69 A General......................................................................... 69 A 100 Application.................................................................... 69 A 200 Definitions..................................................................... 69 A 300 Plans and particulars ..................................................... 69 A 400 Materials ....................................................................... 69 B Design Principles......................................................... 78 B 100 General.......................................................................... 78 B 200 Arrangements................................................................ 78 B 300 Operation of valves....................................................... 79 B 400 Shock Loads Design ..................................................... 79 C Pipe, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable Pipe Connections .......................................................................... 79 C 100 General.......................................................................... 79 C 200 Pumps............................................................................ 79 C 300 Bellow and bellow units ............................................... 80 C 400 Flexible hoses ............................................................... 80 D Manufacture, Workmanship, Inspection and Testing 81 D 100 General.......................................................................... 81 E Marking ....................................................................... 81 E 100 General.......................................................................... 81 F Machinery Piping Systems......................................... 82 F 100 General.......................................................................... 82 F 200 Seawater cooling systems ............................................. 83 F 300 Fresh water cooling systems......................................... 83 F 400 Lubricating oil systems................................................. 83 F 500 Fuel oil systems ............................................................ 83 F 600 Air inlets for main and auxiliary engines ..................... 85 F 700 Exhaust systems............................................................ 85 F 800 Hydraulic systems......................................................... 85 F 900 Machinery space ventilation ......................................... 88 F 1000 Compressed air systems .......................................... 88 F 1100 Refrigerating and freezing system for provisions... 90 G Vessel Piping System .................................................. 90 G 100 General.......................................................................... 90 G 200 Air, sounding and overflow pipes................................. 90 G 300 Main seawater system................................................... 91 G 400 Bilge systems ................................................................ 96 G 500 Drainage........................................................................ 97 G 600 Oil pollution prevention................................................ 98 G 700 Ballast systems.............................................................. 98 G 800 Ventilation systems....................................................... 98 G 900 Sanitary Systems......................................................... 111 G 1000 Helicopter Fuelling System................................... 112 H Sea Chests and Separate Seawater Inlets ............... 115 H 100 Sea chests .................................................................... 115 H 200 Separate seawater inlets .............................................. 115 I Thermal Insulation ................................................... 116 I 100 General........................................................................ 116 I 200 Types of insulation...................................................... 116 SECTION 7 MACHINERY, PROPULSION AND POSITIONING 121 A General Requirements.............................................. 121 A 100 General........................................................................ 121 A 200 Documentation............................................................ 122 B Operational Conditions ............................................ 122 B 100 Operational conditions................................................ 122 C Arrangement and System Design............................ 123 C 100 Basic principles........................................................... 123 C 200 Machinery space arrangements................................... 123 C 300 Redundancy................................................................. 124 C 400 Arrangement of air intake........................................... 124 D Component Specific Requirements ......................... 124 D 100 Propeller...................................................................... 124 D 200 Shafting and vibration................................................. 125 D 300 Steering gear ............................................................... 127

D 400 Thrusters......................................................................127 D 500 Water Jet......................................................................127 D 600 Diesel Engines.............................................................129 D 700 Gas Turbines ...............................................................130 D 800 Steam Turbines............................................................132 D 900 Compressors ................................................................132 D 1000 Active Stabiliser Fin Systems................................133 E Miscellaneous.............................................................134 E 100 Ventilation...................................................................134 E 200 Fresh Water Production...............................................134 E 300 Ride Control System (RCS) ........................................135 F Testing ........................................................................135 F 100 General ........................................................................135 G Shock Loads ...............................................................135 G 100 System requirements ...................................................135 SECTION 8 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION AND TRANSFER ............................ 137 A General Requirements ..............................................137 A 100 Application ..................................................................137 A 200 Definitions...................................................................137 A 300 Documentation ............................................................139 B Design Principles .......................................................140 B 100 Environmental conditions ...........................................140 B 200 Earthing .......................................................................140 B 300 Marking .......................................................................141 B 400 Indicator lights.............................................................142 B 500 Enclosures ...................................................................142 B 600 Lighting system...........................................................144 C System Design ............................................................144 C 100 Supply systems............................................................144 C 200 D.C. voltage variations................................................144 C 300 Main source of electrical power..................................145 C 400 Emergency source of electrical power ........................145 C 500 Casualty power distribution system ............................145 C 600 Distribution..................................................................146 C 700 Shore connection .........................................................147 C 800 Choice of cable and wire types ...................................148 C 900 Control gear for motors and other consumers.............148 C 1000 Battery supplies .....................................................148 C 1100 System voltages .....................................................149 C 1200 A.C. voltage and frequency variations ..................149 C 1300 Circuit protection...................................................151 D Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies ..............152 D 100 Mechanical construction .............................................152 D 200 Remote operated switchboard .....................................153 D 300 Instruments ..................................................................153 E Rotating Machinery ..................................................153 E 100 Motors .........................................................................153 E 200 Generators ...................................................................154 F Miscellaneous Equipment.........................................155 F 100 Switchgear...................................................................155 F 200 Galley equipment ........................................................156 F 300 Batteries.......................................................................156 F 400 Socket outlets ..............................................................156 F 500 Luminaries...................................................................156 G Installation and Testing ............................................158 G 100 Principles .....................................................................158 G 200 Generators ...................................................................160 G 300 Switchboards ...............................................................160 G 400 Cables ..........................................................................160 G 500 Screening and earthing of cables.................................162 G 600 Marking of cables........................................................162 G 700 Batteries.......................................................................163 G 800 Low intensity illumination ..........................................163 G 900 Emergency lighting .....................................................164 H Electric Propulsion....................................................164 H 100 General ........................................................................164 H 200 Design principles.........................................................165 H 300 System design..............................................................166 H 400 Control System Design ...............................................166 I Converters..................................................................167 I 100 General ........................................................................167 I 200 Transformers ...............................................................167 I 300 Rotating converters .....................................................168 I 400 Static converters ..........................................................168 J A.C. Supply Systems Above 440 V ..........................168 J 100 Application ..................................................................168



J 200 General requirements.................................................. 168 J 300 Design principles ........................................................ 169 J 400 Switch- and control-gear assemblies .......................... 170 J 500 Cables, construction, and testing ................................ 170 J 600 Miscellaneous equipment ........................................... 170 K Additional Requirements for D.C. Systems ........... 170 SECTION 9 CONTROL AND MONITORING172 Subsection 1 General requirements ......................................... 172 A Classification ............................................................. 172 A 100 Rule applications......................................................... 172 A 200 Classification principles.............................................. 173 A 300 Alterations and additions ............................................ 173 A 400 Assumptions................................................................ 173 B Definitions.................................................................. 173 B 100 General terms .............................................................. 173 B 200 Terms related to computer based system.................... 174 B 300 Additional Definitions for RNoN Vessels.................. 175 C Documentation .......................................................... 176 C 100 General........................................................................ 176 C 200 Type approved products.............................................. 176 C 300 Plans and particulars ................................................... 176 D Tests............................................................................ 177 D 100 General........................................................................ 177 D 200 Software module testing ............................................. 177 D 300 Integration testing ....................................................... 177 D 400 System testing ............................................................. 177 D 500 On-board testing ......................................................... 177 Subsection 2 Design Principles ................................................. 178 A System Configuration............................................... 178 A 100 General........................................................................ 178 A 200 Field instrumentation .................................................. 179 A 300 System......................................................................... 179 A 400 Integrated system ........................................................ 179 B Response to Failures ................................................. 180 B 100 Failure detection ......................................................... 180 B 200 System response.......................................................... 180 C Emergency Operation............................................... 181 C 100 Manual emergency operation ..................................... 181 Subsection 3 System Design ...................................................... 181 A System Elements ....................................................... 181 A 100 General........................................................................ 181 A 200 Automatic control ....................................................... 182 A 300 Remote control............................................................ 182 A 400 Protective safety system.............................................. 182 A 500 Alarms......................................................................... 183 A 600 Indication .................................................................... 184 A 700 Planning and reporting................................................ 184 A 800 Calculation, simulation and decision support............. 184 A 900 Condition-based maintenance monitoring.................. 184 B General Requirements.............................................. 185 B 100 System operation and maintenance ............................ 185 B 200 Power supply requirements for control and monitoring systems 185 C Additional Requirements for System Design of HS, LC and NSC................................................................................ 185 C 100 Alarm system in the accommodation ......................... 185 D Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces........... 186 D 100 General........................................................................ 186 D 200 Power management system......................................... 186 E Control and Monitoring of Propulsion, Directional Control, Stabilisation and Auxiliary Systems ......................... 187 E 100 General........................................................................ 187 E 200 Stabiliser control system............................................. 188 E 300 Ride control system .................................................... 188 Subsection 4 Additional Requirements for Computer Based Systems ........................................................................................ 188 A General Requirements.............................................. 188 A 100 Assignment of responsibility when installing integrated systems 188 A 200 System dependency..................................................... 188 A 300 Storage devices ........................................................... 188 A 400 Computer usage .......................................................... 188 A 500 System response and capacity .................................... 188 A 600 Temperature control.................................................... 189

A 700 System maintenance....................................................189 A 800 System access..............................................................189 A 900 System Security...........................................................190 B System Software ........................................................191 B 100 Software requirements.................................................191 B 200 Software development.................................................192 C Control system Networks and Data Communications Links 192 C 100 General ........................................................................192 C 200 Network analysis .........................................................193 C 300 Network test and verification ......................................193 C 400 Network documentation requirements ........................193 C 500 Wireless communication.............................................193 C 600 Documentation of wireless communication................193 D User Interface ............................................................193 D 100 General ........................................................................193 E Damage Control System ...........................................194 E 100 General requirements ..................................................194 E 200 User Interface ..............................................................195 E 300 Communication ...........................................................196 E 400 NBC, monitoring and control......................................196 E 500 Fire fighting system, monitoring and control..............196 E 600 Flooding, monitoring and control ...............................197 Subsection 5 Component Design and Installation...................198 A General .......................................................................198 A 100 Environmental strains..................................................198 A 200 Materials......................................................................198 A 300 Component design and installation .............................198 A 400 Maintenance, checking................................................198 A 500 Marking .......................................................................198 A 600 Standardising...............................................................198 B Environmental Conditions, Instrumentation .........198 B 100 General ........................................................................198 B 200 Electric power supply..................................................199 B 300 Pneumatic and hydraulic power supply ......................199 B 400 Temperature ................................................................199 B 500 Humidity......................................................................199 B 600 Salt contamination.......................................................200 B 700 Oil contamination........................................................200 B 800 Vibrations ....................................................................200 B 900 Inclination....................................................................200 B 1000 Electromagnetic compatibility ..............................200 B 1100 Miscellaneous ........................................................200 B 1200 Shock .....................................................................200 C Electrical end Electronic Equipment ......................200 C 100 General ........................................................................200 C 200 Mechanical design, installation...................................200 C 300 Protection provided by enclosure................................201 C 400 Cables and wires..........................................................201 C 500 Cable installation.........................................................201 C 600 Power supply ...............................................................201 C 700 Fibre optic equipment..................................................201 C 800 Sensors.........................................................................201 Subsection 6 User Interface .......................................................202 A General .......................................................................202 A 100 Application ..................................................................202 A 200 Introduction .................................................................202 B Workstation Design and Arrangement ...................202 B 100 Location of visual display units and user input devices 202 C User Input Device and Display Unit Design ...........203 C 100 User input devices .......................................................203 C 200 Visual display units .....................................................203 C 300 Colours ........................................................................203 C 400 Requirements for preservation of night vision (UIDs and VUDs for installation on the navigating bridge)..........................203 D Screen Based Systems ...............................................204 D 100 General ........................................................................204 D 200 Illumination .................................................................204 D 300 Colour screens .............................................................204 D 400 Computer dialogue ......................................................204 D 500 Application screen views ............................................204 SECTION 10 FIRE SAFETY ............................... 205 A General .......................................................................205 A 100 General ........................................................................205 B Rule References and Definitions..............................206



B 100 Definitions................................................................... 206 C Documentation .......................................................... 206 C 100 Requirements for documentation................................ 206 D Fire Control Zones.................................................... 207 D 100 Fire control zones........................................................ 207 E Fire Integrity of Bulkheads and Decks ................... 207 E 100 Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks......................... 207 E 200 Division penetrations .................................................. 208 F Ventilation Systems................................................... 208 F 100 Requirements for ventilation system .......................... 208 G Material Requirements............................................. 209 G 100 Restricted use of combustible material....................... 209 H Fire Detection Systems ............................................. 210 H 100 Areas to be protected .................................................. 210 H 200 Requirements for systems........................................... 210 H 300 Detector configuration ................................................ 210 H 400 The alarm system........................................................ 211 I Fixed Fire-extinguishing System ............................. 211 I 100 Fixed fire-extinguishing systems for machinery spaces 211 I 200 Fixed local application fire extinguishing system ...... 212 I 300 Design considerations ................................................. 214 I 400 Water spraying system for storage rooms for explosives 215 I 500 General requirements for fixed fire-extinguishing systems 215 J Fire-extinguishing Equipment................................. 215 J 100 Portable fire extinguishers .......................................... 215 J 200 Fire extinguishers in machinery spaces ...................... 216 J 300 Portable foam applicators outside machinery spaces . 216 K Fire Pumps and Fire Main....................................... 216 K 100 Capacity of fire pumps................................................ 216 K 200 Water distribution system........................................... 216 L Firefighter’s Outfit ................................................... 217 L 100 Number and location................................................... 217 L 200 Personal equipment and breathing apparatus ............. 218 M Other Spaces.............................................................. 218 M 100 Storage rooms for explosives................................ 218 M 200 Paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers .......... 218 M 300 Spaces containing pressure chambers and oxygen storage tanks 218 M 400 Protection of weapon systems............................... 219 N Helicopter Facilities .................................................. 219 O Fire Control Plans..................................................... 219 O 100 Requirements .............................................................. 219 SECTION 11 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR FRP NAVAL VESSELS......................................220 A General Requirements.............................................. 220 A 100 General........................................................................ 220 A 200 Rule references and definitions .................................. 220 A 300 Requirements for documentation................................ 220 B Structural Fire Protection, Materials and Arrangements ............................................................................. 221 B 100 Fire control zones........................................................ 221 B 200 Structural fire protection............................................. 221 B 300 Material requirements ................................................. 221 B 400 Arrangements.............................................................. 222 B 500 Means of escape.......................................................... 222 C Ventilation ................................................................. 222 C 100 Ventilation zones and active smoke control ............... 222 D Fire Detection System............................................... 223 D 100 Arrangement ............................................................... 223 E Fire Extinguishing System and Hazardous Spaces223 E 100 Fixed fire extinguishing system for machinery spaces 223 E 200 Other fire hazardous spaces or equipment.................. 224 F Fire pumps, Fire Main and Portable Extinguishers 224 F 100 Fire pumps, fire main, and fire hoses ......................... 224 F 200 Portable fire extinguishers .......................................... 225 G Sprinkler System....................................................... 225 G 100 Sprinkler System......................................................... 225

H Firefighter’s outfit .....................................................225 H 100 General ........................................................................225 I Additional Fire Protection (optional) ......................226 I 100 General ........................................................................226 I 200 Accommodation ..........................................................226 I 300 Engine room ................................................................226 SECTION 12 SAFE EVACUATION OF PERSONNEL 227 A Escape, Evacuation and Rescue Eq. Stowages (Regulation 9)..............................................................................227 A 100 General stowage ..........................................................227 A 200 Rescue craft .................................................................227 A 300 Fast Rescue boats ........................................................227 B External Communcication Equipment (Regulation 13) 228 B 100 Communication ...........................................................228 B 200 Signalling equipment...................................................228 C Emergency Escape Breathing Devices, EEBD (Regulation 20)...........................................................................228 D Launching Arrangements (Regulation 22) ............228 D 100 General ........................................................................228 D 200 Davits for Fast Rescue boats .......................................229 E Evacuation Arrangements (Regulation 23) ...........229 E 100 Climbing net ................................................................229 E 200 Pilot ladder ..................................................................230 F Survival Craft (Regulation 24).................................230 F 100 Liferafts .......................................................................230 G Life-Jackets (Regulation 25).....................................232 G 100 Life jacket, general service .........................................232 G 200 Life jacket, additional..................................................232 H Personal Thermal Protection suits (Regulation 26) 232 H 100 Immersion suits ...........................................................232 H 200 Anti-Exposure suits .....................................................232 I Rescue Arrangements (Regulation 27)....................233 I 100 Mass Rescue................................................................233 I 200 Line Thrower...............................................................233 SECTION 13 RADIATION HAZARDS.............. 234 A General .......................................................................234 A 100 Application ..................................................................234 A 200 General requirements ..................................................234 B Definitions ..................................................................234 B 100 Terms...........................................................................234 C Documentation...........................................................235 C 100 Plans and particulars....................................................235 D Design Principles .......................................................235 D 100 General ........................................................................235 D 200 Prevention of auto ignition..........................................235 D 300 Prevention of personnel exposure ...............................235 E Installation .................................................................235 E 100 General ........................................................................235 E 200 Marking .......................................................................236 F Testing ........................................................................236 F 100 Harbour Acceptance Tests (HAT) for the vessel ........236 SECTION 14 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY....................................................... 237 A General .......................................................................237 A 100 Application ..................................................................237 A 200 Principles .....................................................................238 A 300 Standards .....................................................................238 B Definitions ..................................................................238 B 100 Terms...........................................................................238 B 200 Abbreviations ..............................................................241 C Documentation...........................................................241 C 100 Plans and particulars....................................................241 C 200 EME test plan ..............................................................242 C 300 Cable list......................................................................242 D Design Principles .......................................................243 D 100 General ........................................................................243 D 200 Lightning protection....................................................243



D 300 Electrostatic discharge ................................................ 243 D 400 Topside design ............................................................ 243 D 500 EME zones .................................................................. 244 D 600 Equipment EME ......................................................... 244 E Installation................................................................. 245 E 100 General........................................................................ 245 E 200 Shielding ..................................................................... 245 E 300 Bonding and earthing.................................................. 248 E 400 Cabling........................................................................ 249 E 500 Filtering....................................................................... 251 E 600 Lightning protection ................................................... 252 E 700 Electrostatic discharge ................................................ 252 E 800 Marking....................................................................... 253 F Testing........................................................................ 253 F 100 General........................................................................ 253 F 200 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) for equipment ........ 253 F 300 Harbour Acceptance Tests (HAT) for the vessel........ 253 F 400 Sea Acceptance Tests (SAT) for the vessel................ 253 SECTION 15 STORAGE ROOMS FOR EXPLOSIVES 254 A General....................................................................... 254 A 100 Application.................................................................. 254 A 200 Definitions................................................................... 254 B Basic Requirements .................................................. 255 B 100 General........................................................................ 255 B 200 Plans and particulars to be submitted ......................... 255 C Arrangements............................................................ 256 C 100 General........................................................................ 256 D Structure .................................................................... 257 D 100 Structural requirements............................................... 257 E Fire Safety.................................................................. 258 E 100 General........................................................................ 258 E 200 Structural fire safety.................................................... 258 E 300 System fire safety........................................................ 258 E 400 Fire protection............................................................. 258 F Radiation Hazards .................................................... 259 G Signboards ................................................................. 259 G 100 General........................................................................ 259

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.1: General Regulations Page 8


Section 1 General Regulations This section covers general regulations for vessels classified in accordance with the rules stated in DNV Rules for Classification of Ships or Classification of High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft (HSLCNSC) Pt.5 Ch.14 Naval and Naval Support Vessels. Since surface vessels of the Norwegian Armed Forces are classified in accordance with NRAR, only parts of Section 1 in Pt.5 Ch.14 are made applicable. General requirements for NRAR as a whole are given in NRAR Pt. 0 – General Information and Requirements.

A Introduction

A 100 Purpose

101 DNV rules fully applicable

102 DNV rules fully applicable.

103 In the case of inconsistencies and/or conflict between the general regulations stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.1 and the regulations and requirements stated in NRAR, the rules stated in NRAR shall apply.

A 200 The examination system for naval surface vessels

201 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: NRAR is a national naval standard defining acceptance criteria and requirements for design, construction, survey, validation, verification and testing of Norwegian naval and coast guard vessels, including requirements with regard to hull (i.e. arrangements, strength, integrity and stability), machinery installations, auxiliary systems, electrical systems, deck- and internal equipment. NRAR is applicable for both newbuildings and the operational phase, and includes defined military systems.

202 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. The Norwegian Defence Materiel Safety Authority (NDMSA) has the role as Administration. i.e. Naval Administration (ref. NRAR Part 0).

Guidance note: The Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation (NDLO) supports by technical expertise NDMSA in their function as Naval Administration for all Norwegian naval vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

203 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: If the Vessel is not taken into a civilian class Society, the terms equivalent class and classification shall be understood as NDMSA military safety inspection and approbation system for naval surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy and the Norwegian Coast Guard. This military safety and approbation also includes rules and requirements defined in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.1 through Pt.4 and Pt.5 Ch.14 Naval and Naval Support Vessels or other relevant design rules.


Guidance note: Reference is given to NRAR Part 0 E (Inspection and Testing) and F (Quality Assurance). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---




Guidance note: Requirements concerning RNoN’s QA systems can be found in NRAR Part 0 F (Quality Assurance).


A 300 International codes and regulations



Guidance note: The NDMSA has the role as national naval administration for all Norwegian naval vessels (ref. NRAR Part 0). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

B Examination Principles

B 100 Application

101 The requirements in NRAR shall be regarded as supplementary to those given in DNV Rules for SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 and defines additional notation (navdist) in accordance with Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.1 E102. For auxiliary vessels not covered by NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1, Pt.1 Ch.2 within NRAR shall apply, see Pt.0 for details.




Guidance note: In addition to the guidance note stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.1 B104, support requirements to military systems may typically be:

- structural strength to cope with blasts from firing weapons (i.e. both missiles and guns),

including sonic boom and structural loads, - EMC/EMI

---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Design brief report shall be presented in the booklet “Skipsbok, del I”

B 200 Class notations







205 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. Vessels classified in accordance with NRAR Part 1 Chapter 1 without use of DNV classification expertice, shall not have the maltese cross in front of the class notation

206 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. Vessels classified in accordance with NRAR Part 1 Chapter 1 without use of DNV classification expertice, shall not have the maltese cross in front of the class notation

207 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. Vessels classified in accordance with NRAR Part 1 Chapter 1 without use of DNV classification expertice shall not have the maltese cross in front of the class notation

208 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. Vessels classified in accordance with NRAR Part 1 Chapter 1 without use of DNV classification expertice shall not have the maltese cross in front of the class notation 209 DNV rules fully applicable. 210 DNV rules fully applicable.

C Definitions

C 100 Terms


















D Classification of Newbuildings

D 100 Risk and vulnerability analysis



D 200 General requirements for documentation

201 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: RNoN naval vessels are to be classified according to NRAR. The additional documentation that normally shall be submitted for NRAR classification is specified in the relevant parts of NRAR. . The additional documentation shall clearly show that the NRAR rules/requirements are fulfilled.


D 300 Classification basis


Guidance note: If the Vessel is not taken into a civilian class Society, the terms equivalent class and classification shall be understood as NDLO for military safety inspection and approbation system for naval surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


303 DNV rules applicable.

Guidance note: If the Vessel is not taken into a civilian class Society, the terms equivalent class and classification shall be understood as NDLO for military safety inspection and approbation system for naval surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



D 400 Yard qualification

401 The requirements stated in NRAR Part 0 F (Quality Assurance) shall apply. If applicable, deviation from these requirements will be stated in the contract.

D 500 Working relations

501 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The arrangement for regular quality meetings shall in the contract be stated in the section identifying the Program Management Plan (PMP) or Statement of Work (STOW).

D 600 Certification of components and equipment


D 700 Confidentiality


702 In the case that a classification society (or similar institution) performs work on behalf of NDMSA, this classification society shall store files and records in accordance with confidentiality and security requirements set forward by NDMSA.

703 Communication between yard and any classification society (or similar institution) working on behalf of NDMSA shall comply with relevant security procedures identified/specified by NDMSA.

D 800 Area identification


E Deviations from the Rules

E 100 General

101 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Norwegian Armed Forces’ naval and naval support vessels as defined in NRAR Pt.0 are to be classified according to NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1, in addition to Pt.1 through Pt.4 and Pt.5 Ch.14 in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC. Other parts of the DNV rules may be used instead if better suitable.

102 DNV rules applicable. Vessels classified in accordance with NRAR will be given the additional class notation (navdist)

103 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Deviations shall be subject to risk assessment and the decision shall be explined in appendix to Seaworthiness Document.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.2: Arrangements Page 13


Section 2 Arrangements This Section covers requirements regarding deck arrangements, watertight compartments, accommodation, stores, escape routes and internal structures. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA) and approbation, as well as abbreviations and definitions are covered by Part 0 – General Information and Requirements.

A Deck Arrangements

A 100 Deck definitions

101 Bulkhead deck is the watertight deck above the flooded waterline at which all main watertight bulkheads terminate. 1 deck is normally defined as the bulkhead deck. In regions with raised quarter deck the main watertight bulkheads shall extend to this deck.

102 1.deck is the uppermost deck extending completely and continuously from stem to stern. 2.deck, 3.deck etc. are respectively the first, second, etc. deck below 1.deck. 01 deck, 02 deck, etc. are respectively the first, the second, etc. deck above 1.deck. 2.deck, 3.deck etc. below 1.deck shall be watertight. Exceptions may be allowed, upon approval, in machinery space.


104 DNV rules fully applicable with the following amendment.

Guidance note: On small vessels RNoN may decide to use a different definition for the damage control deck. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 The damage control deck is the deck on which the damage control equipment and stations are located. It is the uppermost covered deck having fore and aft access through watertight openings in the main transverse bulkheads. The damage control deck is watertight and the weather protection is made water and gastight. The damage control deck shall be above the flooded water line and such that progressive flooding from water on parts of the deck will not take place.

106 A double bottom shall be fitted in the entire length of the ship. The space between the shell plating and inner bottom is normally used for tanks. The top of the inner bottom is normally called tank top.

107 The structure including floors and girders between the tank top and shell plating is all parts of the bottom structure.

108 Weather deck shall have camber in order to prevent accumulation of water. The camber can consist of a continuous curve or straight lines.

109 There shall be arranged drains in all decks in all rooms

A 200 Rescue area


A 300 Guard-rails and handholds




B Watertight and gas tight compartments Guidance note: The name of the Sub-section compared to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.2 is changed in order to include gas tight compartments. In addition a new Sub-section element is introduced, B10, which describes general requirements not accounted for in the DNV rules. In NRAR it is distinguished between main watertight bulkhead and watertight bulkhead. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

B 10 Watertight and gas tight bulkheads, decks and compartments. General.

11 A watertight bulkhead or deck is a structural bulkhead or deck dimensioned to withstand a prescribed pressure head without water leakage.

12 A main watertight bulkhead is a continuous transverse watertight bulkhead extending from bottom to the bulkhead deck and from side to side. All other transverse or longitudinal watertight bulkheads are designated as watertight bulkheads. The primary functions of main watertight bulkheads are:

- to limit the extent of flooding after accidental or action damage - to form the limits of the NBC-zones - to support the hull plating and longitudinal structure and maintain the external hull form - to help resist hull torsional loads - to support the internal decks and equipment attached to the bulkheads.

Guidance note: Other primary functions may apply, i.e. blast boundaries etc. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

13 Access openings, pipes, electrical cables and remote control extensions penetrating watertight and airtight bulkheads and decks, shall be arranged with penetration fittings with the same degree of tightness as the actual bulkhead or deck being protected and be of approved type.

14 A main watertight compartment is a compartment bounded by two adjacent main watertight bulkheads, shell and bulkhead deck. All other compartments bounded by main watertight bulkheads, watertight bulkheads, decks and shell are designated watertight compartments.

15 Gas tight compartment boundaries shall fulfil air test requirements according to DNV NBC-2 notation

16 A gas tight compartment is a compartment which fulfils the air test requirements. A gas tight compartment may be bounded by gas tight bulkheads and decks, main watertight bulkheads, watertight bulkheads, decks and shell.

17 A watertight compartment is also gas tight.

B 100 Main Watertight bulkheads

101 Main watertight bulkheads shall be installed and located to fulfil stability and buoyancy compartmentation requirements according to NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec. 5.

102 Main watertight bulkheads are required to be gas tight.

103 Access and ventilation openings in main watertight bulkheads shall have watertight closing appliances of approved type.



104 Access and ventilation openings shall be kept closed and monitored in the damage control centre and the machinery control room in accordance with established watertight and gas tight conditions in force.

Guidance note: Monitoring of access and ventilation openings with classification letters Y, Z and M will be determined on a project to project basis. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 For smaller vessels (L< 30m), step or recess in collision bulkheads above the level of the deepest waterline or tank top (whichever is highest up) can be accepted.

106 Access openings leading to compartments, except for tanks, cofferdams and voids, shall be fitted with doors arranged to swing from midship and according to the following standard plans (or minimum similar functionality in all respect):

- KNMS-215-2000S - KNMS-215-2001S - KNMS-215-2002S

107 Sill height shall be

- 230 mm above damage control deck inside vessel - 600 mm in bulkheads below damage control deck

108 Quick acting doors shall be used for access to manned spaces, and elsewhere as specified by NDLO.

109 Access openings leading to tanks, cofferdams and voids shall be fitted with manhole covers according to standard plan KNMS-215-2034S (or minimum similar functionality in all respect).

110 Steps or recesses in main transverse bulkheads are not accepted for two- and three compartment vessels.

Guidance note: As a consequence of this requirement, double bottom or side tanks should be divided in line with main transverse bulkheads. However, a total un-alignment of maximum 1.0 [m] is permissible. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

111 Access openings shall not penetrate main watertight bulkheads below the damage control deck. Exception may, after approval, be accepted for manholes leading to tanks, cofferdams, and voids.

112 Pipe, electrical cable and manhole penetrations shall be minimised to the most practical extent below damage control deck.

113 Lightweight pipes connected by gaskets and friction only (drain and sewage) and piping systems containing such elements are not allowed to penetrate main watertight bulkheads.

114 Mechanical remote control extensions are not allowed to penetrate main watertight bulkheads.

B 200 Main Watertight bulkheads (for HS, LC ans NSC)




202 For smaller vessels (L< 30m), 3 watertight compartments may be accepted. A collision bulkhead and a bulkhead in front of the engine room shall be installed as a minimum requirement, provided damage stability criteria are met.

203 Upon approval, only collision bulkhead needs to be extended to the quarterdeck in a region with raised quarterdeck.

B 300 Collision bulkhead (for HS, LC and NSC)


B 400 Watertight bulkheads

401 Watertight bulkheads shall be installed as needed to form watertight compartments as required for the protection of explosives and vital equipment, and to form tanks, cofferdams and voids.

402 Bulkheads forming the outside boundaries or deckhouse shall be watertight and gas tight.

403 Bulkheads surrounding engine- and boiler exhaust uptakes below bulkhead deck are required watertight and airtight.

404 Access openings in watertight bulkheads leading to compartments except tanks, cofferdams and voids shall be fitted with doors located to swing out of the compartment served and according to standard plans (or minimum similar functionality in all respect):

- KNMS-215-2000S - KNMS-215-2001S - KNMS-215-2002S - KNMS-215-2007S - KNMS-215-2009S

405 Sill heights shall be as follows:

- 230 mm above damage control deck inside vessel - 600 mm in bulkheads below damage control deck - 460 mm in bulkheads surrounding deckhouses

406 Quick acting doors shall be used for access to manned space and elsewhere as required by NDLO.

407 Access-openings leading to tanks, cofferdams and voids shall be fitted with manhole covers according to standard plan KNMS-215-2024S (or minimum similar functionality in all respect).

B 500 Gas tight bulkheads

501 Gas tight bulkheads shall be installed as needed to form gas tight compartments as required, to avoid entry of NBC agents into citadels and to divide deckhouses in separate gas tight sections.

502 Bulkheads surrounding engine and boiler room exhaust uptake above bulkhead deck are required to be gas tight.

503 Bulkheads forming the outside boundaries or deckhouse shall be gas tight.

504 Access openings in gas tight bulkheads shall be fitted with doors according to standard plan KNMS-215-2006S (or minimum similar functionality in all respect).



B 600 Watertight and gas tight decks

601 Bulkhead deck and weather portions of decks are required to be gas tight and watertight.

602 Decks below and including 1 deck shall be watertight. Exceptions may be allowed, upon approval, in machinery spaces. .

603 Access openings leading to compartments, except for tanks, cofferdams and voids, shall be fitted with hatches according to the following standard plans (or minimum similar functionality in all respect):

- KNMS-215-2010S - KNMS-215-2011S - KNMS-215-2012S - KNMS-215-2013S - KNMS-215-2014S - KNMS-215-2016S

604 Access hatches from manned spaces shall be fitted with 450 mm escape scuttles according to standard plan KNMS-215-2018S (or minimum similar functionality in all respect).

605 Height of hatch coamings shall be as follows:

- 450 and 600 mm, on weather decks abaft and forward of 0.25 L from F.P respectively. - 230 mm inside vessel.

606 Access openings leading to tanks, cofferdams and voids shall be fitted with manhole covers according to the following standard plans (or minimum similar functionality in all respect):

- KNMS-215-2024S - KNMS-215-2025S - KNMS-215-2026S

607 Manhole covers in compartments where water can accumulate shall be on coamings according to KNMS-215-2026S (or minimum similar functionality in all respect).

B 700 Watertight compartments

701 Watertight compartments are compartments in addition to main watertight compartments described in B14 and B101.

702 Watertight compartments are required for the following vital spaces located below bulkhead deck:

- Magazines, also watertight above bulkhead deck - Operating rooms - Electronic rooms - Sonar rooms - Degaussing rooms - Gyro rooms - Transformer and converter rooms - Switchboard rooms - Machinery- and boiler rooms - Machinery control rooms - Steering gear rooms - Escape trunks below bulkhead deck - Stair trunks - Elevator trunks

Dependent on the type of vessel, deletions and additions may be required.



703 Pipe penetrations in watertight compartments shall be in accordance with the requirements stated in NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.6. Electrical cable penetration fittings shall be in accordance with the requirements stated in NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.8.

B 800 Gas tight compartments

801 The following compartments are required gas tight:

- Magazines - Compartments containing flammable liquids and materials - Battery rooms - Decontamination stations - Wheelhouse - Escape trunks - Machinery and boiler rooms.

Dependent on the type of vessel, deletions and additions may be required.

C Zones

C 100 General principles



C 200 Fire control zones


202 A drawing defining the different zones and the fire rating of the boundaries shall be worked out and delivered for approval during the design process.

C 300 Damage control zones


302 A drawing defining the zones shall be worked out and delivered for approval during the design process.

C 400 Gas tight division


402 An NBC zone may consist of a group of gastight compartments forming a citadel. The access to the group of compartments is arranged through air locks.

403 An NBC zone has autonomic ventilation system preventing ingress of contaminated air. Ventilation systems used in connection with NBC/gastight citadels shall have excess pressure. Locks to and from the gas citadel shall ensure constant excess pressure in the gas citadel. All doors in the gas citadel shall open outwards.

404 A drawing defining the zones (citadels) shall be worked out and delivered for approval during the design process.



405 More specific requirements to NBC zones, if any, will be specified by NDLO on a project to project basis.

C 500 Hazardous areas


502 Other hazardous areas shall be defined as appropriate. These areas may be related to RADHAZ, arc of weapon fire, gun blast etc.

D Accommodation

D 100 General

101 Public spaces and crew accommodation shall be designed and arranged to protect the occupants from unfavourable environmental conditions, and to minimize the risk of injury to occupants during normal and emergency conditions. An accommodation plan shall be submitted to NDLO for approval. The plan shall at least include arrangement of cabins, public spaces and the baggage area. Sleeping cabins may be arranged below bulkhead deck, but not forward of the collision bulkhead.



E Stores

E 100 General

101 In stores, adequate means shall be fitted to prevent shifting of stored goods in accordance with the design acceleration in addition to slamming /whipping of the vessel.

102 Special requirements to stores may be required if specific shock requirements are given.

103 Elastic (rubber band like) tie downs or securing devices shall be avoided. Only rope or textile band with a spanner are allowed for securing if needed.

104 For safety reasons it may be required that ammunition stores are equipped for flooding. The structure shall be able to handle the pressure. Special requirements shall then be given with respect to speed of flooding and draining and to which level the room shall be flooded.

105 Drains in store rooms shall to largest possible extent be protected from clogging caused by stored materials which may have come adrift.

F Escape routes

F 100 General

101 The vessel shall have escape routes for safe evacuation, designed according to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code” Annex Chapter VII Regulation 16 and 17.



102 Plans for escape routes shall be submitted to NDLO for approval.

103 Doors to escape routes shall open in the direction of the escape route.

Guidance note: Doors from cabins and other rooms intended for fewer than 10 people may open inwards. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.3: Design Loads Page 21


Section 3 Design Loads This section covers requirements and regulations regarding design loads for naval surface vessels. Requirements concerning structural strength are dealt with in Section 4. All general requirements, abbreviations and definitions concerning NRAR as a whole are covered in Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements.

A General Requirements

A 100 General


102 A document (Loading Plan) describing all relevant loads, load combinations and accelerations for use in the strength analyses shall be worked out and presented for approval during the design process.

103 Relevant loads and load-cases (combination of loads) shall be established for the relevant levels of strength analysis. If not otherwise expressly stated in the contract, Level 1 and Level 3 analysis are required.

Guidance note: Strength calculation shall be performed by direct stress calculations. Loads shall be derived in a format suitable for direct strength analysis. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Relevant loads are, but not limited to:

• still water loads, • linear and non-linear global hull girder wave loads, • external water pressure

o steady state (linear or non-linear) o slamming/impact loads (non-linear), o pressure above WL

• deck loads • flooding loads (intentionally or unintentionally) • internal pressure in tanks, • inertia loads from heavy objects, • thrust forces from propulsion. • pressure pulses from propulsion (e.g. waterjets), • local loads from ride control equipment such as foils or fins, • impact loads from floating objects and objects falling on the deck. • ice pressure.

A 200 Direct calculations and model tests (for HS, LC and NSC)

201 For vessels of any length the global wave loads are generally to be determined in accordance with DNV Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1 and Sec.2 in the Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC. The exceptions and amendments to DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1 and Sec.2 with respect to load calculation are described in Item 206.


203 For local loads, the largest uncertainty is associated with wave impact loads (slamming loads). Quantifications of such loads shall be based on model tests or properly verified calculation methods. In



case model test are used, the test procedures shall be carefully planned in order to obtain useful data. Pressure shall be monitored as average pressure of areas not less then the square of framespacing. The results shall be obtained in irregular waves.

204 Calculations based on linear theory shall be performed in any case. The importance of non-linear effects shall be assessed. The linear calculations shall be supplemented with non-linear effects if necessary. Important non-linear effects shall be accounted for either in the direct calculations or as a correction factor (to results from linear calculations) based on model tests or experience from comparable designs. The calculations shall be based on the operational restrictions and operational profile of the vessel (see A201). Motion damping devices shall be incorporated in the analysis if they will significantly influence the investigated type of vessel response.

205 The influence of wave impact loads and slamming on the vertical bending moment is normally not accounted for in linear or non-linear hydrodynamic analyses. The influence shall be added to the moment envelope derived from linear or non-linear analyses.

Guidance note: Linear analyses (e.g. strip theory) resulting in vessel motion, accelerations and external pressure distribution can be used for determination of

• linear global wave loads, • linear steady state external water pressure, • inertia loads from heavy objects and tank content.

In heavy seas, non-linear Froude-Krylov and restoring forces are important for ships with non-vertical ship sides and shallow aft body. Significant wave impact loads can occur on craft with large flare, wetdeck, centre bow and shallow aft body. Air leakage on SESs is another non-linear effect that may be important. Such effects may need to be coupled to the motion responses to be calculated directly in the time domain. Dynamic effects such as springing and whipping may increase the hull girder response and fatigue damage significantly. The effect of springing is of particular importance when the frequency of the wave encounter is close to the natural period of the ship structure. This is especially the case for high forward speed. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

206 The following exceptions and amendments in Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.1, Sec.2 and Sec.6 of the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC with respect to load calculation shall apply. Items in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1, Sec.2 and Sec. 6 not mentioned here shall apply as is. Other subjects included in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1 are dealt with in other NRAR sections. Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 1, A201: The operational restrictions of the craft shall be given as a table showing the maximum allowed speed as a function of significant wave height. The operational restrictions shall be based on hydrodynamic analyses and/or model tests. Criteria for determination of operational restrictions may be regularity, passenger and crew safety and structural safety. The operational restrictions may be quantified based on horizontal and vertical acceleration, slamming rate, relative motion between the vessel and the waves, etc. The response of the vessels shall be based on the steepest possible wave, i.e. 7:1 (length to height) or shortest possible period in the scatter diagram. The peak response is assumed to occur at wave length similar to the vessel’s length. Hence, response shall also be calculated for this wave length for lower sea-states where the steepest wave is shorter than the vessel’s length. It is possible to specify that the vessel is not at all allowed to operate in sea states with significant wave height above a certain level. These sea states can then be discarded from the direct calculations. In this case, it shall be documented that it is possible to seek shelter and avoid sea states with significant wave height above the maximum allowed.



The operational profile of the vessel shall be given as the amount of time the vessel spends operating at different speeds and shall be accounted for in direct calculations. Speed reduction due to increased resistance in waves can be taken into account if the speed reduction in all headings is known. Direct strength calculations and hydrodynamic analyses shall be based on the operational restrictions and the operational profile of the craft.

Guidance note: The operational restrictions are normally based on DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 B200, which determines the relationship between maximum allowable speed and significant wave height for a given design vertical acceleration. These relations are uncertain and should be used with care. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 1, A203: Calculated global design wave loads shall be calculated and documented in accordance with the requirements in DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec.2 NDLO reserves the right to evaluate received documentation and determine the design load level in each case. For craft less than 50 m, DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.3 may be used for calculating the global design loads (Hull Girder Loads) if approved by NDLO. The limitations with respect to L/D and 50m shall then not apply (global loads shall be calculated regardless of length and L/D ratio). NDLO reserves the right to modify parts of DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.3. Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 1, A204: Computer programs used for direct calculation of loads shall be verified by results from model tests or full scale measurements. The program shall be verified for vessels of similar types as that under consideration. For new designs deviating significantly from previously tested designs, model tests shall be performed. Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec.1 C101 For all high speed and light craft designs, it is necessary to perform local analyses of parts of the structure. Parts in DNV HSLCNSC Ch.2 Sec.9 and Ch.3 Sec.9 give the background and assumptions for such analyses as well as allowable stresses for steel and aluminium structures. For Structures made in different material (i.e. FRP) the loads are the same. Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.1, C201 The level 2 procedure as described in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec1 C202-C207 may be applied for high speed and light craft designs of monohull or twin hull type, i.e. for craft which there exist a set of formulas for global design loads as given in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3, Ch.1 Sec.3. The Level 2 analysis shall only be applied for initial design purposes if nothing else is expressly stated in the contract. Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.1, C301 The level 3 procedure as described in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec1 C302-C307 shall in general be applied for all high speed and light craft designs if not otherwise is expressly stated in the contract. For designs which are not specified by the global rule loading formulas in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.3, the level 3 procedure shall be applied as a minimum. For high speed craft designs referred to in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec1 C201, the level 3 procedure shall be applied in the following cases:

- when the hull form is such that the rule formulas in Ch.1 Sec.3 are not expected to give reliable results

- when the operational profile of the craft is such that the rule requirements in Ch.1 to Ch.3 are not adequate



Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1 C305 Frame and girder models as described in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.4 shall be included in the global strength analysis, at least, for part of the hull amidships and in the fore and aft body.

Guidance note: For craft with long and slender fore ship (such as SWATH, semi-SWATH, SES or wave piercer), the case with impact pressure on one side of the hull(s) is of special importance. ---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.2 A102 The analysis model shall include an accurate weight distribution. The distribution shall be three dimensional in order to have the correct rotational inertia properties. The number of lumped masses shall typically be about 2000. If the distribution changes during the design phase, a rerun of the analysis with new weight distribution has to be performed at certain extreme conditions in order to evaluate the significance of the new distribution. Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.2 B105 Wave load and static loads shall be combined in the most unfavourable way: However:

- If the most unfavourable still water moment is always in hog, only 67% of the value shall be deducted from the wave sagging moment and 100% of the value shall be added to the wave hogging moment.

- If the most unfavourable still water moment is always in sag, only 67% of the value shall be deducted from the wave hogging moment and 100% of the value shall be added to the wave sagging moment.

Guidance note: The reason for not deducting 100% is to preserve the inherent margins of safety. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.2 B106 Still water loads shall be found by simple integration of distributed load and buoyancy. At high speed, the steady sinkage and trim may significantly modify the steady vertical loads compared to the zero speed condition. This effect shall be assessed. Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.2, C102 Transfer functions shall be calculated based on a recognised linear strip theory or better. Calculation parameters shall be selected so that the results converge. For linear strip theory, relevant parameters are

• Strip length / number of sections • Number of segments used with the sink/source method.

If strip theory is applied, the strip length shall be small enough to properly reproduce the wave loads at all relevant wave frequencies. Strip theory is not recommended for waves with length shorter than six times the strip length. Conventional strip theory approaches have to be applied with care for

(or Fn> 0.4). Alternative theories must then be considered.

Guidance note: In quartering and following seas, strip theory should be used with care since the frequency of encounter between the vessel and the wave may be small. In this case, the predicted motions can be extremely large. This can be avoided by using additional controls, such as e.g. rudders. In addition, important second order phenomenon related to following seas (e.g. broaching) cannot be predicted with linear strip theory. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.2, C105 Craft with large flare, wet deck or centre bow and/or shallow stern, which may be exposed to significant wave impact, shall be analysed by non-linear analyses for the ultimate limit state load prediction. Alternatively, the non-linear effects can be taken into account as correction factors from model tests or experience from comparable designs. Pt.3, Ch.9 Sec.2, C106 Linear modelling of the craft responses is normally sufficient for fatigue assessment purposes.

Guidance note: For craft with high degree of non-linearities, i.e. where the response at 20 year probability level differs more than 15% between linear and non-linear calculations, the non linear effects on the fatigue strength shall be assessed. ---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 2, C201 Design wave loads shall be calculated based on a 20- year return period or equivalent, and shall be based on the operational restrictions for the craft. A probability level of 10-8 is regarded as equivalent. This corresponds to 108 wave encounters. Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 2, C206 The wave spectra and scatter diagram to be used in the calculations will be stated in the contract. If not stated, Bretchneider (two-parameter ITTC) wave spectrum shall be used. Scatter diagrams for North Atlantic and the Northern North Sea applies with 50% of the sailing time in each of the areas. Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 2, C303 The worst combination of the different loads shall be defined from the correlations found in the direct calculations.

Guidance note: As a guideline the following combination may be used:

- Vertical bending + 0,8 x Torsional bending + 0,2 x Horizontal bending - Torsional bending + 0,8 x vertical bending + 0,2 x Horizontal bending - Horizontal bending + 0,2 x Vertical bending + 0,8 x Torsional bending - Torsional bending + 0,8 x Horizontal bending + 0,2 Vertical bending

---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 2, C304 If a full stochastic long term analysis is performed, the load combinations are automatically accounted for. Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.2 C401 Design accelerations in all directions and about all axes shall be calculated based on a 20 year return period or equivalent short term value in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.2 C205. The transverse acceleration shall be applied in racking analysis.

Guidance note: The vertical design acceleration found from sea-keeping analyses shall not be used for rule based slamming calculations. The rule based vertical acceleration found in Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.3 A300 shall be used for rule based slamming calculation. ---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.2 C402 This paragraph is included in 401.



Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 2, C501 For craft with large flare, shallow draft or shallow aft body, wet deck or centre bow, local design impact pressures shall be considered.

Guidance note: Design impact pressures can be taken as the space averaged pressure over the design load area for element considered. The definition of design load area as given in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 C201 can normally be applied.

---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec.2, C504 DNV rules fully applicable

Guidance note: Calculation of slamming and impact loads is numerically difficult. Computer codes shall not be used unless they are properly verified. Experimental measurements are highly recommended. Direct calculation of slamming and impact loads shall be performed in the time domain. The time step shall be small enough to capture the sudden rise of the slamming force in the start of an impact. The relative velocity between the wave and the actual location on the vessel can be based on linear strip theory. The slamming load affects the vessel response and vice versa. This effect is most important when slamming occurs frequently and will (probably) reduce the slamming load. The 1. order incident wave is normally sufficient for calculation of bow slamming. Using 2. order incident waves may have some effect in severe seas. Slamming loads occurring downstream may be affected by wave diffraction due to the presence of the vessel.

The slamming load is dependent on the time rate of the change of the wetted area. This may be calculated using e.g. a boundary element method. The slamming load may be calculated in two dimensions. This usually gives conservative estimates. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 6, B103 The DNV Rcommended Practice DNV-RP-C203 shall be used as general guideline for fatigue calculations. Class note 30.7 may be used in addition with respect to methodology and stress concentration factors. Stress range reduction due to mean stress level does not apply, i.e. fm less than 1 shall never be used.

Guidance note: Linear analysis of global loads is normally sufficient for fatigue assessment. Dynamic effects such as springing and whipping may increase the fatigue damage significantly and shall be concidered. The former is of particular importance when the frequency of the wave encounter is close to the natural period of the ship structure. This is especially the case for high forward speed. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



Pt. 3, Ch. 9 Sec. 6, B104 The fatigue life can be calculated based on the characteristic load level and a Weibull shape parameter. In this case, the characteristic load level and the Weibull parameter shall be found by direct calculation of long term stress distribution (in accordance with the above description) or by model tests. The contribution to fatigue damage is largest for stress cycles with a probability of exceedance per cycle in the range of 10-2 – 10-5. The Weibull parameter shall be selected so that the resulting probability distribution fits particularly well in this range.

Guidance note: The fatigue life is very sensitive to the resulting Weibull parameter, especially if this parameter becomes less than 1. Introduction of operational restrictions tend to increase the Weibull parameter. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

For a linear analysis, the number of cycles can be found in the frequency domain based on the spectral moments of the response. If a non-linear time domain analysis is performed, the fatigue damage shall be calculated from the time series using the Rainflow counting procedure. ---e-n-d---of---A206--- additions and corrections to Pt3. Ch.9 regarding loads---

A 300 Vertical design acceleration (for HS, LC and NSC)

301 The design vertical acceleration shall be determined by direct calculations, full scale measurements or model experiments documented to have a sufficient accuracy. The design vertical acceleration is affecting the global design loads given by DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC. The global design loads shall be found by direct calculations in accordance with A200. The design vertical acceleration is affecting the design slamming pressure on bottom and flat cross structures, DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 3 Ch. 1 Sec. 2 C201 and C401. If these loads are calculated using rule formulas, the design vertical acceleration given by DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 3 Ch. 1 Sec. 2 B200 shall be used in the calculations with fg factor according to Table A1 in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.3 A301. Alternatively, these loads shall be found by direct calculations in accordance with A200 (incorporating all relevant effects). The design vertical acceleration is affecting the operational restrictions and the maximum allowed wave height for different vessel speeds. The operational restrictions and speed/waveheight restrictions shall be found by direct calculations in accordance with A200.

Guidance note: Design vertical accelerations given by DNV are based on model tests with planning monohulls and should be used with care for larger semi-displacement vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


303 The DNV vertical design acceleration according to 301 will be stated in the "Appendix to the classification certificate" if used for slamming calculations. In addition the design accelerations found from A200 will be stated.

B Hull Girder Loads (for HS, LC and NSC)

B 100 Longitudinal still water loads (for HS, LC and NSC)




B 200 Longitudinal wave bending loads (for HS, LC and NSC)

201 Global design loads shall be established by direct calculations. The direct calculations shall be in compliance with A200. If other data are available from full scale measurements or model experiments, which are documented to have a higher reliability than the present direct calculation methods in giving the right magnitude of the wave loads, these data shall be used. For preliminary design, the wave loads given in the following are considered to be suitable for rough estimation of the order of magnitude.

202 Rough estimates for midship vertical wave bending moment and shear force can be found in the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC Pt. 3, Ch. 1 Sec 3.

B 300 Horizontal bending moment and shear force (for HS, LC and NSC)



B 400 Torsional moment (for HS, LC and NSC)

401 Rough estimates for torsional moment in twin hull vessels is given by DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC, Pt.3, Ch.1, Sec. 3. However, global design loads shall be established by direct calculations. The direct calculations shall be in compliance with A 200.



C Local Loads (for HS, LC and NSC)

C 100 Sea pressures (for HS, LC and NSC)

101 Minimum sea pressure acting on vessel's bottom, sides, decks and superstructures shall be according to Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 C500 in the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC. Minimum sea pressures shall be according to Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 C501 Table C1 in the Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC. The service restriction None and R0 are equivalent. The sea pressure on equipment on foredeck, front of deck house or superstructure has to be especially considered. For vessels shipping green sea on the fore deck, the following pressures shall be used: Equipment on the forecastle: Min 100kPa Front of superstructure: Min 100kPa applied as quasi static load over 25% of the area at time. In the aft body (AP to 0,2L from AP) ks shall be linearly increased from 7,5 to 11,25, but not to a higher value than at FP.




C 200 Slamming and impact pressures (for HS, LC and NSC)

201 Calculation method described in A200.

202 Calculation method described in A200.

C 300 Liquid pressure in tanks (for HS, LC and NSC)

301 DNV rules are in general applicable with the corrections below. Internal pressure on tank boundaries (including top of tank) shall not be less than

ltvs axlagh )()( 0 −++ ρρ

where:

av is the vertical design acceleration according to A200 lt is the length of tank al is the longitudinal acceleration hs is the distance from bottom of tank to point considered. x is the distance from forward bulkhead to point considered.

Pressures in tanks shall be applied without deduction of eventually external pressure. Tanks in the double bottom structure shall if applicable be loaded in a chessboard pattern.

Guidance note: For large tanks with free surfaces, the effect of sloshing should be considered. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C 400 Dry cargo, stores and equipment (for HS, LC and NSC)

401 The pressure on inner bottom, decks or hatch covers shall be taken as:

p = ρ H (g0 + av) (kN/m2) av = as given in A200 H = stowage height in m.

Standard values of r and H are given in Table C2 in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 C700.

Load case 1 Load case 2



If decks (excluding inner bottom) or hatch covers are designed for cargo loads heavier than the standard loads given in Table C2 in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.2 C700, the notation dk (+) or ha (+), respectively, will be entered in the Register of Ships. The design cargo load in t/m2 will be given for each individual cargo space in the "Appendix to Classification Certificate". Heavy units: The vertical force acting on supporting structures from rigid units of cargo, equipment or other structural components shall normally be taken as:

Pv = (g0 + av) M (kN)

av = as given in A200 M = mass of unit in tonnes

C 500 Loads on foundations

501 For all equipment, including weapon systems, with a mass of more than 500 kg, their mass, mass centre and mass moment of inertia with respect to cartesian axes at centre of gravity shall be specified. The weapon system itself is not within the scope of this section. For cranes and other lifting appliances a working diagram for moments shall be included.

D Operational Loads

D 100 General

101 Loads caused by reaction forces, gas pressure, heat etc. during launching of weapon systems shall be considered. The manufacturer shall specify the loads.

Guidance note: Free field blast pressure from guns can normally not be used directly in strength calculations. The blast will hit the structure and dynamic effects are significant with respect to the pressure pulse it self and the interaction with the structure. The quasistatic pressure may be as high as four times the free field pressure. To avoid misinterpretations the manufacturer shall be asked to specify the pressure pulse hitting a rigid surface. This pulse may be used in a dynamic analysis for response calculation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


103 Other operational loads may be specified with reference to Pt. 2, Ch. 1 Combat Survivability and the contract.

E Accidental Loads

E 100 Local damage

101 Frames and decks shall be checked for extreme loading due to water filling caused by battle type damage. All relevant combinations of water filling shall be considered: All watertight decks shall be checked for an even distributed load equivalent to a water column equal to the distance from the deck to the bulkhead deck or flooding waterline, which ever is highest. This implies two load cases as the load shall be applied from both sides. In this context it is important to consider the resistance to the deck hatches when loaded from both sides.

102 Watertight compartments other than: Main watertight compartments and trunks spanning two decks or more. These compartments shall be checked for hydrostatic pressure with water height equal to the



actual deck height. This implies two load cases. The loads shall be applied from both sides. In this context it is important to consider the resistance to the doors when loaded from both sides.

103 Trunks (stairs, elevators, etc.) penetrating watertight decks or decks without watertight closures in the deck(s) shall resist hydrostatic pressure from both sides (two load cases) of a water column equal to the distance up to bulkhead deck or flooded waterline, whichever is highest. In this context it is important to consider the resistance to the doors when loaded from both sides.

104 Other local accidental loads and damages may be specified with reference to Pt. 2, Ch. 1 Combat Survivability and the contract.

E 200 Global damage


202 Global damage scenarios may be specified with reference to Pt. 2, Ch. 1 Combat Survivability and the contract.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.4: Structural Strength Page 32


Section 4 Structural Strength This section covers requirements and regulations regarding structural strength for naval surface vessels. Requirements concerning design loads are dealt with in Section 3. All general requirements, abbreviations and definitions concerning NRAR as a whole are covered by Part 0 – General Information and Requirements.

A General requirements

A 100 Structural strength


102 In general the strength requirements stated in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.1 shall apply, with the following additions and corrections:

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 A302: Global hull strength analysis demonstrating stresses and deflections in the hull structure will normally be required.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 A401: Certificates issued by Det Norske Veritas (or the authority NDLO may advice), will be required for the following materials/components, but not limited to: –– all materials to be used in hull, superstructure and deckhouses –– trim foils, flaps or stabilising fins. –– rudder and rudder stock –– steering gear –– anchor and chain/wire ropes –– windlass.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 B202:

The watertight bulkheads are in general to extend to the freeboard deck. Hence, the bulkhead deck is in general located at or above freeboard deck, ref. NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.2. Afterpeak bulkheads may, however, terminate at the first watertight deck above the waterline at draught T.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 B203:

For craft with two or more continuous decks and a large freeboard (more than 1,5 the craft draught T) to the uppermost continuous deck (1. deck), a relocation of the bulkhead deck may be considered. The bulkhead deck shall in any case be one deck above the damage control deck. A relocation of the bulkhead deck has to be approved by NDLO.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 B401:

Openings may be accepted in watertight bulkheads (but shall be kept to a minimum from a practical point of view) except in that part of the collision bulkhead which is situated below the freeboard deck and main watertight bulkheads below damage control deck. See NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.2 for reference.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 B501: Potable water tanks shall be separated from tanks, containing different liquid, by cofferdams.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 C301: This paragraph is not applicable.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 C501: The evaluation of structural response to vibrations caused by impulses from engine and propeller blades shall be approved by NDLO.



- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 D203: The paragraph is applicable with the following additions and corrections: Addition: Where step in the strength deck according to the definition exist, both decks involved are defined as strength deck in an overlap region. The overlap region shall be at least:

HB +2

Correction: Analyses are required to estimate the effective width of the various decks in the craft, and thereby their contribution to the hull girder section modulus. Strength deck requirements may then have to be applied to effective part of all upper decks.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 D209: Girder is a collective term for primary supporting members, usually supporting stiffeners. In the DNV context Girder can be: –– bottom, side and deck transverses –– floor (a bottom transverse) –– stringer (a horizontal girder on vertical panels) –– web frame –– vertical web on bulkheads. (I.e. almost all members heavier than local plate stiffeners)

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 D212: All foundations integrated to the hull or superstructure, shall be considered as parts of the hull or superstructure.

- Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.1 D213: The term “Non structural” elements applies only to element which is clearly an outfitting part which not constrains the free deflection of the structure. A bulkhead welded to the structure at two edges is structural. On the other hand, is light weight bulkheads, which are coupled free from taking any structural load (bulkhead between deck and panelled ceiling), not a part of the hull structure or superstructure. The term “non load carrying element” is an element that do not carry any structural load regardless of the intension.

103 In general the requirements stated in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.2 shall apply, with the following additions and corrections:

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B102: The longitudinals shall be continuous through transverse members. However, longitudinals not continuing on the other side of a transverse member are allowed to terminate at the transverse member. In that case there shall be a bracket at the termination. The bracket shall not end on unsupported plate which may be laterally loaded. In that case the bracket has to be extended to the nearest stiffening member.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B103: Longitudinal stiffeners in slamming area shall have a shear connection to transverse members.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B104: Distance from end supports (transverse frame, transverse bulkhead or toe of bracket) to scallop or any opening in the web shall at least be equal to the web height and never smaller than 150mm.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B105: Where numbers of longitudinal stiffeners are reduced due to reduced width of the bottom or deck, the transition zone is recommended to be as shown in Figure 1.



Transverse frames

Longitudinalstiffeners

Transverse frames

Longitudinalstiffeners

Figure 1: Transition zone for longitudinal stiffeners

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B201:

Longitudinal girders are to be continuous in way of transverse bulkheads. If bracket on both side of transverse bulkhead and a vertical girder on the bulkhead are present at the location, the flange of the longitudinal girder may be tapered down to zero (1:5) on both sides after passing the toe of the bracket. It is then only the web plate that is continuous trough the transverse bulkhead. This is a preferred solution.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B401: In case a double bottom is fitted, the following and items 402, 403, 404 and 405 apply. Manholes are to be cut in the inner bottom, floors and longitudinal girders to provide access to all parts of the double bottom. The vertical extension of lightening holes is not to exceed one half of the girder height in general. Manholes shall be elliptical or of stadium type with the long axis oriented in the longitudinal direction. Manholes in the inner bottom plating are to have reinforcement rings. Manholes are not to be cut in the floors or girders in way of pillars.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B404:

The inner bottom plate (tank top), girders and stiffeners below shall be continuous through vertical bulkheads.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B405: Where the flange on girders and frames is welded directly to the edge of the inner bottom plate, a gusset shall be arranged. The gusset shall be a part of the inner bottom plate and extension shall be sufficient to avoid welding in areas with curved edges, shown in Figure 2.

Preferred

RB

Min. B/4

Preferred

RB

Min. B/4

RB

Min. B/4

Figure 2: Typical detail at the end of double bottoms. Welds kept away from radius.



- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B501: - The bilge keel and the flat bar to which it is attached, is not to terminate abruptly.

Ends are to be tapered, and internal stiffening is to be provided. Bilge keel has to end on internal stiffener. The ends shall extend 0 to 15 mm beyond the stiffener.

- Butts in the bilge keel and the flat bar are to be well clear of each other and of butts in the shell plating.

- Seems and butts in the shell plating shall cross the bilge keel at an angle not less than 60 deg.

- There is no requirement that the bilge keel shall be welded to a flat bar which again is welded to the shell plating. The bilge keel shall normally be welded directly on to the shell plate without doubling plate (flatbar). This is a better solution from a fatigue point of view.

- The bilge keel and flat bar are to be of the same material quality and preferably the same strength as the bilge strake to which they are attached. However, the design shall be such that, in case of collision, grounding, etc., the bilge keel is ripped off the shell without rupturing the shell plate.

- The loads due to ship motions shall be determined from the wave load analysis employing a viscous damping coefficient representative for seastates which contribute most to fatigue damage. The damping coefficient used in fatigue capacity assessment should be determined at 10-2 probability of exceedance.

- Fatigue calculations should be carried out by means of a spectral analysis. A component stochastic analysis as described in Classification Notes 30.7 is acceptable.

- For bilge keels of a closed type design, both static strength and fatigue shall be considered. The transfer functions for stress responses from the wave dynamics and motion induced drag forces shall be determined separately. The transfer functions shall be combined in the cumulative damage calculations.

- The closed type bilge keel shall be leak tested in order to ensure tightness. The tightness shall be tested at each ordinary docking interval.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B702:

The docking arrangement plan, giving calculated forces from the docking blocks, is to be submitted and approved. Structure in way of docking blocks is to be evaluated for the given docking forces.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B800: Keel - Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B801:

Cast keels are to be simple in design and all fillets are to have a large radius. Where connected to welded structures, the thickness is to be tapered gradually down to that of the adjoining plate thickness. At discontinuities of the keel structure, e.g. where sonar domes are fitted, the longitudinal as well as the transverse strength is to be maintained, e.g. by fitting bottom girders and/or heavy frames. Additional local reinforcements are to be carried out to ensure safe docking of the vessel, etc.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B802:

Plate keel: The dimensions of the keel plate shall in general not be less than:

Breadth : b = 750 + 4.5L mm (a) Thickness : t = 5.5 + 0.09L mm (b)

where L = length of vessel in metres, The breadth is to be kept for the whole length of the ship. The thickness of the keel plate 0,2L from AP and forward is to be at least 15% greater than the adjacent bottom plating. Within the after 0.3L of the hull length, the keel plate thickness may be reduced to that given in Eq. (b) at the after end.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B803:

Bar Keel: The dimensions of the bar keel shall in general not be less than:



Breadth : b = 10 + 0.6L mm (a) Height : h = 100 + 1.5L mm (b)

where L = length of vessel in metres. The breadth and thickness of the garboard strake shall in general not be less than given in Eq. (a) and (b) for the whole length of the vessel.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B900: Shell plating - Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 B901:

Seems and butts shall not coincide with welds connecting the internal supporting structure. Seems and butts shall cross edges of internal structure at an incident angle of at least 60 deg.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 C103: All knuckles in side plating shall be adequately stiffened by a stiffener or deck, running along the knuckle in its entire length. The shift in longitudinals in case the knuckle is not parallel with the longitudinals is recommended to be following the principle shown below:

Knuckle

Transverse frames

Knuckle

Transverse frames

Figure 3: Shift in longitudinals close to knuckle

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 C400: Shell plating - Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 C401:

Seams and butts shall not coincide with welds connecting the internal supporting structure. Seams and butts shall cross edges of internal structure at an incident angle of at least 60 deg.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D104:

Seams and butts shall not coincide with welds connecting the internal supporting structure. Seams and butts shall cross edges of internal structure at an incident angle of at least 60 deg.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D202:

Longitudinals shall be continuous through transverse members. However, members not continuing on other side of transverse member are allowed to terminate at transverse member. There shall be a bracket at the termination. The bracket shall extend to the nearest stiffening member.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D203:

Where numbers of longitudinal stiffeners are reduced due to reduced width of the deck, the transition zone is recommended to be as shown in Figure 1.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D301: The strength of the bulwark shall be sufficient to resist the same load as a superstructure in the same position. If not especially agreed, the bulwark shall resist the load regardless from which side it is applied (inside or outside). The strength shall under no circumstances be lower than required for ordinary hand rails.



- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D302: Where bulwarks on exposed decks form wells, ample provision is to be made for freeing the deck for water. Reference is made to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.5 B900.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D303: In areas where cargo is transferred over the bulwark, strengthening due to the risk of impact shall be considered.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D304: The bulwark, when located within 0,5L amidship, shall be designed in a way that it to smallest possible extent attracts global hull girder loads.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 D305: Gates in the bulwark shall be opened inwards.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 F102: The stiffening of the upper part of a plane transverse bulkhead is to be such that the necessary transverse buckling strength is achieved. Buckling of the margin plate shall be checked all around the perimeter. Special solutions with respect to penetration of longitudinals and terminating bulkhead stiffeners in case of shock requirement shall be introduced. I.e. bulkhead stiffeners and shell stiffeners shall be connected.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 G103: There shall be arranged soft transitions between shipside and superstructure. The softening plate shall be in one piece and have a thickness 15% in excess of the side plating. The plate shall extend at least from the next transverse frame forward and to the next frame aft of the superstructure end in horizontal direction and one stiffener spacing below the deck on which the superstructure are fixed to..

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 G104: There shall not be any sharp corners on deckhouse or funnels in the area of connection to the deck. Corners shall be rounded to a radius not less then 15 times the thickness of the deck plate in the area.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 H102: The general arrangement of the vessel shall take due consideration to the need for a simple and rational structural layout. Continuity and clear load paths has to be achieved and maintained during the design process.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 H201: Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV. Where girders and frames of same height are intersected, gusset plates shall be used, as shown in Figure 4.



Figure 4: Gusset plate

Where variation of the cross section is necessary, web and flange shall not be reduced at the same place. The tapering shall be 1:5 or less, as shown on Figure 5. Brackets shall be used at the knuckle, as shown in Figure 6. Sniping of flanges or webs, if acceptable stresses, shall be 30 degrees or less.

Figure 5: Longitudinal girder transition



Figure 6: Brackets at knuckle


- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 H209: Transition into deck must be specially designed to avoid stress concentrations. When larger openings (e.g. hangar doors) are cut in the deckhouse ends, the strength and stiffness of the whole deckhouse in this area must be specially considered.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 H210: Where discontinuities in longitudinal bulkheads exist, soft and well rounded details shall be fitted. Where bulkheads end at deck without sill, special details shall be considered.

Deck

- Bulkhead -

Softening detail

Deck

- Bulkhead -

Softening detail

Figure 7: Softening detail

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 H211:

Transverse girders (frames) shall be continuous through decks. - Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 I 204:

Transverse stiffeners shall preferably not penetrate longitudinal bulkheads/pillar bulkheads. The longitudinal bulkhead shall be fitted with an adequate profile on top which the stiffener shall be terminated against. (Lapped Collar plates shall be avoided in upper and lower part of the hull girder due to fatigue and overall resistance against premature ruptures)

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 I 205: Brackets at end of stiffeners shall be “soft” and well rounded. The brackets shall in general not be lap joined.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 I 301:

Normally, ends of single girders, or connections between girders forming ring systems, are to be provided with brackets. Brackets are generally to form a radius or be well rounded at their toes. The free edge of the brackets is to be stiffened or tuned to buckle at load level just above the plastic moment for the supported member. Bracketless connections may be applied provided adequate support of the adjoining faceplates is arranged for. The brackets shown in Figure 5 ALT. II and ALT. III are generally to be used. Other brackets may be accepted after special consideration.



- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 I 302: Transverse girders shall generally not penetrate longitudinal bulkheads/pillar bulkheads. The longitudinal bulkhead shall be fitted with an adequate profile (girder) on top which the girder shall be terminated against with gusset plates or similar. (Lapped Collar plates shall be avoided in upper and lower part of the hull girder due to fatigue and overall resistance against premature ruptures). Where this is not convenient (e.g. in the bottom structure) different solutions to avoid penetrations shall be considered.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 J 204:

Penetrations and openings shall be kept away from welds in the platings, webs and flanges.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1 J 205: Supports for piping and electrical cables shall not be welded directly to the plate, but to the stiffeners and girders provided the other paragraphs are duly considered. (The supports are not to degrade the required fatigue properties of the member to which it is attached)

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.1K 201: The following addition shall apply: Special requirement to be fulfilled will be stated in the contract.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 B 302: Material with no requirements to impact strength shall in general not be used (i.e. NVA). Material selection elsewhere has to take actual operational material temperatures into due consideration. The temperature may have to be calculated based on insulation properties, heating and conductivity. This is especially important with respect to vessels where also shock and blast requirements apply.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 B 303:

Special requirements to material not covered in DNV HSLCNAVAL Pt.2 may apply in the contract. In case of shock and blast requirements, special requirements may need to be specified. Special requirements shall also be established in case structural steel with yield point above 355MPa is used.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C201:

If there is risk of galvanic corrosion, a non-hygroscopic and UV resistant insulation material is to be applied between steel and aluminium.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C204: Bolts with nuts and washers are either to be of stainless steel or hot galvanized steel. The bolts are in general to be fitted with sleeves of insulating material.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C207: Aluminium must never be in contact with concrete.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C305: Permanent or temporary structural elements, attachments or penetration sleeves in stainless steel materials may be selected for various purposes. Requirements for welding and testing of stainless outfitting structures shall follow similar classification principles as for other structural steel elements. All welding and testing of welds to carbon steel structures shall as a minimum comply with the requirements for the structure to which they are attached. Unless other requirements apply higher alloyed consumables than given for the relevant stainless component shall be selected for tacking and final welding.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C306:

Structural parts made of stainless steel, austenitic chrome nickel steel types according to the “group 300” classification of the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) and the relevant DIN standards (i.a. 17.440) are considered as far as rolled steel is concerned. This kind of steel shall be delivered in the solution treated and quenched condition.



In general, AISI type 316L shall be applied. If stainless steel comes into contact with seawater it appears to be susceptible to crevice corrosion, therefore additional cathodic protection is required.

Consequently, application of AISI type 304 is forbidden.

Application of welded stabilized stainless steel types is not allowed in a seawater environment because of “knife line attack”.

Guidance note:

Besides AISI type 316L stainless steel, the following types of steel, which are increasingly higher resistant to crevice corrosion, can be used:

− X3CrNiMoN 17.13.5 (317 LN + Mo). Werkstoff No. 14439

− X3CrNiMoNbN 23.17 (Amagnit 3974)

− 254 SMO

Among stainless steel, Inconel 625 is the most crevice corrosion resistant.


- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 C307:

The welding and application of stainless steel is permitted only if all the provisions stated in DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 2 have been met.

After a final treatment (pickling, brushing, shot-blasting etc.) structures made of stainless steel must always be passivated. If these parts are used in seawater, they need not be passivated. Shot-blasting agents may not contain iron.

AISI type 431 is not permitted for seawater applications.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 D:

Guidance note: Reference is made to NRAR Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.1 – Pre-treatment, Coating and Protection Against Corrosion. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 D403:

Special considerations shall be made regarding high tensile steel when designing and operating Impressed Current Corrosion Protection systems (ICCP) systems. Hydrogen cracks can be formed during operation of the system if electrical potential are getting too high.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 D404: Special considerations shall be made regarding high tensile steel when using sacrificial anodes. Hydrogen cracks can be formed during operation if the electrical potential is getting too high. Often special alloys have to be used as ordinary Zn or Al anodes give a too high potential.

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2 D504: An acceptable criterion of efficient cathodic protection is that it is found successful at annual survey, i.e. that no corrosion has occurred. Potential measurements may be required when considered necessary. The protective potential for steel hull surfaces in clean sea water is - 800 mV versus the Ag/AgCl reference electrode. The limit for overprotection is -1050 mV at the same conditions for ordinary steels. If extra high strength steel is used the, overprotection alarm shall normally not be above -900 mV. The design value has to be agreed upon and documented risk free with respect to hydrogen cracking.



- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.3 A104: A non-destructive testing (NDT) plan is to be submitted for approval before construction starts.

Guidance note: The yard is advised to develop a listing in agreement with NDLO, describing the allocation of different structural elements to special, primary and secondary categorization as described in A302. This is in order to allocate the degree of inspection and other important issues in a rational manner. The wording “important structures” will then have an agreed meaning. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.3 E101:

The tanks shall be tested with respect to tightness and strength. Tightness shall be tested prior to painting by use of compressed air according to DNV OS C401 Ch.2 Sec.4 B100 or a similar test standard. Protective coating may be applied before water testing (strength test). All pipe connections to tanks are to be fitted before any of the two tests. If engine bed plates are bolted directly on the inner bottom plating, the testing of the double bottom tank is to be carried out with the engine installed.

A 200 Plan and particulars

201 A loading plan according to NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.3 A100 shall be submitted, summarizing loads acting on the main elements of the structure. In order to serve as a reference for structural calculations, it shall at least cover: - accelerations - sea pressures - deck loads - tank pressure - global loads - slamming - prescribed loads according to damage scenarios (flooding etc.) - location of heavy equipment (i.e weight above 500 kg)

202 The item is applicable with the following additions:

- Resonance examinations of mast and equipment (the natural frequencies of the system shall be determined and compared with possible exciting frequencies)

- Dynamic strength calculation of masts exposed to shock loads (if applicable)

203 A plan for fabrication and erection including methods, techniques and dimensional control routines shall be submitted to assure that all structures at all sites can be fabricated and assembled to dimensions within the specified tolerances. The allowance tolerances for individual elements shall not cumulate above the allowable tolerances for the complete structure.

204 Procedures for dimensional inspection and verification relevant for the structures and any additional specifications needed for the complete structure shall be submitted. The following documents shall be prepared prior to start of fabrication:

- Plan for dimensional assurance/inspection - Dimensional inspection procedures

A 300 Structural Categorisation, Material Selection and Inspection Principles

Guidance note: Naval ships shall in general be designed to fit the purpose. This purpose may be more demanding than for civilian vessels and the importance of proper behaviour at design limits may be crucial. One of the most important issues is to have a balanced and consistent structure in order to avoid premature cracking/ruptures of important details and structural members. It is important to utilise the strength potential in an optimum way. In order to put the effort where most effective, the structure shall be divided into



categories dependent on the importance and/or criticality. Material selection, tolerances, inspections etc. may be category dependent. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

301 A material specification shall be established for all structural materials. The materials shall be suitable for their intended purpose and have adequate properties in all relevant design conditions.

302 A structural categorisation shall be performed. DNV DNV-OS-C102 or NORSOK M-101 may be used as guidelines for categorization.

303 All structural steel has to be Charpy tested and have relevant test results. In primary structural elements it is not allowed to use steel that is not fracture tested.

304 The steel grades selected for structural components are to be related to weldability and requirements to toughness properties and are to be in compliance with recognized standards for Metallic Materials. The standards and the specific options shall be agreed upon. The DNV-OS-B101 and NORSOK are examples of such acceptable Material standards.

305 The design temperature for a part is the reference temperature for assessing areas where the part can be transported, installed and operated. The design temperature is to be lower or equal to the lowest mean daily temperature in air for the relevant areas. For seasonal restricted operations the lowest mean daily temperature in air for the season may be applied.

306 The service temperatures for different parts of the vessel apply for selection of structural steel.

307 The service temperature for various structural parts is given in A308. Further details regarding service temperature for different structural elements are to be based on the requirement given to operational environment. The service temperatures shall be approved by NDLO prior to ordering steel.

308 External structures above the lowest waterline shall be designed with service temperature not higher than the design temperature for the area(s) where the unit is to operate. External structures below the lowest waterline need not be designed for service temperatures lower than -5°C. A higher service temperature may be accepted if adequate supporting data can be presented relative to lowest mean daily temperature applicable to the relevant actual water depths. Internal structures in way of permanently heated rooms need not be designed for service temperatures lower than 0°C.

B Structural Arrangement

B 100 Main structure

101 Special attention shall be paid to ensure continuity of main structural elements. Steps in decks and longitudinal bulkheads shall be avoided. In addition to the longitudinal direction, structural continuity is also required in vertical direction.


103 Design of local details shall seek to keep stress concentrations to a minimum. Such details can be, but are not limited to

- Details of the ends and intersections of members and associated brackets



- All brackets shall be of soft toe type, where the height of the toe shall be equal or less than the bracket thickness, maximum 10 mm. If sniped flange is used, the sniping shall be max 30 degrees if acceptable stress is achieved.

- The angel at the toe of bracket shall not be greater than 15 deg. - Lap welded joints and brackets are in general not accepted. - Shape and location of air, drainage, and lightening holes - Notches at butts on longitudinal members shall be avoided.



106 Shock sensitive equipment shall not be installed directly on or above pillars. In any case, all types of outfitting in such areas have to be specially considered with respect to strength and vibration.

107 Use of pillars shall be avoided. In no circumstances shall pillars pass through tanks. The landing of pillars shall be located to an intersection or be fitted by brackets in order to maintain the continuity in strength and stiffness. An example of deck connection (dependent on adequate support in lower end and good transition in upper) of accepted design for a pillar connection is given in Figure 8. A base plate shall be used according to the figure.

Figure 8: Pillar connection. The welds in the sole plate shall have the dimensions 2/3t. The yield strength for all parts of the connection shall be equal.

No openings are allowed underneath the pillar, cut-outs for stiffeners etc. must be closed with flush collar plates. The welds between decks and pillars and deck and girders/brackets shall be dimensioned for 100% efficiency regarding the thickness of the pillar. The load in the pillar has to be treated as equal in tension and compression. Where pillars exceed one deck, the pillars shall be continuous through decks except on tank-top and strength deck within 0,4L amidship. If the pillar is hollow, a water and gas tight closure shall be fitted inside at every deck that the pillar penetrates.




109 Adequate drainage shall be provided from all parts of the ship’s hull into the suctions. Drains shall also exist behind liner and insulation. To minimize cuts in longitudinal stiffeners, fluid shall be drained first longitudinally and then transversally. Drains are preferably cut in transverse and larger members, and the number of drain holes in longitudinal members shall be limited to the absolute minimum.

110 The size of drain holes shall be made large enough to ensure proper welding/bonding around the edge. The edge shall be clean and smooth.

111 Air and drain holes, notches and scallops are to be kept at least (the largest of) 150 mm or one web height (measured horizontally) clear of the toes of end brackets and other areas of high stress. These openings shall be elliptical; with a height of 30 mm or max 25 % of web depth and breath of twice the height. Web threshold shall be 15 mm.

112 If not avoided, scallops at joints shall be stadium shaped with a length of minimum 150 mm.

113 Opening in structure shall in addition follow rules in DNV Rules for Classification of Ships Pt.3 Ch.1 Sec.5 E400 with the following additions: All ring reinforcements around openings shall be welded with full penetration within 0,6L amidship in the following areas: - Strength deck(s) - Bottom including shell plating and tank top. - Longitudinal members in the double bottom. - Shipside and longitudinal members which vertically is closer to strength deck and keel than 10% of the actual distance between keel and strength deck. Butt joint in ring reinforcement shall be located in the stress shadow from the hole.

114 Where elliptical corners are arranged; the major axis is to be in the direction of maximal stress. Dynamic stress has to be considered and taken into account.

115 Welds shall be kept well clear of corners.

116 Penetrations shall be kept well clear of welds.

117 Appendices shall in general be designed for the actual forces. In addition shall the attachment and the supporting structure be designed in a way that preserves the water tightness in case the appendix is ripped off due to collision, grounding etc. Typical appendices in question are: -Finns and protruding keels -Rudder -Propeller shaft brackets -Stabilisers

118 Lap welded collar plates in longitudinal members shall be avoided in the following areas: - Strength deck(s) - Bottom including shell plating and tank top. - Longitudinal members in the double bottom. - Shipside and longitudinal members which vertically is closer to strength deck and keel than 10% of the actual distance between keel and strength deck.

B 200 Bulkheads




202 Deep tank stiffeners are to be bracketed at the ends, unless direct calculations shows adequate strength and stiffness. Shock loads (if applicable) and loads described in A201 shall be taken into account.

203 In order to avoid rupture of the bulkhead structure in case of an underwater explosion, the arrangement of the adjoining longitudinal structure shall seek to reduce the edge loads applied to the bulkhead. Longitudinal structural elements ending or passing through the bulkhead shall be connected to bulkhead structure of same type.

B 300 Mast for support of sensors and sensor’s systems


302 Requirements to stiffness of masts may apply.

C Local Strength

C 100 Minimum thickness


C 200 Local structure




C 300 Damage of local structure



C 400 Acceptance criteria – damaged condition

401 When level 3 analysis and linear analysis are performed, allowable combined stress (normal + bending + shear) shall be 1,15 * yield strength if the normal stress is less than half the bending stress. For pure tension member, maximum 0,8 * yield strength is allowed. Linear interpolation in between may be used. At the same time the following usage factors with respect to collapse shall be allowed:

- Overall buckling: <=0,8 - Plastic hinges: <=0,8

The utilisation and the requirement to load in damaged condition shall be considered together.

D Global Strength

D 100 General




D 200 Direct calculations (for HS, LC and NSC)

201 The global strength is generally to be determined by direct calculations according to DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 with the additional requirements specified in this section.

202 If, however, direct calculations are not going to be used, the global strength is to be taken in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.2 with loads as given in NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.3.

D 300 Intact condition


Guidance note: Section modulus is not a simple expression for vessels where combinations of materials exist or where materials where the specific stiffness varies across the section. This variations shall be taken into due consideration. Due consideration shall also be taken to variation in material strength over the cross section. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 400 Damaged condition

401 For vessels with spcified global damage where direct calculations are performed, the design load conditions are to include damaged conditions representative for the type and operation of the vessel.

Guidance note: The damage should be typical for naval surface vessels, e.g. loss of structure due to missile hit. Size of damage, speed and survival sea state (maximum HS) in damaged condition should be defined by the contracting navy as “Contractual damage”. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

402 The ultimate hull girder bending capacity in damaged condition shall comply with the following:

MS + MW ≤ MUD MS = still water bending moment with the specified damage, including effects of possible flooding

of compartments. MW = wave bending moment in the specified survival sea state (maximum HS), using the TZ giving

the highest response at specified speed. MUD = the ultimate hull bending moment capacity in damaged condition. The hull girder strength capacity may be calculated for the remaining intact parts of the damaged section by summing up the buckling and the yield capacities of the intact structural elements of the whole section, assuming a usage factor ŋ = 1 for buckling.

Guidance note: Due attention shall be paid to the risk of progressive collapse. When progressive collapse is considered, the special behaviour of welded aluminium and non-yielding materials as FRP shall be taken into account. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



E Weld Connections The requirements within this sub-section apply as an addition to those requirements stated in DNV Rules for Ships/HSLCNSC Pt.2 Ch.3. In the case of conflict between the rules and regulations given in NRAR and other rules, the rules and regulations stated in NRAR shall apply.

E 100 Application of fillet welds


102 Intermittent-welds are not permitted for special and primary structural elements, and it may be permitted only in dry spaces.

103 Requirement to throat thickness shall be adjusted if root opening between members to be connected is larger than 1mm.

104 Weldment dimensions shall in general be based on the actual stress situation. However, the dimensions shall not be less than the minimum dimensions given by the rules.

105 Full penetration welds are in any case to be used in the following connections:

- Penetrating type edge reinforcements or pipe penetrations to strength deck(s) (including sheer strake) and double bottom plating and double bottom girders

- Welds in sea chest - Brackets connecting main longitudinal structural members. - Connections between plates and girders under and above pillars - Foundations and adjoining structural elements for gear, and engines. - Bearing foundation in the propulsion line. - All shell penetrations below bulkhead deck. - Shaft brackets to reinforce shell structure. - Rudder side plating to rudderstock and other important connection areas of rudders, rudder

suspension members, propeller ducts, stabilising fins etc. - End brackets of hatch side coaming to deck and coaming and other heavily shear loaded spots. - Crane pedestal if abutting to upper deck plating. - Strength deck to shell to plates. - Main watertight bulkhead connection to shell plating below first deck above WL in case shock

requirements apply

E 200 Qualification of welding procedures and welders

201 Welding procedure specification shall be established in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec 1

202 Welding procedures used for structures for all strength levels with yield point ≥ 355 MPa shall be qualified in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec 1. The qualification is primarily valid for the workshops performing the welding tests, and other workshops under the same technical and quality management. It may also be transferred to and used by a subcontractor, provided the principles of NS-EN ISO 3834-2 are implemented and documented.

203 The WPQR is valid within the limitations specified in NS-EN ISO 15614-1, with the following clarifications and modifications:

- When the steel to be welded has a Pcm ≥0.21, or a carbon content C ≥0.13%, then an increase of more than 0.02 Pcm units or 0.03 carbon equivalent units over the value on the approved test shall require a new qualification test.

- A change in groove angle of more than +20 deg./-10 deg require a new qualification test Testing shall be executed from as welded and PWHT weld assemblies as applicable covering the following combined conditions:



- Full penetration butt weld with K-, or half V -groove as deemed most representative for the actual fabrication. V and X groove are acceptable for weld metal test.

- A welding procedure representing the maximum heat input to be used in fabrication. - Maximum joint thickness (within 10%).

Assemblies shall be made and tested for the actual combination of steel manufacturer, welding process and welding consumable (brand) used, except welding consumables used for root passes only, provided these are removed completely by gouging and grinding.

204 Test weld type, number of tests and testing shall be performed in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec 1 The test weld shall be 100% examined for both surface and volumetric defects with the relevant NDT methods.

205 Sampling of Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be carried out in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec 1.

206 If required, fracture mechanic testing shall be carried out in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec 1 Three valid test specimens shall be obtained for each test position. Test temperature shall be actual design temperature. CTOD-testing of welds shall be carried out with the fatigue notch tip positioned in the coarse grained region of the heat affected zone and in the weld metal. For HAZ, determination of the actual location of the fatigue crack tip shall be performed after testing. Ref. is made to EN 10225.

207 All welding shall be performed by qualified welders. The welders shall be qualified in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.2 Ch.3 Sec.3 B100.

208 Welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with EN 1418.

209 For tack welders a visual examination of a fillet weld of 40 mm length shall be used. In case tack welds are not performed by a fully qualified welder, the tack weld shall be removed prior to final weld is made.

210 The requirements of welders also apply to constructional welding work that will be performed by suppliers and subcontractors. Welders attaching outfitting to the structure shall have the same qualification required for welders welding the actual structure and material combination to which the attachment is welded.

211 Summaries of the welder’s qualification shall be forwarded quarterly to NDLO.

E 300 Fabrication and welding requirements

301 All welding work shall be according to recommendations given in relevant part of EN 1011 with amendments according to prEN 1090-2. The manufacturer shall have implemented a quality assurance system in accordance with NRAR Pt.0 Sub-section F.

302 The manufacturer shall apply a weld numbering system for identification on all shop drawings and as reference in all documentation. The system shall assure full traceability for welds in special and primary areas.

303 The number of welds shall be kept to a minimum by using plate material that is as long and wide as possible. Pipes and sections shall be as long as possible. The welding technical design shall be in accordance with the welding process that has been selected and the required NDT inspection.



Guidance note: In places where a concentration of stress may result in cracks, the outmost attention shall be paid to structural transitions, i.e. with a view to the transfer of stresses in superstructure to the hull, in which case shear must be avoided. Generally the seams may not intersect the longitudinal stiffeners at acute angles and shall be kept free from the bilge keels. During design, particular attention shall be paid to accessibility, so that during assembly the various assemblies and preservation operations (setting up, chiselling, gouging, flame cutting, welding, ND-testing, grit blasting and painting etc.) can be performed to achieve an optimal result. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

304 Cold forming of steel (i.e. forming below 250°C) shall be carried out within the deformation range recommended by the steel manufacturer. If the deformation is more than the above given limits, either heat treatment shall be performed, or strain-ageing tests shall be carried out according to the following procedure:

- The material shall be permanently strained locally to the actual deformation. - The material shall be artificially aged at 250°C for 1 hour. - One set of 3 impact test specimens shall be tested from the base material in the strained plus

artificially aged condition. The notch shall be located within the plastically strained portion of the material, in the part of the cross section that has received the highest strain.

- The impact testing temperature shall be as specified for the actual steel grade in question. - The Charpy-V impact value shall comply with the minimum requirements for the steel grade

and shall not be more than 25% lower than the impact value for the material before deformation and strain ageing.

If forming is performed at temperature above 250°C, it shall be documented that the base material properties, weldmetal and HAZ properties and the weldability satisfy this standard.

305 Assembly joints shall be located in compliance with designer’s requirements. Special requirements with respect to dimensional tolerances, fit up, extent of buttering, extent of NDT, tapering or other limitations in critical assembly joints shall be adhered to.

306 Improperly filled and cracked tack welds must be removed from the seam by grinding or gouging, before welding the seam. Tackwelds that are included in the weld will be considered part of the weld and be evaluated accordingly.

307 When possible, butt welds must be fitted with start and stop plates.

308 Splices shall only be located as shown on design drawings.

309 Tapering of thickness shall be in accordance with the requirements given in design drawings or in relevant standards. If no other requirements are specified, a tapering of 1:4 shall be used.

310 Temporary cut-outs shall not be located in restricted areas as shown on design drawings.

311 Temporary cut outs shall have a corner radius not less than 100 mm.

312 Temporary cut-outs shall be closed by refitting the same or an equivalent plate and employing the same welding, inspection and documentation procedures and requirements that govern the structural part in question.



313 Members distorted by welding shall be straightened according to a detailed work instruction. The base material properties shall satisfy the specified requirements after straightening. Maximum temperature for straightening shall not exceed the temperature limit recommended by the steel manufacturer. In any case it shall not exceed 600 degrees.

314 Permanent backing strips are not accepted.

315 The manufacturers shall ensure that welding consumables applied for joints meet the requirements for mechanical properties as specified for the welding procedure qualification, in both as welded and - where applicable - post weld heat treatment condition.

Guidance note: This may be achieved through:

- Batch testing including chemical analysis and mechanical properties. - An established and reliable system of batch certification against accepted supplier

data sheets. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Except for solid wires, such consumables shall be classified by the supplier as extra low hydrogen, i.e. HDM ≤5ml/100g weld metal. For self shielded flux cored wire HDM ≤8ml/100g may be accepted, provided preheating temperature, post weld holding temperature and time is assessed to avoid hydrogen cracking. Hydrogen testing shall be according to ISO 3690 or equivalent.

316 Consumables for joints in steel with yield strength <355MPa and for joining stainless to carbon steel shall be selected with due consideration of base material properties, thickness and weldability, to ensure sufficient weld strength, toughness and homogeneity. Such consumables shall be delivered with EN 10204 type 2.2 certificate as a minimum.

317 All welding consumables shall be individually marked.

318 When certification is used, welding consumables (except welding fluxes) shall be supplied with an inspection certificate (type 3.1B) in accordance with EN 10204, including a statement of compliance with the Welding Consumable Data Sheet and the chemical composition of the weld deposit (elements of the data sheet). Welding fluxes shall be supplied with a test report (EN 10204 type 2.2), declaring conformity with the approved product type.

319 The welding fill materials shall be stored in spaces where the relative humidity of the air is ≤50% and where the temperature is kept between 15 and 35 °C. The temperature and the air humidity must be monitored and recorded.

320 During welding electrodes with basic packing, except those in “ready pack” or equivalent packing, must be kept in heated containers within the welders’ reach. The temperature in the container must be ≥70 degrees.

321 If the work is interrupted for a period lasting longer than 45 minutes, the welding fill materials of the broken package being used must be stored temporary in drying chests in which the temperature is kept ≥50 degrees.

322 Faulty welding fill materials shall not be used for welding. Clad electrodes or flux cord that has become wet must be destroyed.

323 In order to prevent start porosity, stainless welding fill materials must be dried to about 250°C prior to being used. This does not apply to weld fill materials in “Ready Pack” vacuum packing.



324 The determination of the pre-heating temperatures shall be in conformity with EN 1011 and amendments given in prEN 1090-2.

325 Preheating above 50ºC shall be achieved by electric heating elements. Cutting torches are not allowed for preheating. The heating temperature shall be monitored continuously by relevant temperature sensors. The temperature shall have been at correct level at least for 15 minutes prior to welding. When flame heating is used in areas where electrical heating is impossible to use, the same requirement to temperature and temperature control applies.

326 The minimum interpass temperature shall not drop below the minimum required preheat temperature. If not otherwise stated in the WPS, and qualified by the WPQR, the maximum interpass temperature shall not exceed 250°C, measured at the edge of the groove. For C- and C/Mn-steels, a maximum interpass temperature of 250ºC may be used, even if a lower temperature was recorded on the WPQR.

327 The preheat temperatures used during repair welding shall be minimum 50°C higher than the preheat temperature used for the original weld.

Guidance note: Production welding of high strength steels with MSY>500 MPa is normally more sensitive to hydrogen cracking than experienced during welding for qualification. Special precautions, including preheating temperature, minimum holding temperature and extended post weld holding temperature for 24 hours or more, shall be taken into consideration. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 400 Production welding

401 Welding shall be carried out in accordance with an approved WPS and applicable drawings.

402 The bevels of butt welds and the ends of steel must be down to the metal before welding is started. They must be thoroughly free from oxide (film), moisture, paint, shopprimer, grease and other impurities.

403 Butt-welds in joints classified as special and primary or where steel with yield strength > 400 MPa are required, shall whenever possible be welded from both sides. If any welding is conducted after Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT), the PWHT shall be repeated.

404 For joints classified as special, the ”straight” edges of K- and 1/2V-butt weld grooves shall have a groove angle of at least 10°, unless it is documented that possible defects can be detected by the UT technique used. (For K-grooves, the 10° should be machined from the root to each plate surface.)

405 Any occurrence of cracking during production welding shall be investigated. Welding should be suspended until the cause of cracks and defects has been identified and measures taken to prevent their reoccurrence. Cracks or other persistent weld defects may lead to revision and re-qualification of the WPS.

406 During outdoor performance of welding work, both welders and welding joints shall be protected against weather influences.

407 When the temperature of the material is lower then 5°C, the joint to be welded and its immediate proximity have to be preheated to at least 20°C over a distance of 75 mm on both sides of the joint.

408 The welding joint and its close proximity must be free from moisture. The temperature must be maintained during welding.



409 A welding arc must be prevented from being ignited outside a welding joint. In places where an arc has been ignited outside a welding joint, the damage done to the surface as a result thereof shall be remedied or be examined. Grinding and (MT) examination may be sufficient.

410 Temporary attachments as lifting lugs, lugs for scaffolding and assembly, supports for cables, equipment, ladders or other fabrication and erection aids shall be removed. If indicated on design drawings that removal (full or partial) is not required, the temporary attachments may be left as is, or removed only partially.

411 All welding of attachments shall comply with the requirements for the structure to which they are attached. Temporary attachments shall be cut minimum 5 mm from the base metal and ground flush with base metal surface. The ground area shall be visually examined and magnetic particle or penetrant tested (as relevant) in accordance with the inspection category in question. (It is not permitted to knock away temporary attachments.)

E 500 Welding of stainless steel

501

When welding stainless steel parts, the final layer must be applied to the corrosion side, if possible

502

For fully austenitic (stable) material one often uses type 316L welding filler metal to prevent cracks. The final layer must be composed of higher grade alloy, in order to prevent corrosion. Therefore the chemical composition of the final layer must at least be in accordance with the chemical composition of the parent material.

503

For stud welding a qualification test must be conducted, in which case the working area is chosen in relation to the stud diameter and the welding position.

504

Stainless steel must be welded to normal carbon steel with 309, 309Mo welding filler metal

505

Vertical downwards flux cord welding is only allowed for fillet welds with throat thickness ≤ 3mm. This method is prohibited in structural applications.

506

The deposit of type 316L welding fill materials to be used shall result in a 2,50% Mo and 18,00% Cr content.

507

The requirements with respect to the chemical composition of the deposits of claddings performed with inconel 625 welding filler metal are: Mo content min. 9,0%, Cr content min. 21,0%, Fe max. 8,0%. These requirements will be applicable to the surface area after final treatment.

508 When making stainless steel designs, special attention must be given to the prevention of cracks with a view to crevice corrosion and of stress concentrations with a view to stress corrosion.

E 600 Post weld heat treatment

601 PWHT shall be required for structural welds in special and primary areas with MYS>400MPa when the nominal thickness (as defined in NS-EN ISO 15614-1, section 8.3.2.1) exceeds 50 mm, unless adequate fracture toughness can be documented in the as welded conditions. For restrained joints of complicated design, PWHT may be required for smaller thickness, independent of steel strength.

602 PWHT shall be carried out in accordance with a DNV OS C401 Ch.2 Sec.2.



603 The holding time and temperature shall be as recommended by the steel manufacturer.

604 The temperatures shall be continuously and automatically recorded on a chart.

605 Double sided heating shall be used as far as possible.

E 700 Grinding

701 When grinding is specified on design drawings or is instructed as a corrective action, the grinding shall be performed according to a detailed procedure. Grinding tools, direction, surface roughness and final profile shall be specified. Reference samples for typical joints and sections may be prepared and used for acceptance of treated welds.

702 Toe grinding of welds shall always be performed with a rotary burr grinder or similar leaving traces from grinding transverse to the weld. Toe grinding shall normally remove any undercut at the toe of the weld and should go to a depth of 0.5 to 1.0 mm below the surface.

703 Ground surface shall be free of any undercut or crack-like indications.

704 The possible extra fatigue strength achieved from grinding of welds shall not be included in the fatigue strength design.

E 800 Production tests

801 Production tests shall be selected on weldments in special or primary structural regions to verify that the specified requirements have been meet.

802 Minimum one test piece is required from each applied welding process. The test piece shall in general be cut from the ready structure at locations adviced by NDLO. In some cases where this is impossible, coupons shall be welded in a manner, which realistically simulates the actual production welding, normally as extension of the production weld, and meet the requirements for welding procedure approval tests. CTOD testing is normally not required for production testing unless the production test shall be used for documenting performance outside normal procedures.

803 If a production test fails, the reason for the failure shall be determined and remedial actions implemented.

E 900 Dimensional control and tolerance requirements

901 All tolerance requirements are based on nominal values on unloaded structure. Deviations outside the specified tolerances during fabrication and erection shall be identified, and planned corrective actions during the formal handling of the deviation shall be informed NDLO before corrective actions are implemented.

902 The detailed dimensional reports shall be available at all stages in fabrication and shall be submitted to NDLO on request.

903 Prior to fabrication a survey reference system related to a grid system shall be established. The survey reference system shall use the same numerical values and the same orientation directions of the system axis as the grid system.



904 The survey reference system shall be established within a tolerance of ± 3 mm. Stricter tolerances for the reference system shall be used on components where the requirements are more stringent than the given tolerance (e.g. foundation flatness or weapons alignment).

Guidance note: The main tool to perform these measurements will be a polar total station, that will work with an accuracy of 0,5 mm in distances and 0,5 seconds in angles. With its software this tool can orientate in the ship coordinate system to check complete units for assembly and erection. The data output is compatible with any computer to compare measurements in different shipyards or subcontractors. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

905 The numerical values shall be the same for all disciplines and packages and comply with the ship’s grid system.

E 1000 Non-destructive testing and inspection

1001 The extent of inspection and non-destructive testing (inspection category) shall be decided by the designer in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch 2 Sec. 3 Table B1, and shall be specified on the design drawings for joints in special and primary areas.

1002 Final inspection and NDT of structural steel welds shall not be carried out before 48 hours after completion except where PWHT is required. The time delay may be reduced to 24 hours for steel grades with yield strength of 355MPa or lower, provided delayed cracking have not been observed for the materials and/or welding consumables in question.

1003 When PWHT is performed, the final NDT shall be carried out when all heat treatment has been completed.

1004 Prior to fabrication start-up, a system for recording of weld defect rates shall be implemented. Defect rate is defined as the ratio between the defect length and the length of the tested parts of the weld. The defect rate will be calculated separately for each yard (subcontractor) and each yard area (shop or slipway). In each area a defect rate for each welding procedure and NTD method will be recorded. The defect rates shall be recorded on a weekly basis and reported to NDLO together with the accumulated defect rate. Dependent of the production rate, a bi-weekly report rate may be agreed. At a weekly high defect rate or at repeated occurrence of planar defects, two trigger levels apply for extended NDT for welds in special and primary areas. Two steps of actions apply within trigger level 2. Trigger level 1 If a defect rate for any NDT method exceed 10 % for a single week (period) the extent shall be increased to 100 % for all welds in question irrelevant of the required extent of inspection for the welds. Trigger level 2 If a defect rate between 5 and 10% for any NDT method for a single week (periode) is observed, the following two steps of extended NDT shall apply:

Step 1. A defect rate for any NDT method exceeding 5 % (1% for MT) for a single week (period), require doubling of the extent of NDT in relation to the required extent. Spot extent shall be increased to 20 %. Step 2. If the defect rate for the weld length where the extended NDT is taken in accordance with Step 1 above exceed 5 %, the extent shall be increased to 100 % for all welds in question irrelevant of the required extent for the welds.



Guidance note:

1) welds)of parts testedof(Length

100%)length x (Defect :as defined is ratedefect The

Note 1: “Tested part of welds”means the part that is tested with the same NDT method. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1005 The increased NDT extent shall cover welds with the same inspection requirements, welded in the same period of time when the high defect rate was produced, to assure that the weld quality is maintained also with the lower extent of NDT. Unless the causes for defects found leads to immediate and documented preventive actions, the higher level of extent of NDT shall be maintained until the weekly defect rate is below 5 %.

1006 If the defect rate approaches 10 % during any stage in production welding, further welding shall be held until investigations are completed and corrective actions implemented. A low defect rate may be used as basis for a reduction in the extent of NDT for welds where less than 100 % NDT applies, provided that correct defect rate identification is prepared for each weld method, each NDT method and each production area.

1007 NDT after repair shall not be included when calculating the defect rate. A record shall be made of all the repairs that are performed. This record shall include:

- the places where the repairs have been carried out. - the relevant welding method. - the reason for the repair. - the corrective measures. - the result of the repair. - the additional NDT percentage. - the percentage of repair per meter of an examined weld. - the number of repairs.

1008 Causes for defects shall immediately be investigated and corrective actions shall be taken to prevent further occurrence.

1009 Cracks detected with any NDT method shall require documented investigation/action by the responsible welding engineer.

1010 Design drawings shall indicate areas of welds where testing is mandatory. NDLO may perform NDT at any place where decided. However, the cost by performing the test shall be according to the contract. The correction of faults found, is in any case the yards responsibility.

1011 Testing performed shall be representative for the weld quality. Partial NDT shall normally be planned for on all shop drawings.

1012 Ultrasonic testing to reveal the presence of possible weld metal transverse cracking shall be included for butt welds with thickness more than 25 mm in general and for all thicknesses for welds with yield strength > 500 MPa. The testing shall be performed on minimum 10% of welds in special and primary areas for SAW (12) and FCAW (131 and 136).

1013 When partial testing is defined for welds in an area, the testing shall be spread such that the most essential members and nodes are included in the inspection, and such that areas of welds most susceptible to weld defects are covered.

1014 The specified percentage to be tested refers to the total length of welds at each inspection level. All WPS’s used and welds representing all welding personnel involved in the fabrication shall be subject to NDT.



1015 During the initial fabrication the extent of UT and MT for welds with partial inspection shall be intensified, normally to twice the level given. This extent shall be maintained for a weld and test length sufficient to conclude that the weld defect rate is at a reasonable level. The increased initial testing can be accounted for in the overall extent provided the initial testing confirms consistent good workmanship.

1016 In addition to what is listed in DNV-OS C401, the following shall apply for special and primary areas:

- Where radiographic testing is required, intersection welds, and those locations where presence of defects is deemed to be most harmful, shall be tested.

- Ultrasonic and radiographic testing shall not overlap, except when 100% UT is specified. However, ambiguous imperfections revealed by UT shall in addition be tested by RT.

- Ultrasonic testing is normally not applicable for thicknesses less than 10 mm. For such thicknesses, UT may be replaced with RT. In general, RT should be considered if UT is not possible. Radiographic testing is normally not applicable for thicknesses above 40 mm.

- MT shall be performed on both external and internal surface as accessible or as required by the designer.

1017 Personnel responsible for welding inspection - welding inspectors - shall be qualified in accordance with NS 477 or equivalent scheme.

1018 The visual examination shall be carried out in accordance with EN 970.

1019 Personnel performing visual inspections of welded joints shall be qualified in accordance with relevant part of EN 473. Personnel responsible for all NDT activities shall be qualified according to EN 473 Level 3 or equivalent. The NDT operators shall be qualified according to EN 473 Level 2 or equivalent. Operators simply producing radiographs and not performing evaluation, do not require level 2, but shall have sufficient training.

Guidance note: In undertaking testing of castings or forgings the NDT operator should also document experience with forged and cast products. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1020 Radiographic testing shall be carried out in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch2 Sec3 and EN 1435, Class A. Penetrameters of wire type (according to EN 462-1 or equivalent) shall be utilised. Sensitivity level shall be in accordance with EN 462 part 3, Class A. However, if gamma ray sources are used, the sensitivity shall be 2% or better.

1021 Magnetic particle and penetrant testing shall be carried out in accordance with DNV OS C401 Ch2 Sec3 and EN 1290, For non-magnetic materials penetrant testing in accordance with EN 1289 should be used.

1022 Ultrasonic testing of welds in plate and tubular butt welds and double side welded tubular joints shall be performed in accordance with EN 1714, examination level C.

1023 Reference blocks shall be made with relevant thickness and side-drilled holes of diameter 3.0 mm +/- 0.2 mm. DAC reference curves shall be established.



1024 The effective test range of a DAC curve shall be determined by the point at which the curve has fallen to 25% FSH, when it will be necessary to raise the curve using reflectors at increased depth. The reference block shall be from a steel type that is representative for the steel to be inspected.

1025 Where ultrasonic testing is to be performed on steel produced by controlled rolling or thermo-mechanical treatment, reference blocks shall be produced both perpendicular to, and parallel to, the direction of rolling. The rolling direction shall be clearly identified.

1026 The actual refracted angle for each probe measured from the reference block or as measured on the actual object being examined, shall be used when plotting indications.

1027 A transfer correction between the reference block and the test surface shall be performed.

1028 Ultrasonic examinations procedures shall be sufficiently detailed to ensure 100% of the weld body and heat affected zones are examined for longitudinal defects.

1029 All indications exceeding 20% DAC shall be investigated to the extent that they can be evaluated in terms of the acceptance criteria. All indications exceeding acceptance criteria shall be reported, unless more stringent requirements are given.

1030 The examination record shall include the position, the echo height, length, depth and type of indication.

1031 Acceptance criteria shall be according to DNV OS C401 Ch2 Sec3, unless another standard is expressly specified in the contractual specification.

F Buckling (for HS, LC and NSC)

F 100 General (for HS, LC and NSC)


102 If considered necessary, buckling control for overall buckling shall be performed according to Classification Note 30.1 and DNV-RP-C202 with the usage factors given in Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.10 in the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC.

103 If buckling control is found necessary, overall buckling of complicated primary and special structures have to be checked by non-linear analysis where imperfections, residual stress and plasticity are taken into account.

104 Linear buckling analysis (eigenvalue) will always estimate upper bound. Such analysis has to be used with care, even if plasticity is accounted for.

G Direct Strength Calculations

G 100 Modelling of hull structure (for HS, LC and NSC)

101 When level 3 analyses are used, DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.1 C302 shall not be adhered to. The rest of Pt.3 Ch.9 applies with the modifications given in this item.

- Pt.3 Ch.9 Sec.5 A201 is applicable with the following admentments: Allowable equivalent nominal stresses referred to 20 year conditions are for steel:



Seagoing conditions: σe = 0.95 σf N/mm2 Harbour conditions: σe = 0.85 σf N/mm2 For aluminium structures the corresponding stresses are: Seagoing conditions: σe = 0.85 σf N/mm2 Harbour conditions: σe = 0.75 σf N/mm2 σf = yield stress of material. For steel structures it is referred to DNV HSLC&NSC Pt.3 Ch.2 Sec.2. For aluminium structures the reduced strength of plates in heat affected zone shall be used. The yield stress in heat affected zone is not explicitly given in DNV Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.2, but is to be derived from the definition of the factor f1. See also 202 (DNV). σe = equivalent stress. For FRP structures the corresponding material utilisation is: Seagoing conditions:

σe = 0.35 σu N/mm2 (laminate) σe = 0.40 σu N/mm2 (core)

Harbour conditions and any long lasting load (duration more than 4 weeks):

σe = 0.25 σu N/mm2 (laminates σe = 0.20 σu N/mm2 (core)

σu = the linearly scaled, actual stress combination, that gives fracture according to Tsai-Wu fracture criteria. σe = the actual stress combination. The harbour condition is normally relevant to check for craft with the additional notation Cargo, only.

G 200 Modelling of hull structure


H Hull structure design, Aluminium alloy This sub-section is pending. In general the requirements stated in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.3 are fully applicable until the sub-section is available.

I Hull structure design, Fibre composite and sandwich constructions

This sub-section is pending. In general the requirements stated in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.3 Ch.4 are fully applicable until the sub-section is available.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.5: Stability, Watertight and Weathertight Integrity Page 60


Section 5 Stability, Watertight and Weathertight Integrity This section covers stability, watertight and weathertight integrity for naval surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy. Requirements regarding vessel arrangements are dealt with in Section 2, piping systems are dealt with in Section 6, whereas control and monitoring systems are covered by Section 9. General requirements and information regarding these rules are covered by Pt.0.

A General

A 100 Applicability


A 200 Plans and Calculations



203 Maximum allowable VCG curves shall be developed based on the criteria in C and D. Separate curves covering conditions with ice shall be included, if applicable.

A 300 Exceptions

301 In special cases where the requirements for stability and buoyancy stated in this section cannot be met, exceptions may be granted by NDLO.

A 400 Additional Requirements

401 NDLO invokes the right to define additional requirements regarding stability, watertight and weathertight integrity on a project-by-project basis. In the case of additional requirements these shall be stated explicitly in the vessels and/or work specification.

B Freeboard, External Watertight Integrity (for HS, LC and NSC)

B 100 Applicability


B 200 Design waterline




B 300 External doors





B 400 Side and stern doors


B 500 External hatches




B 600 Air pipes


B 700 Ventilators




B 800 Scuppers and discharge



B 900 Freeing ports


B 1000 Windows


B 1100 Deadlights







1105 The tightness of all openings shal be documented by a certificate from Det Norske Veritas or another well-respected class authority. Each opening shall also be tested after installation under supervision of NDLO. The test procedure shall be approved by NDLO in advance.

Guidance note: Typical, ultrasound will be used for testing the tightness. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C Intact Stability Requirements

C 100 Loading Conditions

101 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV.

Guidance note 3: For special purpose vessels NDLO may state other relevant conditions of loading in which compliance with the intact and damage stability criteria shall be demonstrated. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


C 200 Calculation of stability


C 300 Calculation of effects from external loads







C 400 Intact stability for monohull vessel




404 DNV rules fully applicable, with except from Guidance note 2.

405 The vessel’s behaviour in following seas shall be studied by carrying out stability calculations at an assumed wave, with shape, height and length as given below: The trochoidal wave applied shall have the following characteristics: Wave length: λ (in meters) equal to the length of the vessel.



Wave height: λ

λ05.010 +

=H [m]

1) The vessel shall comply with the requirements given in 402 with a righting arm curve

calculated as the average of the curves obtained assuming a trochoidal wave as described above assuming wave crest amidships and wave through amidships.

2) The vessel shall, when assuming the wave crest amidships, wave through amidships, and wave characteristics as described above, comply with the following criteria:

- The righting arm is positive over a range of at least 10 degrees between 0 and 45 degrees inclination

- The maximum righting arm is at least 0.05 [m]

Guidance note: It is not necessarily the conditions with wave crest amidships that will provide the weakest GZ-curve. This depends on the shape of the vessel and will occur at the longitudinal section with the largest cross-section area. For vessels with an unusual shape it may be required to document the stability characteristics with model tests. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C 500 Intact stability for multihull vessel

501 NDLO will on a project-by-project basis define applicable requirements for intact stability of multihull vessels. This applies to design, newbuildings, and modifications on existing vessels.

502 Intact stability calculations shall be delivered to NDLO for assessment and approval before construction work is commenced.

503 For SES vessels, intact stability has to be considered for both the on-cushion mode and the off-cushion mode.

C 600 Excessive metacentric height, displacement vessels

601 In order to prevent violent rolling in waves, metacentric heights (GM) in the full load condition exceeding 12% of the vessel’s breadth shall be subjected to approval by NDLO.

Guidance note: The size and period of waves that the vessel is likely to encounter, as well as the vessel’s rolling period, shall be considered. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: Damaged stability considerations may require excessive metacentric heights. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D Internal Watertight Integrity

D 100 Watertight subdivision









107 Cross-flooding ducts for fresh water and fuel oil tanks shall be fitted with valves operable from the damage control deck. Other cross-flooding arrangements shall be self-acting.

Guidance note: For calculation purposes these valves shall be considered closed unless the damage occurs in the particular tank area where the valve is situated. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 200 Extent of damage for monohull vessels


202 The transverse penetration shall in no case be less than 20% of the moulded breadth, measured from the full load waterline, perpendicular to the centre line of the ship at the compartment(s) under consideration.


204 The following permeabilities of flooded compartments shall be assumed:

- Machinery spaces: o Between top of double bottom (or base line if double bottom is not fitted) and a level

1.5 [m] above the double bottom top: 0.75 [-] o > 1.5 [m] above the double bottom top: 0.90 [-]

- Compartments other than machinery spaces: o Between top of double bottom (or base line if double bottom is not fitted) and a level

1.0 [m] above the double bottom top: 0.85 [-] o Between top of lower deck and a level 1.0 [m] above the lower deck top: 0.85 [-] o For level > 1.0 [m] above the double bottom top (or base line if double bottom is not

fitted) or top of lower deck: 0.95 [-] - Tanks:

o Empty tanks: 0.98 [-] o Partially filled tanks: To be computed in each case.

If computed values of actual permeability is found to deviate substantially from the values stipulated above, these computed values might be used. In such cases, curves showing the actual permeability as a function of the depth of the ship for each compartment are to be submitted to NDLO for approval.


D 300 Extent of damage for multihull vessels

301 NDLO will on a project-by-project basis define applicable requirements for damage stability and the extent of damage for multihull vessels. This applies to design, newbuildings, and modifications on existing vessels.

302 Damage stability calculations shall be delivered to NDLO for assessment and approval before construction work is commenced.



D 400 Survival criteria after damage, all vessels




E Inclining test procedure

E 100 Description of procedure

101 All inclining tests have to be based on the form “KS-0179-1 Procedures for determination of lightship displacement and centre of gravity of Norwegian ships” made and issued by the Norwegian Maritime Directorate.

102 After the inclining test, a report summarizing the results has to be made. Unless otherwise agreed and accepted by NDLO, the Norwegian Maritime Directorate standard form “Report on inclining test and lightship survey” (Report 79) shall be used.

103 If the shipyard or the contractor wants to use another procedure, this has to be accepted by the NDLO on a project to project basis.

F Draught- and Load line marks

F 100 General

101 Draught marks for calculation of displacement, shall be located at the AP, amidships (LPP/2) and at the FP, or as near to these locations as possible.

102 The bottom of the keel is the reference line. The draught marks shall clearly state the distance from this line to the baseline. A drawing showing all the draft marks has to be provided. The size of the figures shall be relative to the size of vessel.

103 For any appendix with depth below the keel (sonar, propellers, etc), additional marks for navigational use shall be added with a letter above the highest value indicating type of appendix; P = propeller, S = Sonar.

104 The NDLO Load Line Mark shall be located at each side of the hull in zero-cross (center of ring). As a minimum requirement the NDLO-Load Line mark must include two horizontal lines representing the design waterline and the Maximum Operating Condition respectively.

105 The deck line of the freeboard-deck shall be marked by a horizontal line with a length of 300 mm and a breadth of 25 mm. This line serves as a reference point from which the load line marks are measured.

Guidance note: By measuring the load line mark from both the keel-line and the deck-line, it is possible to find and controle D (Depth moulded). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

106 Draught marks and Load Line Mark shall be placed accurate by a lazar-tool and/or oculars. Figures are to be made of the same material as the hull- material. A dimensional control report shall verify the “As



built” locations of the marks. This report has to be included in the ship’s technical handbook together with a drawing of the draught marks.

107 Marks and letters shall be painted in red on a dark back-ground or black on a light background. They have to be permanently marked on the sides of the vessel by welding or gluing according to the requirements of the NDLO.

108 Based on ship-class and size, the NDLO may require limiting draught marks to be made to prevent overloading and an unacceptable reduction in reserve buoyancy as a consequence. Such limiting draught marks, shall be determined on the basis of the ship’s flooding and damaged stability characteristics.

G Estimates and Calculations of Weights and Centres of Gravity

G 100 Definitions

101 Preliminary Weight Estimate At the contract design stage, a Preliminary Weight Estimate shall be prepared. It shall clearly show weights and longitudinal, transverse and vertical centres of gravity for all steel, aluminium and GRP structures, outfit and furnishing, machinery, piping, armament, electrical and electronic systems. Estimates shall also be prepared for capacities and centres of gravity of all tanks stores, provision, ammunition, liquid in machinery etc.

102 Accepted Weight Estimate Before signing the building contract, the Contractor shall thoroughly review and make his remarks on the Preliminary Weight Estimate. The estimate shall – if necessary – be revised as agreed on by NDLO and the Contractor. After signing the building contract the Preliminary Weight Estimate is designated the Accepted Weight Estimate.

103 Detailed Weight Estimate The Detailed Weight Estimate is to include weights and longitudinal, transverse and vertical centres of gravity, and shall be prepared at the detailed design and construction stage.

104 Load condition Weight and centres of gravity shall be estimated for the vessel in the following conditions: Light ship- and Maximum operational displacement.

105 Reference planes for centres of gravity Centre of gravity for all items shall be identified by the perpendicular distance from a transverse plane through the aft perpendicular of vessel (longitudinal lever), transverse from CL, (+ SB) and the perpendicular distance from a horizontal plane through the baseline of the vessel (vertical lever).

106 Weight groups The Preliminary Weight Estimate for the lightship shall have all items grouped in accordance with the grouping systems of NDLO or according to the established WBS-structure of the project and shall contain the following groups Gr. 2 Hull structure Gr. 3 Propulsion plant Gr. 4 Auxiliary systems Gr. 5 Electric plant Gr. 6 Outfit and furnishing Gr. 7 Electronics, communication and control Gr. 8 Armament



G 200 Preliminary Weight Estimate

201 Weight estimate procedure The Preliminary Weight Estimate shall be based on contract drawings, contract guidance drawings, standard drawings and the contractual (building) specifications.

202 Margins The Preliminary Weight Estimate for the lightship shall include a design margin and a building margin. The design margin shall cover weight and moment changes due to detailed engineering development, growth in equipment and material weights, omissions and inaccuracies in the Preliminary Weight Estimate. The design margin shall be added based on preliminary design drawings at the completion of the contract design. As engineering are in progress, drawings are developed to detailed shop drawings, margins are reduced, allowing the total design margin to be absorbed during the detailed design. The building margin shall cover deviations from working plans, mill tolerances, deviations between estimated and certified weights of machinery and equipment and variations between the actual and design lines. Margins shall be reduced to zero for certified weights of equipment and weighed construction assemblies, (blocks, sections, etc)

Guidance note: The sum of the design and building margin will amount to about 5%-10% of the preliminary lightship weight. The margins shall be available for the purposes mentioned above, thus the extra weight due to the corresponding increase in ship-dimensions is already included in the preliminary lightship weight. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A service margin (future growth margin) shall cover increase in weight in service due to renewal and addition of equipment. This margin shall be no less than 5 % of the initial Lightship displacement and will be stated in each case in the building specification and treated in the same way as other equipment weights in the weight estimate.

203 Stability and buoyancy calculations Based on the Preliminary Weight Estimate for the full load condition including the weight- and c. g.-margin, studies of stability, trim and heel shall be made for the vessel in intact and damaged conditions. See sub-section C and D. Where these stability studies show that the vessel fails to fulfil the stability and buoyancy criteria, necessary corrections shall be made to the design to obtain full compliance with the rules if not otherwise decided by NDLO.



G 300 Detailed Weight Estimate

301 Hull structure, inclining experiment after launching Weight and centre of gravity of hull structure, (Light ship), shall be calculated from working drawings, verified by weighing of modules. The light ship weight shall finally be checked by inclining experiment immediately after launching. For inclining test procedure, see sub-section E.

Guidance note: At the construction stage some large structural subassemblies shall be weighed and the results compared with the calculated weights. Mill tolerances shall be checked by weighing plates and sections randomly selected. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

302 Systems Weights and centres of gravity of systems shall be calculated from working and system drawings. Where only diagrammatic arrangements are available for electric and electronic systems the actual length off all cables shall be determined by measuring the cables before installation.

303 Insulation, deck coverings and paint Weights and centres of gravity of insulation, deck coverings and paint shall be determined by calculation of areas and centres of gravity from working plans. Frames, beams, girders, stiffeners etc. shall be taken into account when calculation areas and centres of gravity for insulation and paint.

304 Equipment, material and GFM Equipment and material weights, including Government Furnished Material (GFM) shall be determined by obtaining manufacturers’ certified weights, and shall be checked by weighing on a sampling basis.

305 Change orders Every weight and moment effect caused by changes proposed either by NDLO or the Contractor at detailed design and construction stage shall be calculated before such changes are approved and incorporated in the design.

306 Quarterly weight reports As detailed design progresses, the margins will be gradually reduced until certified weights are obtained at the construction stage. Contractor are responsible for the continuously and carefully watching of weight and moment changes. Contractor shall review any weight and moment change and note trend to prevent uncontrolled consumption of the margins. Corrective action, if any, shall be taken in cooperation with NDLO. A weight report shall be submitted to NDLO every 3 months. This summary shall give the current weights and centres of gravity for the lightship, full load condition and minimum operating condition and current status of the margins.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.6: Piping Systems Page 69


Section 6 Piping Systems This section covers requirements and regulations for piping systems onboard naval surface vessels. Requirements to machinery installations, systems, and equipment for propulsion and auxiliary systems are covered by Section 7. Control and monitoring systems are dealt with in Section 9. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0.

A General

A 100 Application

101 Naval vessels are in general to comply with the requirements in the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.1 and Pt.4 Ch.6 with the additional requirements specified in this section. For smaller vessels/craft NDLO can approve the requirements in the DNV Rules for Classification of HSLC and NSC Part.4 Ch.6 and with the additional requirements specified in NRAR Section 6 when appropriate. All Class III piping systems to fulfill requirements for Class II.

A 200 Definitions





205 DNV rules inapplicable.

A 300 Plans and particulars

301 Diagrammatic plans for all piping systems shall be submitted for approval by NDLO (Ref. DNV Rules for Classification of Ships Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.1 C102 and C103). If no space is available on the diagrammatic plans, a pipe list and an armature list is to be submitted for approval for all piping systems. The pipe- and armature- lists shall have the same title and drawing number as the accompanying schematic drawings. The pipe list must contain pipe number, outside diameter and wall thickness, pipe material, water velocity (if seawater-system), and designation of pipe. The armature list must contain armature number, nominal diameter, nominal pressure, type of armature, material specification and manufacturer.

A 400 Materials

401 Materials used in the construction of piping systems shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.6. When selecting materials due attention shall be paid to long lifetime and the ability to withstand shock loads.

Guidance note: For vessels with requirements regarding magnetic signature, special considerations for material qualities must be taken into account. The selection of material in piping systems, as well as prefabrication and treatment, for such vessels shall be approved by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---




403 Guidance note: The following types of corrosion must be considered during design and selection of materials in piping systems:

- Galvanic corrosion - Turbulence corrosion - Selective corrosion - Deposit corrosion - Stress corrosion


404 Plastic piping is in general to comply with the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.2. The following constraints apply for plastic pipes: — plastic pipes are not accepted led through structurally fire protected or watertight boundaries — plastic pipes are not accepted in piping systems for flammable fluids or essential machinery and vessel piping systems — low flame spread, smoke generation and toxicity characteristic shall be proven according to a recognised standard. PVC pipes shall not be used.

405 Galvanic corrosion in seawater shall be limited by: a) Choosing materials with corrosion potentials in seawater as similar to each other as possible. b) Avoiding connection of materials where the surface of the less noble metal (the anode) is

small compared to the surface of the more noble metal (the cathode). c) In cases where it is impossible to follow the above instructions satisfactorily, the following are

to be used in order to protect against galvanic corrosion: - The materials are electrically insulated from each other (refer to KNMS S-0180). - Cathodic protection is introduced using sacrificial anodes or enforced current.

Guidance note: Galvanic corrosion can take place when metals with different corrosion potentials in an electrolyte have metallic contact with each other while submersed in the electrolyte. The metal with the lowest corrosion potential (the less noble of the metals) becomes the anode in an electrochemical element and corrodes, while the more noble metal thus gains cathodic protection. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

406 To avoid/reduce turbulence corrosion the following rules shall apply: a) The seawater inlets shall be positioned in such a manner that a minimum of air is drawn in,

even during heavy rolling. b) The seawater inlets shall not be positioned directly below the bilge keel. c) Pipe bends shall have a bending radius (to the pipe’s centreline) of at least three times the size

of the outer diameter. d) Branch ducts shall form an as sharp angle as possible with the direction of flow. e) Sudden cross-section transitions shall be avoided. In cases where variations in the pipes’

diameters are necessary, the transition between the different diameters shall have conicity no greater than 1:4. With reference to the figure below, conicity = (D1 - D2)/L.



Water velocities in seawater pipes shall be within the limits presented in the figure below (for seawater below 40ºC). NDLO shall approve the use of other material qualities and water velocities in seawater pipes.

Guidance note: AISI 316 is generally not suitable for use in seawater piping systems. It does not resist stagnant and/or water lacking oxygen. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: For seawater piping systems a device/system for avoiding fouling must be considered. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: Turbulence corrosion is caused by seawater and other salt solutions with such a high velocity that erosion exceeding a marginal value for the individual metals takes place on the metal surface. If the velocity of water is high enough, this erosive effect will be able to wear down the thin layer of corrosion products on the metal surface completely or partly, or to prevent the formation of such a layer. These effects leads to the formation of corrosion elements where the areas exposed to the strongest erosive powers become anodic and thus corrode. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Copper

Brass

CuNi 90:10

CuNi 70:30

FeNiAl bronze

Carbon steel

Hot dip galvanised steel

AISI 316

Austenitic stainless steel with > 6% Mo

Ferritic steel with > 6% Cr + 3% Mo

Titanium

Elastopipe

1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20

Minimum and maximum water velocities [m/s]



407 Selective corrosion, such as dezinking of brass, shall be avoided when materials in seawater systems are decided.

Guidance note: Selective corrosion is characterised by the components in an alloy dissolving at unequal rates. The result of this process is that the remaining part of the alloy becomes porous and its mechanical strength is heavily reduced. Known examples of this process are de-zincing of brass and de-aluminising of certain types of aluminium bronze.


408 To avoid crevice corrosion the following shall be adhered to:

- Gaps and other unevenness resulting in less movement of the water locally than in the surroundings shall be avoided.

- The velocity of the water shall not be lower than 1 m/s. - The use of materials that are especially sensitive to crevice corrosion shall be avoided in

exposed applications.

Guidance note: Crevice corrosion can be found in gaps, beneath deposits and in other places at which the velocity and movement of the liquid is low compared to the surroundings due to obstructions. One of the causes of this type of corrosion is lack of oxygen. The corrosion type develops as pitting, and can progress extremely rapidly. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

409 Materials that are sensitive to stress corrosion shall be annealed after cold working.

Guidance note: A typical sign of stress corrosion is cracking caused by simultaneous influence of mechanical strains in the material and a corrosive medium. The strains can be caused by external stresses, or there may be internal strains in the material caused for example by cold working. Materials that are sensitive to stress corrosion must thus be annealed after cold working. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

410 Materials in pipes and pipe components shall meet the requirements stated in A420. Smaller pipes for use with stagnant seawater, for example manometer pipes, may be made of copper SF-CuF20 DIN 17671.

Guidance note: Elastopipe-type materials may be used with approval from NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

411 The following material qualities shall be used in seawater pumps: Casing: Aluminium bronze G-CuAll0Ni 1) DIN 1714 Red brass 2) G-CuSnl0Zn 1) DIN 1705 Shaft: Aluminium bronze CuAll0Ni DIN 17665 Stainless steel SIS 142324 Shaft bushing: Aluminium bronze CuAll0Ni DIN 1714/17665 Red brass 2) CuSn10Zn DIN 1705 Impeller:



Aluminium bronze G-CuAll0Ni 1) DIN 1714 NiCu alloys G-NiCu30Nb 1) DIN 17730 G-NiCu30Si3 1) DIN 17730 G-NiCu30Si4 1) DIN 17730

Guidance note: 1) The letter G indicates the casting method (sand-casting).Other casting methods may

be used. 2) The choice of material shall be approved by NDLO in each case. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The use of other material qualities shall be approved by NDLO in each case.

412 The following materials shall be used in shell and tube heat exchangers, in preferred order/priority: Tubes: Titanium grade 2 or 70:30 copper nickel, NS 16415 copper nickel alloy CuNi30Mn1Fe or 90:10 copper nickel, NS 16410 copper nickel alloy CuNi10Fe1Mn Tube sheet: Titanium grade 2 or 90:10 copper nickel with chemical composition equal to NS 16410 copper nickel alloy CuNi10Fe1Mn or Red brass, NS 16512 CuSn10Zn2 or NS 16520 CuSn9Zn4Pb2 End caps: Titanium grade 2 or 90:10 copper nickel with chemical composition equal to NS 16410 copper nickel alloy CuNi10Fe1Mn or Red brass, NS 16512 CuSnlOZn2 or NS 16520 CuSn9Zn4Pb2

413 The following materials shall be used in plate type heat exchangers, in preferred order/priority: Plates: Titanium Connections: Titanium grade 2 or 90:10 copper nickel with chemical composition equal to NS 16410 copper nickel alloy CuNi10Fe1Mn or Red brass, NS 16512 CuSn10Zn2 or NS 16520 CuSn9Zn4Pb2 The use of other material qualities shall be approved by NDLO in each case.

414 To avoid galvanic corrosion in pipes transporting seawater, the part of the threaded pipe coupling which is exposed to seawater shall be made of the same material as the pipe itself.

415 The following materials shall be used in pipe connections, valves and pipe accessories: Valve housing: Red brass, NS 16512 CuSn10Zn2 or NS 16520 CuSn9ZnPb2 or



Aluminium bronze, NS 16570 CuAll0NiFe Valve stems: Aluminium bronze NS 16570 CuAll0NiFe or Stainless steel NS 14310, Nickel copper alloy DIN 17743 NiCU30Fe Seals (cone, gate, damper and seat): Same material as in housing or Nickel copper alloy DIN 17743 NiCu30Fe The use of material qualities shall be approved by NDLO in each case.

416 Titanium pipes to be specified according to acknowledged standards like ASTM B 337, B 338 and DIN 17 850. Other titanium material to be approved by NDLO before use. The geometrical dimensions of the pipes shall be adapted to the standard for stainless steel pipes shown in DIN 17 861 for seamless pipes and DIN 17 866 for welded pipes. Pipe constructions of Grade 2 titanium may be used in flanges, bolts and other pipe connections such as bends, T-joints, reducers, welding flanges and welding ends with flanges for use with detachable flanges.

417 For the treatment of titanium, a procedure approved by NDLO for transport, handling, storage, workshop premises, and type of tools, shall be used.

Guidance note: Titanium requires special treatment. Prior to shipment from the manufacturer, the pipes shall be sealed at both ends for protection against foreign bodies. Specified protection against damage during transport must be employed. On arrival at the workshop, the pipes must be checked for transport damage. In addition the marking and material certificates shall be checked. At the workshop the pipes must be stored under dry conditions, separate from pipes made of ordinary steel. Semi-products and ready-welded pipes and pipe components should be stored on wood dust and covered with plastic. Open pipe ends should be sealed. Lifting and transporting equipment must be of stainless steel or some other material which does not damages the pipes. These requirements also apply for tools which are to be used for processing titanium. When handling titanium, it is important that a high degree of cleanliness is exercised. The premises which are used for welding and processing must be isolated from other premises in order to avoid contamination from dust and other impurities. Tools used for cracking, bending and rolling must not result in deposits of metal particles. Only tools/equipment made of stainless steel are to be used. Prior to shaping, the materials must be cleaned in order to prevent contamination on the surface. It is especially important that all seams are kept covered with plastic tape until welding starts. Avoid touching the welding seam: even fingerprints can cause a poor welding result. The welding operators must use clean clothing and clean gloves. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

418 Welding of titanium shall satisfy ISO 5817 (2003): Welding -- Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium, and their allows (beam welding excluded) -- Quality levels for imperfections.

419 Stainless steel shall not be used in seawater systems and systems exposed to seawater.

Guidance note:



NDLO can approve the use of pitting resistant stainless steels (e.g. AISI 316) in certain applications. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

420 Non-destructive testing shall be conducted on stainless steel pipes.

Guidance note: Which NDT methods can be used on stainless steel depends on the structure of the steel types and whether they are magnetic or non-magnetic. Penetrant testing and X-ray testing can be used on all types of stainless steel. Magnetic particle testing can only be used on ferromagnetic materials. However, the degree of ferromagnetism, expressed by permeability, should be higher than a stated value. For austenitic steel, which is non-magnetic, magnetic particle testing cannot be used. Ultrasonic testing is also complicated on these materials since their structure only allows limited sound penetration, which in turn makes it difficult to evaluate the result. Because of this, penetrant testing and X-ray testing are the most widely used methods on these types of steel. What is stated for austenitic steel types also applies to a great extent to ferritic-austenitic (duplex) steel types, even though they are ferromagnetic. Penetrant testing and X-ray testing are also the most widely used methods for these types of steel. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

421 Minimum requirements regarding material quality for pipes, connections, valves, accessories, flanges, screws and nuts are specified in the table below. Material selection in pipes and armature shall be approved by NDLO for all piping systems. In addition, any deviations from the given requirements shall be forwarded and approved by NDLO on a case-by-case basis. Nr System PN Pipe Armature Flanges Screws/nuts 1)

1 Bilge- and ballast system

≤ 16 CuNi10FeF30 DIN 17671 5)

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

CuNi10FeF26 5) DIN 17673

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 16 G-CuAl10Ni DIN 17665

G-CuNi10 5) DIN 17658

≤ 16 Elastopipe To be decided in each case

Sockets/branches in Ti grade 2

2 Ventilation, overflow and sounding pipe

a) Oil tanks ≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 1629/3

b) Water tanks ≤ 16 St. 35 (galvanized) DIN 1629/3

c) Sludge tanks ≤ 16 St. 35 (galvanized) DIN 1629/3

3 Lube oil systems

a) Outer pipe diameter ≤ 42 4) ≤ 16

St. 35 DIN 2391/2

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

b) All pipe diameters ≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 1629/3

GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

4 Fuel systems

a) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 42 4)

≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 2391/2

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267


GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

5 Hydraulic system



Nr System PN Pipe Armature Flanges Screws/nuts 1)


≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 2391/2

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267


GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

c) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 42 4)

≤ 100 St. 35.4 DIN 2391/2

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

d) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 25 4)

≤ 160 St. 35.4 DIN 2391/2

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

e) All pipe diameters ≤ 160 St. 35.4 DIN 1629/4

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

f) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 25 4)

≤ 250 St. 35.4 DIN 2391/2

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

6 Compressed air system 6)


≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 2391/2

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267


GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 10 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

c) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 42 4)

≤ 40 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

d) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 25 4)

≤ 250 St. 35.4 DIN 2391/2

C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

7 Instrument and control system

a) Compressed air See system Nr. 6 See system Nr. 6 See system Nr. 6 See system Nr. 6

b) Oil See system Nr. 3, 4 and 5

See system Nr. 3, 4 and 5



c) Fresh water ≤ 16 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

e) Refrigeration and freezing system

See system Nr. 10 See system Nr. 10 See system Nr. 10 See system Nr. 10

8 Fresh water system

a) Machinery cooling system

≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 1629/3

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 16 GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 16 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

b) Sanitary system ≤ 16 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

Stainless steel NS 14350



c) Heating of compartments, exterior pipe diameter ≤ 42 4)

≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 1629/3

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 16 St. 35 DIN 2391/2

GGG-40 DIN 1693

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 16 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

9 Seawater system 2) ≤ 10 CuNi10FeF30 DIN 17671 5)

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

CuNi10FeF26 5) DIN 17673

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

G-CuAl10Ni DIN 17665

G-CuNi10 5) DIN 17658



Nr System PN Pipe Armature Flanges Screws/nuts 1)

Elastopipe To be decided in each case

Sockets/branches in Ti grade 2

10 Refrigeration and freezing system

a) R22 ≤ 16 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 40 St. 35.4 4) DIN 1629/4

GS-C25 DIN 17245

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 40 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

b) Other cooling agents

To be decided in each case




11 Firefighting system

a) CO2 ≤ 64 St. 35 (galvanized) DIN 1629/3

GS-C25 DIN 17245

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

≤ 64 C22 DIN 17200

C22 DIN 17200

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

b) AFFF system To be decided in each case




c) Halon system To be decided in each case




12 H2O2/Hydrogen peroxide system

a) Filling and vacuum pipe

≤ 2 Al. 99.7% NS 17015

Al. 99.7% NS 17015

Al. 99.7% NS 17015 NS 14450

b) Emergency bilge pipe

≤ 2 Stainless steel NS 14450

Stainless steel’ NS 14450

Stainless steel NS 14450 NS 14450

13 Compressed air system to divers 7)

a) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 25

≤ 250 St. 35.4 DIN 2391/2

C22 DIN 17200

RSt. 37-2 DIN 17100

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

b) Exterior pipe diameter ≤ 20

≤ 250 SF-CuF20 DIN 17671

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705

4.6/4 3) DIN 267

14 Helicopter fuelling system

≤ 16 Stainless steel NS 14350




15 Oxygen system ≤ 250 Monell, CuNi-alloys

Monell, CuNi-alloys

Monell, CuNi-alloys

Guidance note: The following footnotes apply to the table above: 1) 4.6/4 is only to be used in connection with soft gaskets. When using hard gaskets,

CK45/C35 DIN 17240 shall be used if nothing else is specified.

2) Pipes intended for use with seawater but which mainly are kept dry (e.g. sprinklers) may be made of copper SF-CuF20 DIN 17671, equivalent to C106 BS 2871:1972.

3) Screws and nuts shall be hot dip galvanised, and the threads shall have normal

tolerances. The qualities 8.8/8 DIN 267 may be used as an alternative material to 4.6/4.

4) Precision steel pipes according to DIN 2391/2 shall only be used together with

couplings equipped with clamping and cut rings (cf. KNMS S-0090). 5) CuNi10FeF26 and G-CuNi10 shall be used for welding flanges and soldering

flanges. G-CuSn10Zn DIN 1705 may be used where hard soldering has been applied.



6) Starting air pipes and pipes between compressor and starting air receiver shall as rule be made of steel. Starting air pipes made of copper and copper alloys are, however, permitted for outer diameters < 44.5 [mm]. Hot dip galvanised pipes shall be used if the system is not equipped with a moisture separator.

7) NDLO shall specify the selection of material to be used in each case. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

B Design Principles

B 100 General

101 Piping systems for naval vessels are in general to comply with the design principles in the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.3 with the additional requirements given in Sec.7 A and in this section.


B 200 Arrangements







207 Pipes that run through holes in decks or bulkheads shall be supported in order to ensure constant clearance between the pipe and the sheath edge. All pipelines shall be mounted in a satisfactory manner. The number of mountings, type and positioning shall be determined on the basis of the following criteria:

- The total weight of the pipeline, including the weight of medium inside and any insulation - Thermal expansion and contraction - The movement of the vessel in heavy seas - Flexible suspension of machinery and equipment - Vibrations - Shock loads - Corrosion

Guidance note: For requirements regarding the arrangement of pipes through watertight decks and bulkheads, cf. KNMS S-0089 (Pos. 10 & 11), 0174, 0175, 0176, 0178, 0205, 0210 and 0215. NDLO can approve other deck and bulkhead penetrations. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

208 The friction between a pipe and its mounting must not be so great that appreciable forces are transferred to pipes, mounting foundations, machinery or equipment due to the pipe’s elasticity. In ordinary clamps (cf. NS 6006) sleeves are not a requirement, but sleeves made of lead or rubber are



permitted. The use of oil-resistant and seawater-resistant rubber, 40 shore, is permitted in all piping systems with a working temperature ≤120ºC. The thickness of the rubber sleeve shall be approximately 5 [mm] for all pipe diameters. In special sound-proofed rooms the thickness of the rubber sleeves should be increased to approximately 10 [mm] when the pipe diameter is ≥42 [mm]. Clamps on pipes made of copper or copper alloys, as well as on pipes on the weather deck, shall be plastic-coated. Hot dip galvanised or plastic-coated clamps are also permitted for other types of pipes (cf. NS 6006).

B 300 Operation of valves

301 DNV rules fully applicable. Ref NRAR section 9 subchapter 2 C102.

B 400 Shock Loads Design

401 Due to its poor resistance against shock load, white and grey cast iron shall not be used. Nodular iron may be used if approved by NDLO. Requiremenst for shock loads will be given in specific guidelines by NDLO.

402 Glass-Reinforced Plastic (GRP) pipes shall not be used in critical in piping systems, due to poor shock properties.

403 Stiff connections shall have sufficient strength to withstand shock loads. Pipelines shall be arranged in such a way that harmful loads due to relative movement (clearance) are not further transmitted. Between the suspension points, the pipelines shall normally have at least 50 [mm] clearance in all directions in order to avoid collision with other components or hull parts due to shock loads. If the pipeline runs below the water line, the clearance between the pipeline and the vessel’s sheathing plates shall be at least 100 [mm]. It shall be decided in each case which equipment shall be shock protected based on essentiality and safety considerations. The shipbuilder to provide a report stating how these systems are to be shock protected. Report shall be approved by NDLO.

Guidance note: NDLO to provide input based on ship type and operational concept. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C Pipe, Pumps, Valves, Flexible Hoses and Detachable Pipe Connections

C 100 General



C 200 Pumps


202 In general, pumps are to be located below the waterline. Centrifugal pumps located above their reservoir shall be of selfpriming type or connected to a central priming system.



When self-priming is required, this shall be verified in different load and trim/list conditions and for SES vessel both in different load and trim/list condition and on/off air-cushion. Self priming function shall be approved by NDLO. Self priming function shall be able to operate without use of external power supply, and not need any local- or remote operation.



205 Centrifugal pumps for essential systems shall have positive suction height. If this is not possible the pump and priming system has to be specially approved by NDLO.

206 All centrifugal pumps for essential seawater systems shall be capacity tested after installation onboard in all operational modes (e.g. trim/list, action station, fire-fighting, harbour condition etc.).

207 Capacity tests for all pumps in essential systems, both flow- and pressure test statically and dynamically, shall be performed as part of inspection and testing (Harbour Acceptance Test and Sea Acceptance Test).

C 300 Bellow and bellow units

301 When using bellows, the type, manufacturer and area of application (pressure, medium, temperature, etc.) shall be subject to approval by NDLO. Bellows are to be pressure tested to 1.5 times working pressure before mounting.

Guidance note: Materials and dimensions shall be suitable for the working medium, working pressure and working temperature for all connections. Non-heat-resistant connections are normally not permitted in:

- seawater pipes - piping systems transporting combustible fluids - bilge pipes - steam systems.


C 400 Flexible hoses

401 The use of flexible hoses with connections shall be subject to approval by NDLO. Hoses with connections shall be shown on the drawings as part of building specification approved by NDLO. The drawings should identify the different hoses with the name of the manufacturer and type designation.

Guidance note: A list of permitted hoses and their area of application can be found in the list of type approved products issued by DNV. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: Fire tests may be required for hoses in systems that affect the safety of the vessel. The test shall be carried out in accordance with DNV requirements. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

402 In order to avoid damage due to ageing, all flexible hoses and connections shall be marked with date of manufacture. The manufacturer shall state the predicted lifetime of such items so that they can be replaced at the appropriate time.



D Manufacture, Workmanship, Inspection and Testing

D 100 General



103 All pipes and piping systems, also non-essential machinery- and vessel piping systems, shall after the installation has been completed be subjected to a hydrostatic test at a pressure of minimum 1.5 times the design/working pressure with 4 [bar] as the lowest allowable minimum. Documentation of testing shall be submitted to NDLO. Calibrated pressure gauges shall be used in pressure testing. The test pressure shall be upheld for the length of time needed to perform a thorough examination of the piping system in order to discover any leakage, and in any case for at least 30 minutes. In general, fresh water shall be used as test pressure medium. In systems where fresh water can harm the system, the medium in the system itself shall be used.

Guidance note: Machinery and equipment must not be exposed to higher pressure than their maximum allowed working pressure. Instruments, control equipment and other equipment which could be damaged during the pressure testing must either be removed or be efficiently be protected against excess pressure. Overflow valves and safety valves, as well as all other components installed to limit the working pressure shall, if necessary, be put out of function in order to achieve the specified test pressure. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

104 Penetration fluid, pressure testing according to ASTM norm or X-ray examination shall be used for checking welded titanium products.

105 Fittings shall not be painted until the pressure test has been completed.

E Marking

E 100 General


102 The following additional rules and requirements shall apply:

- All switches, levers, valves and other control devices shall be marked - All marking shall be with Norwegian, or alternatively English, text - The design, abbreviations and designations shall be approved by NDLO - The text shall be easily legible and shall face outwards towards the operating side of the unit

Guidance note: Marking and marking language should be consistent throughout the vessel. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 All pipe lines and ventilation ducts shall be marked using a marking system in accordance with NS 813, NS 832, NS 4051, and NS 5575, with NDLO approved text. Each marking shall in plain text describe contents, function and where the medium is transported. Information about pressure, temperature etc. may be included as appropriate.



Marks should be placed where pipes and ducts are connected to other components, as well as close to valves, branches and bulkhead penetrations. Maximum distance between marks on pipe and duct sections shall be 5 [m]. The marks shall be positioned in such places and in such a number that finding the function and content of the individual pipes and ducts is quick and easy. Danger warning (yellow with black stripes) combined with other colour tagging shall only be used subject to special agreement with NDLO. Only tape whose colours are protected against chemical, mechanical, humidity and/or temperature influences over time shall be used as marking tape.

104 All connections, valves and accessories shall be marked. The plate shall contain the fitting’s number and an explanatory text describing the function of the fitting. Circular plates are fixed to the valve stem above the handwheel. On connections, valves and accessories where this method can not be used, rectangular plates with the same type of panel shall be mounted in such a way that they obviously refer to the fitting. If connections, valves and accessories are placed in tanks, cavities or other places that are normally unmanned, the marking shall be placed at the remote control position. Connections, valves and accessories which can be operated both manually and by remote control shall be marked at both places. Connections, valves and accessories installed beneath decks or confined spaces shall be marked in the usual way, but in addition the access hatch shall also be marked. Connections, valves and accessories situated on manifolds shall be marked separately. Hose reels shall be painted red and do not require any marking with system name, but shall be marked with hose reel number and connections, valves and accessories number.

105 Pipelines in compressed air systems shall be marked according to NS 813 and NS 4074.

F Machinery Piping Systems

F 100 General

101 Analyses of the elastic systems shall consider the following:

- Alignment of the component - Relative movement of the component - Sufficient flexibility in connections between the component and its surroundings - Access for inspection and maintenance of the dampers - The load distribution between the vibration dampers - Possible acoustic short-circuit (i.e. direct contact between the component and its surroundings)

with regard to reduce structure-borne noise

102 All pipes that are connected to an elastically supported component shall be so flexible that the component’s movement does not lead to damage of pipes, hoses or couplings. Pipe connections shall be arranged so that they do not function as stops and thereby prevent movement of the component. Elastic hoses must be installed such that the hose units are not exposed at the fastening points to great bending loads. Pipes should be supported elastically at all support points in order to reduce the transmission of structure-borne noise.



F 200 Seawater cooling systems

201 The arrangement of seawater cooling inlets shall be in accordance with B200. The cooling system for machinery for propulsion and power generation shall be connected to at least two seawater inlets. Main propulsion engines shall have cooling water inlets that are not shared with the main seawater system.


203 Main propulsion and auxiliary engines shall have an emergency cooling system approved by NDLO.

F 300 Fresh water cooling systems



303 Main propulsion and auxiliary engines shall be equipped with a preheating circulation system.

F 400 Lubricating oil systems

401 The lubricating oil system for both main propulsion and auxiliary engines shall include a priming pump.



404 Lubricating oil storage tanks to be installed. The number of tanks shall be approved by NDLO.

405 For diesel engines with external lubricating oil reservoir, pumps with negative suction height shall be arranged with a no return valve at the bottom of the suction pipe.

406 Filling and emptying of lube oil tanks shall be possible from an easily accessible connection.

Guidance note: The filling and emptying position will normally be on the weather deck in connection with the bunkering station. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

F 500 Fuel oil systems

501 The tanks shall be accessible for inspection and cleaning. A manhole should normally be installed in the tank top. In wet rooms, e.g. machinery spaces, the manhole shall be mounted on a frame so that liquids do not run down into the tank.

502 Fuel oil service tank capacity shall in general comply with the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.5, but the calculations should be based on cruising speed as defined in A204. Alternative arrangements may be accepted upon special consideration. With regard to service tanks the following requirements apply:



- There shall be a service tank for each main engine, which shall be mounted so that the service tank’s lowest fuel level lies higher than any part of the engine’s fuel system.

- A cross connection between service tanks shall be designed so that it is not possible to empty a service tank over into another service tank.

- Auxiliary engines may have a supply from the main engine’s service tanks if the same conditions with regard to static pressure height as for main engines are present.

- With combined service tank for propulsion and auxiliary engines the lowest pipe connection from the service tank should be to auxiliary engines for power generation.

- It shall be possible to draw fuel from the service tanks. - The layout of service tank pipelines shall be such that the supply of fuel to the main engines

can be shut off without disturbing the supply of fuel to the auxiliary engines.

Guidance note: For Fast Patrol Boats (FPB) and Mine Counter-Measure Vessels (MCMV), a service tank for each propulsion line is acceptable. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---





507 Fuel pipes shall not be run through fresh water tanks and fresh water pipes shall not be run through fuel tanks.

508 The filling pipe shall have a shut-off device on deck.

509 The filling pipes shall be in accordance with STANAG 1167 and the following standards relevant for replenishment at sea (RAS):

- STANAG 1065 (Edition 17): Replenishment at Sea - ATP 16(D)/MTP-16(D) - STANAG 1084 (Edition 5) RAS: Replenishment of fuel in harbour; and replenishment of

water in harbour and at sea - STANAG 1218 (Edition 2): Standard reception station arrangements designed to support up to

250 kilograms (550 pounds) transfer load - STANAG 1310 (Edition 4) RAS: Design criteria for replenishment aspects of new

construction naval vessels - STANAG 1357 (Edition 2): NATO standard abeam 65 [mm] fuelling coupling - STANAG 1438 (Edition 1): Astern refueling using the 2.5 inch (65 [mm]) hose

Guidance note: For Fast Patrol Boats (FPB) and Mine Counter-Measure Vessels (MCMV), a simple RAS position can be approved (astern fueling). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

510 Valves shall be affixed between the pumps and their suction and pressure lines so that the pumps can be isolated. It shall be possible to stop fuel pumps from the room where they are installed and from an easily accessible place outside this.



F 600 Air inlets for main and auxiliary engines


F 700 Exhaust systems





705 The gas speed in silencers and exhaust pipes shall not exceed 35 [m/s] with regard to the noise level at the exhaust outlet.

F 800 Hydraulic systems

801 Hydraulic systems shall be designed, tested and flushed in accordance with the following standards:

- STANAG 1135 (Annex C): Lubricants and associated products - STANAG 1414: Guidelines to ensure that contractors design and supply new equipment

capable of using NATO standardized lubricants - The Defence’s POL catalogue (issued by the Defence’s joint materials service): FS 7610-1700 - DIN 51524 (part 1 – 3): Requirements and specifications - NS 5908: Hydraulic fluid power - General rules for the application of equipment to

transmission and control systems - NS 5910: Cleaning of hydraulics systems - NS 1638: Cleanliness requirements of parts used in hydraulic systems - NS 2084 Selection and dimensioning of hydraulic filters - ISO 4406: Method for coding the level of contamination by solid particles - ISO 11171: Calibration of automatic particle counter for liquids - ISO/DIS 4867: Code for the measurement and reporting of shipboard vibration data - ISO/DIS 4868: Code for the measurement and reporting of shipboard local vibration data - IMO Resolution A468 (XV): Code on noise levels on board ships, Chapter 2 - Measurements




805 Coolers shall be dimensioned for continuous operation under operating conditions that give the highest heat development. Maximum ambient and cooling medium temperatures shall be defined.

Guidance note: The temperature of the hydraulic oil shall lie a minimum 10°C below the oil’s recommended upper operating temperature under all conditions. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

806 Normally, direct shaft couplings shall be used.

Guidance note:



Flexible couplings shall be used where major load and drive speed shocks can occur. Choice of coupling shall be based on static and dynamic load in accordance with C200. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

807 A hydraulic filter shall be positioned in the system so that it protects the system’s components in the best way possible.

Guidance note: Particular attention shall be given to expensive, sensitive and difficult to access components, and components that are classified as critical. Suction filters for pumps should be avoided. In the event of possible use, special consideration shall be given to pressure drops that may affect the pump’s available suction pressure. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A filter on the return side shall be positioned before an oil cooler in order to achieve good filtration. A filter shall be positioned so that good access is achieved in the event of a filter change.

808 Pumps and motors that drive equipment that are necessary in order to attend to the safety of the ship shall have as a minimum have a type approval certificate.

809 Noise data including octave band measurement shall be forwarded to NDLO for approval.

810 A system with a positive pressure pump shall have a safety valve. This shall be positioned so that shut-off is not possible. For a smaller oil flow (Q < 100 [l/min]), directly operated types can be used. For Q > 100 [l/min], pre-controlled valves shall be used. Safety valves shall have characteristics that give more then a 10% pressure increase at maximum through-flow. Safety valves shall be designed so that the most probable occurring faults lead to the valve opening. (fail-to-safety). Oil from safety valves shall be led to a tank.

811 A low-pressure filter shall have a built-in overflow valve that shall open when the filter element is contaminated. A filter cartridge’s blast pressure shall be a minimum of 4 times the opening pressure for an overflow valve. The differential pressure over the filter shall be measured. This shall be local, but in addition can also be for remote indication.

812 Definition of filtration capacity shall be in accordance with ISO 4572.

813 A valve for isolation/calibration of pressure gauges shall be fitted. Pressure gauges shall be flexibly mounted and with an outlet for a test point.

Guidance note: A manometer shall be filled with fluid and shall normally be selected so that the operating point lies at approximately 70% of the instrument’s measurement range. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

814 Temperature sensors shall be mounted in a separate phial pocket.

815 Hydraulic systems shall be fitted with a heating element.

816 The tank volume shall be dimensioned with regard to volume changes occurring in the system during operation and in order to secure good deaeration. The following guidelines are imposed for a functional tank design:



- The tank’s intake shall be below the minimum oil level in order to avoid whipping in of air - The tank’s outlet shall be positioned so that a vortex is avoided - The tank shall be equipped with the necessary rolling bulkhead - Materials/surface treatment shall be specified - The tank shall be equipped with both a filling filter and a breathing filter - The tank shall have facilities for drainage from the lowest point - The tank shall be designed in order to be able to separate out air - The tank shall be equipped with a manhole for inspection and cleaning.

817 The supplier of hydraulic oils shall provide information about possible toxicity and guidelines for handling.

818 New oil shall be filled into the system through a filling filter with the same degree of filtration as the system’s own filter.

819 The hydraulic system shall be cleaned in accordance with NS 5910 before initial use.

820 Hydraulic systems shall be designed so that:

- vibrations do not damage components in the system or entail damage to a connected structure. - the noise level from the system does not exceed given limits. - structure-borne noise is reduced through measures such as:

o an adequate rigid base so that resonance in the supporting structure is avoided. o elastic mounting.

Guidance note: Air-borne noise is reduced through measures such as choice of low-noise equipment or appropriate insulation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

821 Total noise including noise from hydraulic system shall be reduced to a level defined in DNV’s Comfort Class, COMF-V(3), by use of active or passive damping measures. The following passive measures shall be followed for pipe systems:

- Pipe support shall not be located on an unbraced plate field. - With the exception of control systems, flexible pipe clip rings shall be used. - Flexible bulkhead pipe sleeves shall be used.

Guidance note: Active damping measures mean the reduction of the vibration level directly at the vibration source. This covers measures such as:

- choice of low-noise equipment - use of pulsation dampers - adjusting the pump’s/motor’s operating parameters (i.e. pressure, delivery quantity) so

that the noise level is kept to an acceptable level - avoiding a system design that involves a large pressure drop - avoiding system solutions that through operation of hydraulic components mean that

pressure transients are spread in the pipe system. Passive damping measures mean preventing vibrations transmitted from the vibration source. This covers measures such as:

- elastic support - flexible pipe connections and shaft couplings.



Pumps are not normally mounted on a tank top. As flexible hoses stretch during pressurisation, correct fitting is absolutely necessary in order to avoid major forces in the hose fastening. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

822 Flexible pipe clips shall be adjusted to loads due to the pipe’s weight and to displacements which are due to heat expansion. Flexible bulkhead pipe sleeves shall satisfy requirements for a water/gas-tight feed-through and fire safety.

F 900 Machinery space ventilation



F 1000 Compressed air systems

1001 Compressors shall be installed with a total capacity large enough to charge the starting air vessels from atmospheric pressure to full pressure over the course of 30 minutes.

Guidance note: The required total capacity of starting air receivers should not be less than 6 starts and need not exceed 12 starts for FPB and MCMV type vessels with weight limitations. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1002 The compressed air systems shall be compliant in accordance with the following standards:

- NS-EN 19: Industrial valves – marking of metallic valves - NS 811 Marking of gas cylinders for industrial gases - NS 813: Pipe systems - Identification colours for the content - NS 832: Identification colours for piping systems for industrial gases - NS 3622: Plastic pipes. Pressure pipes of polyethylene (PE) (1st issue March ‘86) - NS 3622: Addition to NS 3622, 1st issue March ‘86 (1st issue October ‘86) - NS-EN ISO 4126: Safety devices for protection against excessive pressure - NS 5500: Pressure gauges. Terminology, dimensions, scale ranges, use (Edition 2) - NS 5507: Thermometers - Industrial thermometers with glass inserts - V-shaped case - Manometers in high pressure systems shall be designed as safety manometers in accordance

with NS 5503. Other manometers shall satisfy the requirements in NS 5500 - NS-EN 13445 Unfired pressure vessels - NS-EN 13480 Metallic industrial piping - Directorate for Civil protection and emergency planning: Forskrift om brannfarlig eller

trykksatt stoff.

Guidance note: Pipes and other equipment made of plastic are permitted to be used if they have satisfactory mechanical strength, low thermal plasticity and high oil resistance. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1003 Valves on the air bottle shall be designed so that damaging pressure shocks do not arise in the pipes when the valves are opened. The valves shall be mounted directly on the bottle.



A manometer shall be mounted which shows the bottle pressure and there shall be a tap cock for draining off oil and water at the bottle’s lowest point. The high pressure batteries shall be arranged for rapid pressure release in the event of fire.

Guidance note: Outlet from the high pressure batteries shall preferably be led outside the machinery space. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1004 For high-pressure systems, solid drawn steel pipes or annealed solid drawn copper pipes shall be used. The maximum permitted pipe diameter is 44.5 [mm] nominal diameter. For low-pressure systems, a plastic pipeline may also be used. The plastic material in the pipes shall be toughened and shall have good ageing properties. The pipes shall satisfy NS 3622. Pipes made of plastic shall at maximum pressure have a pressure class corresponding to twice the installation’s working pressure. Materials for air bottles shall be approved for use within the relevant field of application in accordance with the pressure vessel code or the standard according to which the bottles are supplied. For bottles that are supplied according to TBK 1 - 2, the materials shall be approved by the Nordic Examination of Pressure Vessel Steel (NGS).

Guidance note: The pipes shall not be laid in the vicinity of hot objects and shall be shielded against possible radiation. If steel pipes are used, Nordic Examination of Pressure Vessel Steel (NGS) shall approve the steel quality for use within the relevant pressure and dimension range. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1005 Redundant filters shall be used.

Guidance note: Where there is only one instrument air compressor it should be possible to obtain air from other systems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1006 It shall be possible to operate all remote-controlled valves manually.

1007 All tanks, filters, dryers etc. shall be equipped with drain facilities at the lowest point. All draining points shall be clearly marked.

1008 Compressed vent pipes and parts in the distribution systems shall have a sufficient cross-section in order to avoid instability in the event of major changes in consumption.

1009 Plastic pipes are permitted to be used in control cabinets in control rooms or machinery spaces where the design pressure and design temperature are limited to 1.6 [MPa] and 200°C, with the exception of the following systems:

- Systems for steering engines - Systems for remote control of:

o seawater valves o valves on fuel oil tanks o valves in bilge and fuel oil systems o fire-fighting.



F 1100 Refrigerating and freezing system for provisions

1101 The materials in the installation shall be corrosion resistant against the cooling agent and oil. Cooling agents that are not toxic, harmless for the environment or not subject to a risk of explosion shall be used.

1102 The following drawings and data shall be submitted to NDLO for approval:

- Detailed specification of the refrigerating machinery - Calculation of cooling requirements - Pipe diagram for the installation - Overview diagram for electrical control plant (automatic fusing units, etc.) - Description of the defrosting system - Selected cooling agent.

1103 Unless specified otherwise, the system shall consist of 2 equal and complete units, each consisting of a motor, compressor, condenser and - in the event of indirect cooling - a brine cooler and necessary pipelines, pumps and valves for running the units independently of each other. The system capacity shall be sufficient in order to maintain the specified temperature with one unit in operation and with the other unit in reserve. The installation shall be dimensioned for a maximum seawater temperature of 32°C and an air temperature of 35°C.

1104 The cooling system’s water-cooled components shall have a connection to at least 2 seawater intakes. Air coolers shall, if necessary, be equipped with a defrosting system. Drip trays with an outlet for the water shall be fixed under the cooling elements.

Guidance note: The size and location of drip trays should take into account different sea state and trim. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

G Vessel Piping System

G 100 General


G 200 Air, sounding and overflow pipes





205 Vent pipes from fuel and black water tanks must not end in the vicinity of an air intake.

206 Flame arrestors shall only be used in air vent outlets for flammable fluids or gases. Flame arrestors on vent pipes shall be positioned at the outlet and the area of the pipe opening shall be widened to double the pipe’s cross-section area. The opening shall be affixed to places where no hazard will arise as a result of oil vapour or gas. The opening must be at a safe distance from muzzle flames from weapons.



G 300 Main seawater system

301 Redundant seawater main line shall be arranged with optimum transverse separation. If only one seawater main line is fitted, it shall be arranged longitudinally below deck 1 and as near to the centreline of the vessel as possible. Risers shall be arranged from each main seawater pump to the main seawater line, and from the main seawater line to open deck 1. Risers must not be routed through watertight main bulkheads. Principals for the design of seawater main lines are given in the figures below.



FIG

.2.2

/1

EN

GIN

E

RO

OM

S

EA

W

AT

ER

M

AIN

L

INE

P

RIN

CIP

LE

VA

LV

E

ISO

LA

TIO

N

VA

LV

E

1. D

EC

K (

DA

MA

GE

CO

NT

RO

L D

EC

K )

TO

SE

A

WA

TE

R M

AIN

L

INE

TO

CO

OL

ING

TO

BA

LL

AS

TIN

G O

FB

UN

KE

R T

AN

KS

ST

AR

BO

AR

D A

ND

PO

RT

SID

E

SE

E 2

.2.2

.2 A

ND

FIG

. 2.

3/1

TA

NK

TO

P

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

TO

F

LU

SH

ING

RO

OT

V

AL

VE

RIS

ER

ST

RA

INE

R

BIL

GE

E

JEC

TO

R

ISO

LA

TIO

N

VA

LV

E

ST

RA

INE

R

ISO

LA

TIO

N

VA

LV

E

SP

ILL

WA

Y

OV

ER

BO

AR

D

DR

AIN

HO

SE

VA

LV

E

SE

A

VA

LV

E

RE

MO

TE

CO

NT

RO

LF

RO

M O

PE

N D

EC

K

.

SH

UT

-OF

F

VA

LV

E

NO

N C

LO

SE

AB

LE

CH

EC

K V

AL

VE

CL

OS

EA

BL

E C

HE

CK

VA

LV

E

ISO

LA

TIO

N

VA

LV

E

SE

A

WA

TE

R I

NT

AK

ES

TA

RB

OA

RD

AN

D P

OR

T S

IDE

SE

A

WA

TE

R

MA

INP

UM

P

TH

RO

TT

LE

HO

SE

VA

LV

E

DR

AIN

DR

AIN

RO

OT

V

AL

VE

RO

OT

V

AL

VE

F

IRE

V

AL

VE

BR

AN

CH

L

INE

FIR

E

VA

LV

E

SE

E F

IGU

RE

S B

EL

OW



DR

AIN

H

OL

E A

TL

OW

ES

T P

OS

ITIO

N

MA

GA

ZIN

E

SP

ILL

WA

Y

OV

ER

BO

AR

D

SE

A W

AT

ER

MA

IN P

UM

P

TH

RO

TT

LE

ST

RA

INE

RW

AT

ER

TIG

HT

BU

LK

HE

AD

DR

AIN

ISO

LA

TIO

N V

AL

VE

RO

OT

VA

LV

E

FIR

E V

AL

VE

DR

AIN

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

SE

A W

AT

ER

INT

AK

E

SE

A V

AL

VE

DA

MA

GE

CO

NT

RO

L D

EC

K

1. D

EC

K

RIS

ER

2. D

EC

K

3. D

EC

KIS

OL

AT

ION

VA

LV

E

SP

RIN

KL

ER

NO

ZZ

LE

SP

RIN

KL

ER

VA

LV

E

HO

SE

VA

LV

E

VE

NT

A

N D

OV

ER

FL

OW

PIP

E

LO

CK

ED

IN

CL

OS

ED

PO

SIT

IONT

O F

LU

SH

ING

SH

UT

-OF

F V

AL

VE

CL

OS

EA

BL

E C

HE

CK

VA

LV

EN

ON

CL

SE

AB

LE

CH

EC

K

VA

LV

E

SE

A W

AT

ER

MA

IN

LIN

E

ISO

LA

TIO

N V

AL

VE

ISO

LA

TIO

N V

AL

VE

RO

OT

VA

LV

EL

OC

KE

D I

N O

PE

NP

OS

ITIO

N

RO

OT

VA

LV

E

HO

SE

VA

LV

E

SP

RIN

KL

ER

VA

LV

E

SE

A

WA

TE

R

MA

IN

LIN

E

PR

INC

IPL

E

OU

TS

IDE

E

NG

INE

R

OO

M



DE

CK

PL

AN

RE

MO

TE

CO

NT

RO

L F

OR

SP

RIN

KL

ER

VA

LV

E.

LO

CK

ED

IN

CL

OS

ED

PO

SIT

ION

RO

OT

VA

LV

E

CO

RR

IDO

RS

PR

INK

LE

R N

OZ

ZL

E

FIR

E V

AL

VE

SH

UT

- O

FF

VA

LV

E

SE

A W

AT

ER

MA

IN L

INE

MA

GA

ZIN

E

SP

RIN

KL

ER

VA

LV

E L

OC

KE

D IN

CL

OS

ED

PO

SIT

ION

CR

EW

’S Q

UA

RT

ER

S

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

DW

AT

ER

TIG

HT

BU

LK

HE

AD

WA

TE

R T

IGH

TB

UL

KH

EA

D

MA

GA

ZIN

E

CR

EW

’SQ

UA

RT

ER

S

CR

EW

’S Q

UA

RT

ER

S

FIR

E V

AL

VE

RO

OT

VA

LV

E

DO

WN

TO

B

AL

LA

ST

TA

NK

SP

RIN

KL

ER

NO

ZZ

LE

SP

RIN

KL

ER

NO

ZZ

LE

SP

RIN

KL

ER

VA

LV

E

RO

OT

VA

LV

E.

LO

CK

ED

IN O

PE

N P

OS

ITIO

N

DO

WN

MA

GA

ZIN

E

AB

OV

E

DA

MA

GE

C

ON

TR

OL

D

EC

K

ISO

LA

TIO

N V

AL

VE



The main seawater system shall in general supply the following: — fixed and portable fire extinguishing systems as described in Sec.10 — driving water for bilge ejectors as described in 400 — water spray systems for storage rooms for explosives — seawater cooling supply to essential machinery and equipment, if relevant — ballast operations, if relevant — pre-wetting systems for vessels with class notation NBC, protection shall be provided accordingly.




305 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The total water capacity of the main seawater line shall be divided between at least:

- 4 main seawater pumps for vessels with a displacement of more than 1500 [tons] - 3 main seawater pumps for vessels with a displacement of between 500 and 1500 [tons] - 2 main seawater pumps for vessels with a displacement of less than 500 [tons]

The main seawater pumps shall be located so that the greatest possible longitudinal separation is achieved. There shall always be one main seawater pump in each engine room.

Guidance note: The total capacity of main seawater pumps for vessels bellow 4000 [tons] (FPB and MVMC type vessels) can be identified based on fire fighting risk assessments. This based on the following guidelines:

- One seawater pump shall be able to provide all needed seawater onboard the vessel. - One seawater pump shall be able to provide seawater for fire fighting in one main

machinery space and additional 4 fire hoses. - Additional rules may apply based on risk assessments.




308 For vessels below 400 tons displacement the additional firepumps may be omitted provided at least two main seawater pumps are provided. Vessels over 400 tons displacement shall have at least 2 indepentently driven firepumps. Portable pumps according to NRAR sec. 10 may be accepted as substitute for fixed pumps.












318 The starter for the main seawater pump shall be located in the same room as the pump with remote starting from the damage control deck within the same watertight main compartment.

319 The main seawater pump shall be arranged with:

- shut-off valve and strainer on the suction side. Bypass arrangement to be decided by NDLO. - overflow/overboard line from the pressure side with choke/orifice and shut-off valve - pressure vacuum gauge on the suction side after the shut-off valve - pressure gauge on the pressure side after the check valve.

Guidance note: The capacity of overflow/overboard line shall be sufficient to prevent the pump becoming warm with no flow of water. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

320 The seawater inlets shall be positioned as far away from the sanitation outlets as possible.

Guidance note: The inlets should be positioned in front of the outlets, or on the other side of the ship. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

321 Water velocity is to be stated for all seawater-systems.

G 400 Bilge systems













411 In relation to transportable bilge pumps the following shall apply: There shall be an overboard connection within each watertight main compartment, apart from the engine room. Submersible bilge pumps and bilge hoses shall be located in damage control stations. One of the bilge ejectors or pumps shall be possible to operate without power supply from the ship.

Guidance note: The submersible bilge pumps may be diesel, electrically, pneumatically or hydraulically driven and must be able to pass through standard emergency hatches with a diameter of 450 [mm] inscribed circle. Petrol driven transportable bilge pumps should be avoided. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---







418 For drainage of storage rooms for explosives the following shall apply: Storage rooms for explosives located below the vessel’s deepest waterline shall be bilged with a submersible bilge pump.

Guidance note: For drainage it can be accepted, upon NDLO approval, to use a transportable submersible bilge pump. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Storage rooms for explosives located above the waterline shall be drained by gravity or by use of submersible bilge pump. Damaged waterline shall be taken into consideration when type of drainage system is selected. A drainage system comprising drainage pipes with shut-off valves shall be connected to storage rooms for explosives for draining sprinkler water overboard. Bilge pipes or other pipes associated with permanently installed systems shall not be permitted to run through storage rooms for explosives. Only pipes which serve these rooms may run into them.

G 500 Drainage





G 600 Oil pollution prevention


G 700 Ballast systems


G 800 Ventilation systems

801 The ventilation system shall be compliant in accordance with the following standards:

- STANAG 4447: Performance Specification for a Ship’s NBC Air Filter - STANAG 4142: Shock Resistance Analysis of Equipment for Surface Ships - ISO 7547: Air Condition and Ventilation of Accommodation Spaces Onboard Ships – Design

Conditions and Basis of Calculations - ISO 8861: Engine Room Ventilation in Diesel Engine Ships – Design Requirements and Basis

of Calculations - AMCA 201: Fan Application Manual - Eurovent 4/5: Method of Testing Air Filters used in General Ventilation - Eurovent 2/4: Sheet Metal Air Ducts – Standard for Fittings - Eurovent 2/3: Sheet Metal Air Ducts – Standard for Dimensions - Eurovent 2/2: Air Leakage Rate in Sheet Metal Air Distribution Systems - DIN 24193: Ducting for Ventilation Equipment, Flanges, Series 2, Flat and Angle Flanges - DIN 24154: Ventilation Equipment, Flanges, Class 1 - BS 5422: Method for Specifying Thermal Insulating Materials on Pipes Ductwork and

Equipment - BS 5970: Code of Practice for Thermal Insulation of Pipework and Equipment - CIBS Commissioning Codes, Series A, Air Distribution - ISO 2372: Mechanical Vibration of Machines with Operating Speeds from 10 to 200 rev/s –

Basis for Specifying Evaluation Standards

802 The following documentation shall be forwarded for approval by NDLO:

- Air intakes and outlets drawings - NBC zones drawings, including NBC citadel, airlocks and cleansing station - Fire zones - Ducting diagrams, including damper locations and damper types - Layout drawing of main ventilation unit(s) and equipment - Type approval certificate for all major units and equipment - Separate arrangement drawings on a scale of 1:20 or 1:25 for fan rooms, including access for

maintenance - Isometric drawings shall be made for all systems as a basis for pressure drop calculations and

noise calculations - Flowcharts - Process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) - Pressure drop - Noise - Heating, cooling and amount of air - FAT, MC, Commissioning, HAT, and SAT procedures and the identified test results - Supplier to identify operational procedures for the ventilation system and fire- and smoke

detection system. This is to identify the arrangement for combined NBC and fire situation, and ventilation/monitoring and control arrangement.

803 The following calculations shall be carried out, preferably using computer programs, in order to check/prove that the installed systems are capable of meeting the requirements in these regulations:

- Pressure drop



- Noise - Heating, cooling and amount of air

A heat balance calculation shall be carried out for all sections/rooms onboard the vessel and shall as a minimum include all weapon and platform system equipment and location of personnel in different modes of operation.

Guidance note: Weapon control cabinets and transmitters for both communication and radar are normally high performance equipment with substantial heat emission. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Calculations and calculation models, systems or methods shall be approved by NDLO. Pressure drop calculations for duct systems shall be carried out both for supply air- and extract air systems. The calculations shall include pressure drop in duct, system loss, loss in inlets/outlets for fans and units, and loss in supply air and extract air fittings. Simultaneity factors for heat loads and the duration for permitted maximum loads shall be evaluated when the design load is decided upon. The calculation of the amount of fresh air and minimum exchange number shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 7547. For machinery spaces ISO 8861 shall be used for calculating the amount of air. In cases where natural ventilation is selected, documentation must be provided to show that this is an acceptable solution.

804 The following design principles apply:

- The system shall be designed for constant NBC protection, i.e. to prevent contamination from penetrating the NBC citadel

- Each main NBC zone shall have systems that are independent of other zones - Extract air from rooms with explosive gases shall be transported directly to outdoor air with a

dedicated fan - Machinery spaces shall be equipped with smoke extraction system direct to outdoor air after

any fire - Air inlets and outlets shall be separated in order to avoid short-circuiting - Air inlets must be placed in such a position as to prevent emissions from engines etc. from

entering the air inlets. Air outlets shall be positioned as high up as possible. The positioning of apertures must be such that the effect of wind and sea spray is minimal.

- The design principles in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 6 Ch.10 shall apply. Levels of NBC protection to be in accordance wit Class 1 or Class 2.

Guidance note: The requirement for Fresh Air Volume (FAV) stated in DNV HSLCNSC does not apply due to NDLO requirements for recirculation in Class 2 NBC level of protection. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Based on type of vessel and operational requirements, special emphasis shall be put on:

- Insulation against shock and vibrations - Noise reduction - Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) / Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Supply of fresh air - Redundancy - Magnetic signature - Identified level of NBC protection.

805 Arrangement drawings, penetrations, Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs), heat calculations and selection of equipment shall be approved by NDLO.



806 In accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.6 Sec.10, fire- resistant bulkhead penetration shall be implemented in such a way that the fire technical properties of the bulkhead or deck are maintained.

807 The air conditioning and ventilation system shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.6 Ch.10 Sec.1 C101 regarding levels of NBC protection. For the class notation a defined level of NBC level of protection class to be defined. Unless a NBC class is identified, NBC Class 2 shall apply.

808 The amount of fresh air/the capacity of the NBC filter station shall be calculated to meet the following comfort requirements:

- Relative humidity to be between 30% and 60 % - Temperature:

o For vessels to be used world wide, the systems shall be dimensioned for the following outdoor conditions: 35ºC, 70% relative humidity with seawater temperature up to 32ºC.

o For vessels only to be used north of the 30 degrees northern latitude, the ventilation system shall be dimensioned for the following outdoor conditions: 28ºC, 80% relative humidity with seawater temperature up to 25ºC.

Guidance note: For dimensioning of the ventilation system, NDLO may approve other seawater temperatures based on area of operation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- Fresh Air Volume (FAV) shall be in accordance with the table and formulas given below.

Guidance note: The table applies for Class 2 level of NBC protection ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

[ ]hmbb

anBAVFAV /3

12 −⋅⋅=

Where: BAV = Breathing Air Volume

o Sleeping = 0.5 [m3/person·h] o Light work = 0.75 [m3/person·h] o Harder work = 1.25 [m3/person·h]

n = Number of persons a = CO2 generation during breathing = 4% b1 = CO2 concentration in outdoor air = 0.03% b2 = Permitted CO2 concentration in % (limit value)

o Combat significant rooms = 0.15% o Resting rooms = 0.15% o Recreation rooms = 0.25% o Workshop where heavy work is performed over short periods of time = 0.5%. See

also the table below.

Guidance note: Example: Fresh Air Volume (FAV) for one person in recreation room:

[ ] [ ]hmhmFAV /36.13%03.0%25.0

%41/75.0 33 =

−⋅⋅=




Necessary amount of fresh air per person based on where to work and where to stay onboard is given in the table below:

Cate-gory

Room type Permitted CO2 percentage, b2

Breathing Air Volume (BAV) [m3/h]

Amount of fresh air [m3/h]

Simultaneity factor

Necessary amount of fresh air perperson [m3/h]

1 Bedrooms and cabins for up to 2 persons

0.15 0.5 16.8 1.0 16.8

2 Bedrooms and cabins for more than 5 persons

0.15 0.5 16.8 0.6 10.0

3 Recreation rooms – messrooms – dayrooms

0.25 0.75 13.6 0.6 8.2

4 Bridge, radio-room, constantly attended rooms, and sick bay

0.15 0.75 25 1.0 25

5

Rooms which are not constantly attended and switchboard rooms

0.5 0.75 6.4 1.0 6.4

6

Service rooms such as compressor room, workshop, galley, cargo compartment and engine room.

0.5 1.25 10.6 1.0 10.6

7 Office, Canteen, Emergency rooms

0.25 0.75 13.6 1.0 13.6

809 The following indoor condition shall apply for the following sections/rooms:

- Accommodation areas (i.e. living and recreation rooms), bridge, combat information centre (CIC), machinery control room (MCR), radio-, crypto-, and instrument room:

o Lower limit: 20ºC o Upper limit: 25ºC

- Machinery space and ventilation room: o Lower limit: 5ºC o Upper limit: 45ºC

- Galley, laundry and workshop: o Lower limit: 20ºC o Upper limit: 30ºC

- Bathroom and toilet: o Lower limit: 25ºC o Upper limit: 35ºC

- Ammunition handling and storage room: o Lower limit: 20ºC o Upper limit: 25ºC

- Storage inside NBC citadel: o Lower limit: 15ºC o Upper limit: 25ºC

- Storage outside NBC citadel: o Lower limit: 5ºC



Guidance note: Wider limits for ammunition handling and storage room may be accepted under the approval of NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: Environmental conditions for systems, equipment and components may be different from the requirements stating indoor conditions. This due to the fact that equipment shall function in case of malfunction in the ventilation system. Rules stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.5 B101 or DNV HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.3 B202 applies for equipment, not for the temperature in different rooms. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

810 The design and construction of natural ventilation shall be based on the following:

- Ventilation openings shall be optimised with regard to size, shape and positioning, and shall provide satisfactory weather protection (cf. air inlets/outlets).

- Possible “dead” zones must be avoided. - Rooms with natural ventilation that have requirements to temperature must be equipped with

heating element and/or cooling element (for re-circulation).

Guidance note: Design and construction for natural ventilation must be based on the following:

- Wind and pressure conditions around the vessel - Thermal conditions due to heat emission from equipment


811 The mechanical ventilation systems shall be centralised, i.e. ventilation units and fans shall be placed in suitable fan rooms in order to protect the equipment and to simplify maintenance.

812 NBC citadel pressure shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.6 Ch.10 Sec.3 A107. For machinery space, in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 6 Ch.10 Sec.3 A700, a citadel pressure of 0.4 [kPa] applies.

Guidance note: A sub-citadel with 0.5 [kPa] is not relevant for RNoN vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

813 The main heating of the ventilation air shall be conducted in the vessels main ventilation unit(s). All air to mechanical ventilated rooms under the unmanned rooms category shall be preheated to a minimum of 5ºC.

Guidance note: Heat emission from equipment shall not be used for preheating in unmanned rooms. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

For accommodation, the minimum temperature shall be adjusted to the specific room/area as described in G807.

Guidance note: In areas/rooms with a high demand for cooling or heating, the use of re-circulation units for cooling or heating should be considered rather than increasing the amount of air. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

All reheating shall as a rule be carried out using electrical heaters. Cooling of air, performed either centrally in cooling units or locally in re-circulation units, shall be carried out using water/glycol. The temperature and strength of the glycol solution shall be adapted to the relevant temperatures. The



cooling unit shall be designed for indirect cooling using an environmentally friendly, approved cooling medium and water/glycol solution as heat transfer medium. The selection of cooling medium shall be approved by NDLO.

Guidance note: The ventilation plant shall normally not be equipped with a humidifier. Humidifying shall only be used in rooms where there is a proven need for this. In these cases local humidifiers shall be used, and no more humidifying than absolutely necessary shall be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

814 All air inlets for mechanical ventilation shall be equipped with two-stage water-separating grill/filter. The water-separating grill shall remove at least 99% of drops larger than 13 micron in diameter, and the filter shall collect and combine drops/salt particles with a diameter of between 2 and 13 micron passing through the water-separating grill. The combined and larger drops are to be drained into drip pans that are common with the grill. Drip pans must be safeguarded against frost using heat cables. The filter shall be able to be regenerated/exchanged without having to remove the water-separating grill. Air outlets shall take the form of ventilation extract hoods, goosenecks, blast grills or some equivalent device. Air inlets/outlets must be safeguarded against heavy seas. Air intakes must be positioned so as to avoid contamination from:

- Extracts from other ventilation systems - Exhaust gas from turbine or diesel engines - Leakage from hazardous areas

815 All fresh air to the NBC/sub-NBC citadel shall pass through a filter station equipped with an NBC filter in accordance with STANAG 4447. The filter station shall be prototype tested and approved for use onboard naval vessels. The minimum temperature for air passing through the NBC filters shall be +5ºC, and the relative humidity shall not exceed 80%.

Guidance note: If specified by NDLO, dummy filters may be used instead of NBC filters. Where used, these dummy filters shall have pressure drop/air volume equivalent to the NBC filters. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

816 Air conditioning systems serving living quarters, technical rooms, medical centre, bridge etc. shall be equipped with a fine-meshed filter, minimum class EU7. Air conditioning systems for other types of room shall be equipped with minimum filter class EU5. Local re-circulation units (of the “fan coil” type) shall be equipped with filter of minimum class EU3 (cf. Eurovent 4/5 for filter classes/filter requirements). Air conditioning systems using return air with unpleasant smell shall be equipped with an odour filter of an approved/proven type.

817 Ventilation equipment shall be delivered in shockproof design in accordance with STANAG 4142 or BV 043/044.



Guidance note: This is relevant for vessels with shock requirements. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

For all essential equipment a shock testing type certificate or calculations for shockproof design shall be provided. Rotating equipment shall in addition be equipped with vibration dampers and flexible connections.

Guidance note: Vibration and shock dampers shall limit vertical and horizontal movement within acceptable limits, i.e. to prevent flexible connections from being damaged. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

818 The amount of supply air shall as a minimum be four air exchanges per hour. For the sick bay, the amount of supply air shall as a minimum be six exchanges per hour. For the galley, the amount of supply air shall as a minimum be 20 exchanges per hour. Rooms containing explosive gases shall have an exchange number of at least 12. Mechanical extracts shall as a minimum requirement meet the following exchange numbers:

- Galley: 30 exchanges per hour - Toilet and laundry: 15 exchanges per hour - Washing and shower room: 12 exchanges per hour - Paintstore: 12 exchanges per hour

819 The principle of displacement ventilation shall apply.

Guidance note: The principle of displacement ventilation ensures early detection of smoke (or gas) and acceptable working comfort as well as a high ventilation/cooling effect. Where displacement ventilation cannot be used due to lack of space, agitating ventilation shall be used, particularly in cabins, offices etc. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

820 The ventilation systems shall be arranged for individual temperature control in each room. Electrical heaters shall be controlled individually by using room thermostats.

821 The bridge shall be equipped with a separate de-frosting system to avoid condensation on the windows.

Guidance note: As a design basis an air flow rate of 40 [m3/h] for each window shall be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

822 At least one relief valve per main zone shall be pneumatically operated to control the overpressure. In case of loss of the pilot air pressure, the valve shall open mechanically at a pressure of 600 [Pa] inside the NBC citadel.

823 Air locks shall be arranged in connection with all entrance doors in the NBC citadel and sub-NBC citadel to ensure that personnel can leave/enter the citadel without loss of overpressure. A one-way valve shall ensure that an air lock is filled with air from the NBC citadel and is pressurised at the same pressure inside the NBC citadel.

Guidance note: When the entrance door is opened, the one-way valve provides a flow of air out from the gas citadel, thus safeguarding against intrusion of outdoor air which could be contaminated. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



Entrance doors shall open in two stages to obtain pressure equalising. All doors in the cleansing station shall open outwards to the weatherdeck.

824 The ventilation system for the galley shall include a mixing unit (for mixing fresh air and returned air), filter, odour filter, cooling coil and possibly a preheating coil, and a fan. The galley shall be supplied with air from adjacent messrooms via an overflow grill (and fire damper). The galley shall have a slight under pressure in relation to adjacent rooms, in order to prevent dispersion of odours. Stoves/deep fat fryers etc. shall be equipped with an extractor hood with washable grease filters and an integrated fire extinguishing system. Air drawn into the hood shall be evacuated directly to outdoor air via a relief valve. Ref. guidelines in NFPA 96.

825 For laundries the extract channel shall be equipped with fluff filters.

826 For vessels equipped with a sick bay, all supplied air shall be evacuated directly to outdoor air using a separate fan via a relief valve. The air is drawn out partly via the toilet and partly directly from the room itself.

827 Areas classified as EX zones shall have EX approved ventilation equipment.

Guidance note: To avoid EX approved equipment, ventilation can be placed outside the EX zone. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Ventilation of storage rooms for explosives shall be ventilated with a controlled environment. The ammunition depot shall be considered to be a part of the main gas citadel.

Guidance note: For vessels with large ammunition depots (e.g. frigates), and possibly several of them, a re-circulation system may be used. The system(s) heat or cool the air and distribute the correct amount of air to the room(s). For storage rooms for explosives, fresh air is supplied from the vessels ventilation system and the temperature is maintained by locally placed electric heaters and fan-cools installed in the room. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

For rooms exposed to gasses due to weapon firing, the extracted air shall be fed directly to outdoor air via relief valve(s). These rooms shall have a maximum overpressure of 400 [Pa] and a minimum overpressure of 250 [Pa]. For ventilation of battery rooms, cabinets and cases, NVE’s regulations for electrical systems, Naval Installations (FEAM) Paragraph 1453, shall apply.

828 For pressurised machinery space the following requirements shall apply:

- Pressurised machinery space shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.6 Ch.10 Sec.3 A700. A citadel pressure of 400 [Pa] shall apply.

- The temperature in the machinery space shall not be higher than 55ºC. Equipment shall be designed according to the ambient conditions defined in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.5 B400 and Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.9 D200.

- The distribution of air from the re-circulation unit must be sufficient to avoid hot zones in the machinery space.

- The re-circulation unit(s) or extract fans shall be possible to use for smoke extraction/CO2-extraction after a fire.



- Extract from the engine enclosure shall be conducted by an extract fan and a relief valve direct to outdoor air.

- The engine’s combustion air is supplied using separate ducts and fans. - Heat emission from machinery space shall be calculated according to ISO 8861. - Separate pump rooms shall be ventilated as for machinery spaces.

Independently of the selected system for the engine room etc., the overpressure shall be below the pressure in the NBC citadel and shall be able to be measured/read from the engine control room.

829 For non-pressurised machinery space the following ventilation requirements apply:

- Combustion air to engines shall be supplied naturally or by means of dedicated fans. - The demand for ventilation air shall be calculated according to ISO 8861. - Ventilation air shall be supplied/distributed to the engine room using at least two fans with

two-speed engines. One of the fans must be reversible for use as a smoke extractor (CO2-extractor).

830 Rooms outside the NBC citadel shall be ventilated mechanically or naturally according to guidelines stated above, with the exception of NBC protection and defined overpressure and underpressure.

831 It shall be possible to control all air handling units and fans both locally and centrally (using the monitoring and control system). The control of the ventilation system shall be independent of other systems, with the exception of emergency stop.

Guidance note: The emergency stop may be linked to the vessels smoke-and fire detection system, but in this case a strategy for combined NBC threats and fire/smoke shall be identified. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

832 The NBC ventilation control system shall as a minimum have the following functions:

- Local/Remote operation alternatives - Stop/start of fans - Fan status/alarm - Automatic/standby for fans in parallel - Monitoring of air temperature after main units. - Interfase to the IMPS to provide essential data for NBC protection (citadel pressure, pressure

drops across filters and operation of air handling units).

833 The following field instrumentation shall as a minimum be included:

- Indicator for pressure drop across filters - Thermometer showing the temperature after main units.

834 The following safety functions for ventilation systems shall apply:

- All engines shall be equipped with thermistors in the windings which disconnect at overload - Alarm for loss of overpressure in NBC citadel - Alarm for pressure drop over NBC filter - All electrical heating coils are to be interlocked with their respective fan motors so that the

power supply to the coils is automatically cut off when the fans stop - All supply air fans serving electrical heating coils shall be supplied with a delayed stop

function to secure cool-down of the coils - All electrical heating coils shall be equipped with a thermostat for fire and superheating. Fire

thermostats cut off the current to fan and coil and sound an alarm. They are reset manually. The superheating thermostat cuts off the current to the coil and is reset automatically.



- Coils for hot water heating shall be of the constant flow type. The coil shall be protected against frost.

- Cooling and heating coils for water shall be controlled with a three-way valve - Electrical heating coils for NBC filter stations shall be automatically controlled - Fire dampers and watertight dampers shall, if nothing else is stated, be pneumatically operated

and function according to the fail-to-safety principle - All fire dampers shall close when activated via a safety fuse. When one damper is closed due

to an activated fuse, the remaining dampers in the same zone shall also close. - Terminal switch for indication of closed damper shall be included. - It shall be possible to activate for fire dampers for galley ventilation systems locally from the

galley.

835 Both centrifugal and axial fans may be used. Axial fans shall be direct driven, while centrifugal fans may be belt driven or direct driven. Direct driven fans are to be preferred where possible. Fan data shall be documented. Axial fans with adjustable impeller blade angle at standstill and centrifugal fans with backward-tilting vanes are to be preferred. The motor shall be dimensioned for maximum power requirements plus 10%. The fans shall be designed both for continuous and intermittent operation. Fan wheels shall be balanced statically and dynamically. The maximum permitted bearing vibration is 7 [mm/s] (RMS), cf. ISO 2372, class 4B. The fan’s working setpoint shall be as close to maximum efficiency as possible. Working setpoint with efficiency below 65% for axial fans and 70% for centrifugal fans shall be subject to approval by NDLO. In addition a suitable working setpoint shall be selected in order to avoid surge. Fans must be delivered in a galvanised finish, aluminium or GRP, depending on the requirements for weight-reducing measures.

836 The NBC filter station shall be of a tested and proven type, and the number of NBC filters shall be in compliance with the requirements for fresh air.

Guidance note: A complete NBC filter station will consist of the following main components:

- Air inlet - Shock valve - Air filter - Electrical heating coil - Filter housing with NBC filters - Check valve(s) - Gas-tight and watertight rapid block valve with electrical or pneumatic actuator - Orifice meter for measurement of the amount of air - High pressure fan

---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- The shock valve (for vessels with shock requirements) shall protect equipment downstream of the valve in the event of pressure waves from outside. The rapid block valve shall block in the event of air supply failure across the filters, while check valves shall ensure that the air from the gas citadel is not evacuated through the filter station when the fans shut down or when filters are replaced.

Guidance note: For weight considerations, a filter station made of aluminium or some equivalent light material is preferred. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

837 For the main ventilation unit(s) the following rules shall apply:

- The housing shall consist of a framework, inner and outer cladding with insulation between, at least 25 [mm] thick.



- The functional components shall be mounted in the framework. - Permitted leakage for a system built together using sections shall not exceed the CEN norm

for leakage through system housing, leakage class A. - The frame/skid or foundation shall be equipped with lifting arrangements for bringing the

equipment onboard. - Dampers which form an integral part of the system shall as a minimum requirement comply

with tightness class T4 in the CEN norm for air flow leakage. - Operation of dampers in systems shall be carried out from outside the system. - Filters shall be mounted on a rail arrangement in order to ease replacement. Inspection hatches

shall be hinged. - Pipe sleeves for heating and cooling coils in system housing shall be sealed. - The operating side of the system housing shall be equipped with a removable hatch (panel) in

order to facilitate access to the coils' manifold and pipe bends, and for ease of dismantling the coils.

- It shall be possible to remove all hatches after the pipes have been dismantled. - It must be possible to vent coils from outside the system housing. - A drip tray with water lock shall be mounted beneath the cooling coils. - Drainage from water lock shall not cause pressure loss in the NBC citadel. - For cooling coils, where there is a risk of water entrainment, a demister pad shall be installed. - The manual reset button for fire thermostat shall be easy accessible without the need to use

tools. - The heating elements should be mounted in such a way that they can easily be extracted for

inspection, maintenance or replacement without having to extract the complete coil. - The fan part of the system shall be equipped with a hinged inspection hatch for easy access to

motor/belts. - Fans with motors shall be mounted on vibration/shock dampers and have flexible duct

connection on the outlet side. - An arrangement for simple belt tightening shall be included. - System housing shall be made of pre-galvanised sheet steel, or alternatively of aluminium to

save weight. - The rack for the heating coils shall be made of the same materials as for the system housing,

while rack for cooling coils and drip pan shall be made of acid-proof stainless steel. - Materials which can create galvanic corrosion must be isolated from one another. - Materials in cooling and heating coils shall be produced with copper tubes and copper fins.

Guidance note: The main ventilation unit(s) is defined to be a number of functional components mounted on a common frame. The number of functional components depends on service area, but will normally be:

- Mixing unit with damper for mixing fresh air and return air - Shutdown damper - Filter - Odour filter - Heating coil - Cooling coil - Fan(s) - Air distribution chamber


838 The cooling unit shall cool fresh water for the air conditioning system to be able to meet the specified temperatures. The cooling unit shall be positioned outside the NBC citadel. Only smaller amounts of gas are permitted to be stored in the NBC citadel, and shall be subject to approval by NDLO. The cooling unit shall be dimensioned for indirect cooling with an environmentally friendly cooling medium and water/glycol mixture as heat transfer medium.

Guidance note: The cooling unit will normally consist of the following main components:



- Compressor with motor - Condenser including automatic water valve for controlling the condensation pressure.

The condenser shall be cooled by seawater. - Heat exchanger (chiller) - Necessary cooling equipment such as:

o Dry filters with stop valves, solenoid valve, expansion valve, sight glass and filling valve

o Control panel containing high-pressure and low-pressure pressure switch, oil pressure switch and a manometer for high pressure/low pressure and oil pressure

o Junction box including cabling for frost thermostat, flow switch, solenoid valve for fluid transfer, solenoid valve for capacity control, high-pressure and low-pressure pressure switch, oil pressure alarm and thermistor for electrical motor.

o Capacity control switch with neutral zone for mounting in the cold water circuit

o Two cold water pumps, one spare ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The cooling machine shall be driven directly by the electric motor. Two separate units shall be installed, each with a capacity of 60% of total cooling requirement. Access shall be provided for repair and maintenance of all components and valves.

839 In addition to the applicable standards stated in G801, the following requirements apply for ducts:

- Ducts with details shall be in accordance with Eurovent 2/3 for ducts and Eurovent 2/4 for details.

Guidance note: For weight optimised systems, ducts made of other materials than Eurovent 2/3 for ducts and Eurovent 2/4 for details may be used subject to approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- All ducts shall be designed for defined air velocities and maximum operating pressure. Ducts

shall be dimensioned for the possibility of fans running against closed dampers. - Reinforcement of sheet steel ducts shall be according to DW 142, while thick-plated ducts

shall be reinforced according to SMACNA. - Torsion and deformation of ducts is not acceptable. - Different materials shall be isolated from one another to prevent galvanic corrosion. - Duct mounting details shall be in accordance with DW 142 and NS 3421. The joining system

used for ducts shall be well tested and satisfy the relevant pressure class. - Duct suspensions shall be arranged so as to avoid movement and torsion, and shall be

dimensioned to absorb loads such as mechanical loads, wind loads and loads caused be the movements of the vessel at sea.

- Suspensions shall not be welded to the ducts. The weight of duct-mounted equipment such as heating coils shall not be borne by the ducts.

- Thermal bridges shall be avoided for ducts that are insulated externally. - All details, ducts and equipment shall be free of dirt before mounting. Covers/protection on

equipment shall be kept in place as long as possible in the installation phase. Terminal caps/dust protection shall be used during mounting to prevent the duct system from becoming dirty.

- At least 10% of the duct system complete with duct-mounted equipment shall be pressure tested after installation. The testing shall be carried out in accordance with Eurovent 2/2.

- The duct systems shall as a minimum requirement satisfy tightness class B. Ducts which are to be insulated externally shall be pressure tested prior to insulation.

- Sound traps are to be considered an integral part of the duct system, and shall be mounted to the extent necessary to meet specified sound requirements.

- Where ducts penetrate shielded rooms EMI filters shall be installed.



840 Fire dampers with penetrations shall be installed in accordance with DNV regulations for all fire zones. Fire dampers shall be approved by NDLO. Fire dampers shall, if nothing else is stated, be made of acid-proof stainless steel, UNS S31600/S31603. The actuator of the fire damper shall have sufficient torque to open or close the damper at a minimum differential pressure of 2000 [Pa] over the damper. In addition the actuators shall have an “end” torque at least 40% higher than required by the damper.

841 Shutdown dampers shall be installed in ventilation inlets/outlets where fire dampers are not required.

Guidance note: This in order to insulate equipment or areas, and in ducts or on fans to prevent back-flow and counter rotation on standby fans, i.e. on both sides of the fans. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The dampers shall comply with class T4 in the CEN standard for air flow leakage. Spring-controlled overpressure protection dampers shall substitute automatically operated shutdown dampers on outlets from gas citadel/sub NBC citadel. Overpressure protection dampers shall be used to obtain the correct overpressure. Shutdown-/overpressure protection dampers shall be made of the same material as the duct system in which they are installed.

842 Balancing dampers shall be for manual operation and shall be able to be locked at any blade angle from 0 – 90 [degrees]. Balancing dampers shall be used where necessary to simplify adjustment of the systems. The dampers shall be positioned where they are easily accessible and shall have the same material quality and thickness as the duct system in which they are installed.

843 Duct-mounted heating/cooling coils shall be mounted in duct (casing) in the same material and with at least the same thickness as the duct system in which they are installed. Cooling coils shall be equipped with a drip pan made of acid-proof stainless steel. If there is a risk of water entrainment, a demister shall be included. For system mounted coils, refer to the section dealing with systems. Coils for water or steam as heating/cooling medium shall have manifold, pipes and ribs made of copper.

Guidance note: Elements of stainless steel with high surface finish are preferred for electrical heating coils. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

844 All supply and extract air fittings shall be approved by NDLO. The fittings shall be equipped with dampers for adjusting the amount of air. The fittings shall preferably be made of pre-galvanised plate steel or aluminium. Supply and extract air fittings for larger amounts of air, shall be equipped with a plenum box.

Guidance note: Plenum box is relevant for accommodation and public rooms. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

845 The following additional requirements shall apply regarding requirements to redundancy:

- Space for one set of NBC standard filter shall be provided in the room where the NBC filters for the system are installed.



- Smaller vessels equipped with only one air conditioning system shall be equipped with two (i.e. 2 x) 50% fans in the main ventilation unit complete with block dampers. Dampers downstream of the fans shall be automatic, while dampers upstream of the fans shall be manual.

- Critical parts of the ventilation system shall be equipped with redundancy based on fail-to-safety analyses.

846 The following verification process shall apply: Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) procedures and results shall be forwarded to NDLO for information. The supplier shall carry out the mechanical completion (MC) and commissioning (setting to work) of the complete ventilation system for the vessel. Both MC and commissioning procedures shall be forwarded for approval by NDLO. Harbour Acceptance Test (HAT) and Sea Acceptance Test (SAT) procedures shall be forwarded to NDLO for approval. NDLO shall approve all verification from MC, commissioning and HAT and SAT.

847 Testing shall be carried out in accordance with the Charter Institution of Building Services (CIBS), Commissioning Codes, Series A. In addition the following shall apply:

- Testing of pressures: A complete balancing and testing of specified overpressure in gas citadel/sub gas citadel shall be carried out.

- Water system (heating and cooling): Regulation of water system for correct amount shall be carried out as described for the air side.

- Cooling units: Start-up of cooling machines/cooling units is carried out according to procedure worked out by the vendor. All safety functions and values of settings shall be tested/documented.

- Functionality testing: Functionality testing of the air conditioning system shall be carried out. A test shall also be performed to show that the imposed functional requirements have been met. The functionality test shall as a minimum include:

o Temperature at design load or agreed upon loads o Amounts of air (initial regulation report/random samples) o Air velocity (draught) o Air transfer (smell, contamination) between rooms (air balance) o Concentration of carbon dioxide CO2 (optional) o Functionality test of discharge for special contaminants o Test of regulating functions and automation o Sound level o Availably space for inspection and maintenance.

Temperature registration over a period of time shall be carried out in specific rooms to check the functioning of the automatic regulation.

G 900 Sanitary Systems

901 Water traps shall be easy to dismantle. Water traps must be designed with particular consideration given to the fact that they shall not be emptied due to overpressure internally due to NBC citadel system pressure.

902 The hot water system should be set up as a loop with a circulation pump. Outlets shall be arranged for cold and hot water in machinery space.

903 For vessels with a fresh water generator, the cold water system shall include a steriliser and a mineral admixture system. This shall be located between a hydrophore tank and consumer.



904 The sewage system shall be of the vacuum type. Vessels shall be equipped with storage tank(s) for black water and storage tank(s) for grey water, which can be emptied to sea or pumped to a recipient station on land. The flange for the connecting unit shall be according to STANAG 4167. There shall be facilities for flushing through of the pipes from a storage tank to a deck.

Guidance note: The system covers sewage, waste from sick bays and other waste if this is mixed with any of the above. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

G 1000 Helicopter Fuelling System

1001 The following references shall apply for the helicopter fuelling system:

- MIL-DTL-5624U: Turbine fuel, aviation, grade JP-5. - STANAG 3149: Minimum Quality Surveillance for Petroleum Products - STANAG 3583: Standards for accuracy for differential pressure gauges for aviation fuel

filters and filter separators - STANAG 3681: Criteria for pressure fuelling of aircraft - STANAG 3682: Electrical safety connection procedures for aviation fuel handling and

dispensing equipment. - STANAG 3967: Design and performance requirements for aviation fuel filter separator

vessels and coalecer and separator elements. - ASCC 11/3: Air Standardisation Agreement for Aircraft Fuelling - ASCC 11/6: Air Standardisation Agreement for Aircraft Defuelling - ATP 16(D)/MTP 16(D): Replenishment at sea.

1002 The tanks with vent pipes and sounding should be designed in accordance with the rules given for fuel oil tanks. The location and size of the tanks on board shall be approved by NDLO. Storage and service tanks shall have high and low suction. All tanks apart from an observation tank shall be designed with suction to a strip pump from the lowest point of the tank. The replenishment pipes in tanks shall be lead to the lower part of the tank to avoid occurrence of foam.

Guidance note: The figure below gives a principal drawing of a helicopter fuelling system. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



OVERBOAR

OUTLET

TO DECK (WITH ALL

VENT PIPES

FIGURE 3.2 15/1

PRINCIPLE DRAWING

OVER FUEL BUNKER

SYSTEM

FOR

CONTROL FROM OPERATING ROOM

TAPPING

TO

BARREL

SIGHT

GLASS

VALVE

VALVE

VALVE

TRANSFER

PUMP

VALVE

PUMP

BEARING

TANK

DRAINING

TANK

CONNECTION

STRIPPING PUMP

OBSERVAT-

ION TANK

VALVE

HELICOPTER DECK

PUMP

FLUSH GULLEY

WITH LID

SLANGE

TEST

VALVE

OVERFLOW

PIPE

SERVICE TANK

RETURN

PIPE

DRAINING

pOINT

CONTROL FROM OPERATING ROOM

STORAGE

TANK

HOLE



1003 Storage tanks shall incline towards the draining point. Larger tanks shall be equipped with a baffle plate.

1004 The bottom of service tanks shall incline towards a draining point. A service tank shall be designed with an overflow pipe with an outlet to a drain tank. Overflow pipes shall be arranged so that the contents of a drain tank cannot flow back to service tanks.

1005 All pipelines, valves and components in the fuel system shall be earthed. The fluid speed in pipelines shall not exceed 4 [m/s].

1006 The following filtration shall as a minimum be included in the helicopter fuel system:

- Coarse strainers shall be mounted on replenishment lines to storage tanks. - A coarse strainer shall be mounted at an intake to a transfer and service pump. - A water separator filter shall contain two stages: coalescer elements and a water separator. The

coalescer elements shall be replaceable. - A water separator shall have a level glass and facilities for deaeration and drainage to a drain

tank. - An absorption filter shall be mounted on a helicopter deck as close as possible to the

replenishment point, also applies for helicopter in-flight replenishment (HIFR).

1007 Transfer and service pumps shall be positioned close to service tank and arranged so that they are redundant. Transfer and service pumps shall have a safety valve with outlets back to the tank the pump takes suction from. A temperature monitor shall be arranged that stops pumps in the event of overheating. Fuel pumps shall be dimensioned to withstand pressure surges that arise if valves on the pump’s pressure side are shut off momentarily. The capacity and pressure of pumps shall be in accordance with STANAG 3681 Criteria for pressure fuelling of aircraft.

1008 Material selection in helicopter fuelling systems shall be in accordance with:

- STANAG 3149: Minimum Quality Surveillance for Petroleum Products - STANAG 3967: Design and performance requirements for aviation fuel filter separator

vessels and coalecer and separator elements.

1009 It shall be ensured that the volume meter is easily visible from the control valve for helicopter fuelling. Helicopter fuelling tanks shall be equipped with an alarm for high fluid level, set at:

- 95% of the storage tank’s capacity - 95% of the drainage tank’s capacity - or at approx. 2 min. before a full tank during maximum replenishment

1010 The following instrumentation shall be included in the helicopter fuelling system:



- Pressure gauges at filter and pump intakes and outlets. - Differential pressure gauge at water separator filter - Level gauges at service, drain and storage tanks. - Indication for every 200 [dm3] for a service tank.

Tanks mounted lower than the level of the pump room shall in addition be designed with remote reading instruments for the fluid level. Service tanks shall be equipped with an alarm for high and low level. Service and transfer pumps shall be arranged for automatic stop in the event of high and low level.

1011 The pumps shall be operated from a local control panel and a control panel in a helicopter hangar or next to a helicopter deck. The control panel shall be provided with level readings and alarm indications. A local control panel shall have priority with regard to operation of pumps.

H Sea Chests and Separate Seawater Inlets

H 100 Sea chests

101 The volume of the suction chamber shall be sufficient for 30 seconds of maximum consumption. Connections, valves and accessories mounted on the top of the sea chest (internal bottom) and connections, valves and accessories mounted on to thick-walled through pipe socket in the top of the sea chest shall be insulated as shown in KNMS S-0180. Anodes with imbedded supporting bars shall be welded to the sea chest. Anodes must not be welded to tank walls adjacent to fuel tanks. There shall be easy access for cleaning and replacement of anodes. Detailed arrangement drawings of sea chests shall be approved by NDLO.

102 Air pipes from the sea chest shall be easily accessible for internal inspection and maintenance.

103 It shall be possible to flush the sea chest from the seawater main.

104 It shall be possible to return cooling water from the diesel engines to the sea chest in order to remove sludge ice.

105 Materials in air pipes from the sea chest shall be CuNi 90/10.

H 200 Separate seawater inlets

201 The principle for the design of separate seawater inlets shall be in accordance with NS 2686, and the pipe socket’s dimensions, reinforcement and frame ribs shall be adapted to the vessel’s requirements, cf. KNMS S-0180. It shall be possible to clean the coarse filter without putting the system out of action. A suitable double filter or a simplex filter with a bypass line and the necessary shut-off valves shall be used. The material qualities used in coarse and fine filters shall be as follows: Filter housing: Copper nickel G-CuNi10 1) DIN 17658 Aluminium bronze G-CuAll0Ni 1) DIN 1714 Red brass G-CuSnl0Zn 1) DIN 1705 or materials with equivalent corrosion qualities.



Filter: Copper nickel CuNil0Fe DIN 17664 Copper nickel CuNi30Fe DIN 17664 Aluminium bronze CuAln0Ni DIN 17665 NiCu alloys DIN 17743

Guidance note: 1) The letter G indicates the casting method (sand-casting). Other casting methods are

permitted. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Other filter parts in contact with seawater shall be made of materials with equivalent corrosion qualities. The use of any materials other than the types stated here shall be approved by NDLO in each case.

I Thermal Insulation

I 100 General

101 All pipes where condensation, both internal and external, can be expected shall be insulated.

Guidance note: Each individual system’s design requirements dictate the thermal insulation requirements for that system. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 Pipes, connections, valves and accessories on weather deck, cooling water pipes for machinery, drains from safety valves and warm pipes in the funnel, shall not be insulated.

Guidance note: Exceptions to this requirement may be accepted under the approval of NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 Non-insulated pipes, connections, valves and accessories that have operating temperatures above 60ºC shall be shielded against contact at relevant places.

104 All pipes and fittings with operating temperatures above 200ºC shall be insulated against contact with fuel, oil, hydraulic fluids, and other combustible media. The insulation shall be shielded against the absorption of fuel, oil, and hydraulic fluids. This shall also apply to flange connections and bellows units.

105 On flange connections, valves and accessories with operating temperatures below 200ºC, insulation shall be used where this is necessary to keep the ambient temperature within acceptable levels.

I 200 Types of insulation

201 The following classification of insulation material types and qualities shall apply:



Guidance note: 1) May be replaced with approved injection insulation 2) With plate sheathing, Rockwool no. 333 with volume weight 70 [kg/m3] or MinWool

no. 3030 may be used. 3) Plate sheathing is recommended when the surface temperature on the pipes exceeds 220ºC ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 Pipes shall be insulated with the insulation type and thickness stated in the following table:

Type Insulation material: Quality description Outer Layer 3)

I

Mat, covered Mineral wool Minimum density: 35 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 120ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.038 [W/mK]

II

Uncovered prefabricated pipe insulation Mineral wool Minimum density: 55 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 400ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.038 [W/mK]

III

Mat, warm galvanised “chicken net” Mineral wool Minimum density: 100 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 600ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.037 [W/mK]

Glass fibre weave or material with equivalent properties

IV Prefabricated insulation made from calcium silicate, asbestos-free Minimum temperature tolerance: 600ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +200ºC: 0.07 [W/mK]

V Closest to the pipe: 20 – 40 [mm] insulation of type IV or mat of type III. On the outside: Prefabricated insulation of type II

Glass fibre weave or material of equivalent properties

VI

Mineral wool mat, covered by galvanized wire netting Minimum density: 100 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 600ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.037 [W/mK]

Galvanized steel, 0.5 [mm]

VII

Mineral wool plate 1) 2) Minimum density: 150 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 120ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.037 [W/mK] (A-60 insulation)

Glass fibre weave or material of equivalent properties

VIII

Mattresses sewn from glass fibre weave and filled with mineral wool, equipped with hooks Density: 100 [kg/m3] Minimum temperature tolerance: 550ºC Maximum heat conductivity at +10ºC: 0.037 [W/mK] Thickness of 50 [mm] for temperatures below 350ºC Thickness of 75 [mm] for temperatures between 350ºC and 525ºC



Outer pipe diameter [mm]

≤ 20ºC 1) ≤ 100ºC ≤ 200ºC ≤ 350ºC ≤ 450ºC ≤ 525ºC

12 14 15 17.2

II-15 II-15 II-20 II-40 IV-50 IV-50

20 21.3 22 25 26.9 28 30 33.7 35

II-30 II-50 IV-60 IV-70

38 42 42.4 48.3

II-20

IV-80

57 60.3 76.1

II-20

II-60 IV-80

V-100

88.9 101.6 108 114.3 133 139.7

II-40

V-100

V-120

159 168.3 193.7 219.1 267 273 323.9

II-30

II-30 II-80

355.6 368 406.4 419

II-40 II-40

II-50

II-100

V-120

V-140

Guidance note: 1) The outer layer shall be diffusion-proof. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: The table is based on the fact that the surface temperature of the insulation should be approximately 55ºC at an ambient temperature of 30ºC. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: In cases where compact arrangements and special demands to weight make it difficult to comply with these requirements, thinner insulation may be used subject to approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

203 Tanks and service tanks shall be insulated according to the following table:



Temperature area

Use < 100ºC < 220ºC ≤ 350ºC ≤ 525ºC Hot containers I-30 IV or VI-50 IV or VI-90 IV or VI-140 Service tanks VII-50

Guidance note: The table is based on the fact that the surface temperature of the insulation should be approximately 55ºC at an ambient temperature of 30ºC. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: In cases where compact arrangements and special demands to weight make it difficult to comply with these requirements, thinner insulation may be used subject to approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

204 Built-in pipes in the interior shall be insulated with a 20 [mm] covered mat of type I without an outer layer (glass-fibre screen). The mat shall be fastened with hot dip galvanised steel wire.

205 Connections, valves and accessories with operating temperatures of 220 - 525ºC shall be insulated with type VIII mattresses. For temperatures > 525ºC, a 75 [mm] wire mesh mat of type VI covered with galvanised steel plating shall be used.

206 Exhaust pipes shall be insulated from engine, gas turbine or boiler to deck or platform in chimney. At places of contact hazard, the exhaust pipe shall be insulated to a height of 2 [m] above deck or platform in chimney.

207 Exhaust and steam pipes shall be insulated according to the following table.

Exhaust and steam system Boilers and diesel engines Gas turbines

External pipe Diameter [mm]

Operational temperature ≤ 350°C




88.9 - 219.1 244.5 - 419 > 419

II-40 II-50 IV or VI-50

II-40 II-50 IV or VI-70

IV or VI-40 IV or VI-50 IV or VI-70

VI-100 1) VI-150 2)

Guidance note: 1) Situated outside the engine room. 2) Situated inside the engine room. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: The table is based on the fact that the surface temperature of the insulation should be approximately 55ºC at an ambient temperature of 30ºC. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

208 Internal branch pipes and manifolds on engine, gas turbine and boiler shall be insulated as prescribed by the manufacturer. Insulation shall be free of asbestos.

209 All insulational materials shall be free of components suspected of causing occupational diseases. The insulation material shall fulfill requirements to non-combustible material in accordance with SOLAS 1960.



210 The following documentations shall be submitted for insulation materials used:

- Material certificates and/or type approval by a recognised society. - Base material - Design - Volume weight - Format - Application temperature - Coefficient of thermal conductivity - Flameproof properties - Oil resistance and repellence of oil and dirt.

211 The outer layer of insulation material shall withstand normal use. After treatment, the outer layer shall have a sealed surface which repels dirt and oil. The surface can be coated with a protective layer if the material itself does not have the necessary dirt and oil-repellant properties.

212 It must be possible to join the insulation material by seaming, gluing or riveting.

213 The outer layer of insulation shall be flameproof and shall not be affected by the temperature the insulation is specified to withstand.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.7: Machinery, Propulsion and Positioning Page 121


Section 7 Machinery, Propulsion and Positioning This section covers machinery installations, systems and equipment for propulsion and auxiliary systems. Requirements for piping systems, including ventilation, with relevance for machinery and propulsion systems are covered by Section 6. Electric power generation and transfer equipment and systems are dealt with in Section 8. Control and monitoring of machinery, propulsion and positioning systems are covered by Section 9. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0.


A 100 General

101 All machinery and machinery components shall be suited to their specified tasks with regard to function, capacity, strength, reliability and maintenance-friendliness.

Guidance note: For vessels with requirements regarding magnetic signature, special considerations for material qualities must be taken into account. The selection of materials for machinery, propulsion positioning equipment and systems for such vessels shall be approved by the Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation (NDLO). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The shipyard is responsible for ensuring that installed machinery, propulsion and positioning systems and components, manufactured in-house or supplied by subcontractors, conform to the requirements stated in these rules. Shipyard and suppliers of components and systems shall, in accordance with the requirements stated in Section 0, be compliant to a defined quality assurance certificate and deliver a quality assurance management plan to NDLO for approval.

102 Naval surface vessels will be required to operate under extreme sea conditions. The relative movements and forces imposed on machinery and components including shafting appearing as a result of large hull deflections or vessel movement in sea, shall be acceptable to the machinery. This shall be confirmed for the actual project. NDLO reserves the right to request such documentation submitted.

Guidance note: For other vessels than monohull, minimum environmental conditions identified in DNV High Speed, Light and Naval Surface Craft (HSLCNSC) to be used unless model testing or scale testing shows more extreme environmental conditions both statically and dynamically. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 Unless stated otherwise, all machinery, propulsion and positioning equipment on board shall use fuels and lubricants according to the following standards:

- STANAG 1414: Guidelines to ensure that contractors design and supply new equipment capable of using NATO standardised lubricants.

- STANAG 1135: Interchangeability of fuels, lubricants and associated products used by the armed forces of the North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO).

- Royal Norwegian Navy’s POL catalogue FS/7610-1700 - Norwegian trade standard 2250, Marine Gas Oil



A 200 Documentation

201 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The following additional documentation shall be submitted for approval by NDLO:

- Based on requested operational profile, supplier to provide Mean time to Overhaul (MTO) interval for propulsion train and auxiliary systems.

- Operational profile and details on operational requirement such as: - minimum transient rate for propulsion machinery start up - minimum acceleration rates from idle to full power - percentage of operation time on different part loads

- Supplier to provide maintenance information (both work descriptions and spare part proposal) based on operational profile.

- Procedures and plans for installation and dismantling of all major machinery space equipment. - Supplier to provide Failure Mode, Effect and Criticality Analysis (FMECA), including

reliability analysis, for complete propulsion train. - Drawings which identify lifting lugs on all equipment in the machinery space and

bulkhead/beam location of lifting lugs/equipment. - List of essential machinery components that are to be protected from shock loads (if applicable),

see G101. - Documentation that essential components and systems can withstand waterborn shock waves (if

applicable), see G103. - Verification standards and acceptance criteria for shock compliance verification (if applicable). - Necessary data for implementation of natural frequency calculations for the elastic installation,

i.e.: - The equipment unit’s mass point and centre of gravity positioning. - The equipment unit’s mass inertia and mass centrifugal moments relative to a coordinate

system Oxyz with origo coinciding with the unit’s centre of gravity. - The coordinates for the points on the equipment unit to which dampers are attached. - Dynamic rigidity of each individual damper along with its 3 main axes (3 values for each

individual damper). - The angles of inclination for the dampers’ main axes, relative to the coordinate axes xyz (3

angles for each damper).

A type approval/certificate issued by a recognised society shall be submitted for machinery systems and components.

A heat balance calculation of the machinery space shall be carried out to show compliance with the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC, Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.3. The calculations are to give maximum expected engine room temperature.


B Operational Conditions

B 100 Operational conditions

101 Machinery with foundation and fastenings and machinery systems, including auxiliary systems, shall be designed for the following environmental conditions, both statically and dynamically:

- Long time on high loads. - Operation in sandy and dust environments. - Permanent trim± 5° - Permanent list± 15° - Pitching± 10°



- Rolling± 45°, typically with period 10 s for a monohull. Extreme values are not regarded as acting simultaneously. For simultaneously occurring values, see the DNV Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC, Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.1 A200 and the DNV Rules for Classification of Ships, Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.3.

102 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Additional operation requirements pertaining to naval surface vessels:

- long vessel life time and thus possible component lifetime. NDLO must be consulted regarding more detailed operational requirements for the vessel, including particulars of the operating profile

Guidance note: The propulsion machinery arrangement should be configured in accordance with an operating profile for the vessel so that unfavourable load areas are avoided, i.e. the need for running on low loads are minimised ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: Exposure to chemical agents shall be defined as an environmental load. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

In the design phase, the impact on component lifetime due to factors above shall be evaluated with regard to operational loads and environmental conditions. NDLO reserves the right to request documentation of the evaluation with conclusion where found necessary.

Guidance note: Typical environmental loads are corrosion, material embrittlement and ageing of rubber materials.

---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 The machinery space, the machinery itself, and all machinery equipment shall be designed and dimensioned for ambient conditions as specified in DNV HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.1 Sec.3 B201 and B202, DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.5 B404 and DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec. 9 D201.

C Arrangement and System Design

C 100 Basic principles


102 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV:

- Shock protection

C 200 Machinery space arrangements

201 Vessels with two separate machinery compartments/spaces shall be compliant with DNV Rules for Classification of Ships Pt.6 Ch.2, RPS – Redundant Propulsion and Separate.

202 Basic machinery space configuration (B) shall not be used on RNoN vessels.



In addition to DNV Rules for Classification of Ships Pt.6 Ch.2, Section 2, B System configuration, the following rules apply: Each propulsion machinery line with auxiliaries necessary for propulsion shall be independent of the electric support system, so that a failure in delivery of electric power does not lead to loss of function, or interrupted function. Intentional shut-down and later start up of propulsion machinery shall be possible with the propulsion machinery not running for a period of 24 hours, without delivery of main electric power throughout this period. Propulsion machinery with electronic regulators shall have an independent power source or other equivalent solutions for unlimited operating time.

C 300 Redundancy



303 The propulsion machinery manufacturer shall pay special attention to maintenance routines as a consequence of excessive running on part loads. The propulsion machinery shall tolerate excessive running on part load without degradation of reliability or functionality. The vessel's operational profile with operational requirements shall be conferred to define expected percentage time of operation at part load, see A102.

304 Fire fighting of machinery spaces shall be possible when two or more propulsion or power generation machines are enclosed in same compartments with the machinery running at reduced power for 20 minutes. In the case that two or more propulsion or power generating machines are installed in same compartment, machinery shall be so designed that release of fire fighting agent does not damage machinery. This shall be verified through testing as far as applicable.

305 Each single local input/Output (I/O) cabinets shall be designed to allow for a minimum growth margin of 20%. This relates to boat input signals and output signals.

C 400 Arrangement of air intake

401 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: For arrangement of air intake, ref. D604 and D706.

D Component Specific Requirements

D 100 Propeller



103 Loss of oil pressure in controllable pitch propeller mechanism shall not lead to permanent loss of propulsion.

104 The following documentation shall be submitted for NDLO approval:

- Shock resistance



- Drive speed - Efficiency - Ship’s speed and any results from the tow tests - Hydroacoustic noise at slow speed, service speed and maximum speed - Cavitations and erosion tests

Guidance note: Special considerations regarding hydroacoustic noise and shock requirements will normally be stated in the vessel’s contractor specification. If not stated, supplier is to request this information from NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 It shall be possible to replace propellers without removing rudders.

106 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Propellers shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch9. Local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch5 sec1 Table E1.

107 The monitoring and control system shall be able to monitor and control the propulsion line (i.e. the propulsive engine(s), the shaft, and the transmission system), including their auxiliary systems, within their total operating range and modes of operation.

Guidance note: Special attention should be given to protect the transmission system regarding, but not limited to, synchronisation of propulsive engines. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 200 Shafting and vibration

201 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: For all vessels, the shafts shall be equipped with a locking device. The locking device shall be able to lock the propeller shaft when the vessel is operated with one shaft or if the vessel is towed by another vessel


203 Shaft alignment calculations shall take into consideration maximum expected ambient temperature and hence maximum engine room temperature, see A201, plus maximum hull deflections, see A102 and maximum thrust eccentricity.

204 Exposed parts off the shaft shall be protected against corrosion by epoxy resin or similar measures.

205 Shaft lines shall be earthen to the hull by means of a rotating earthing device, or equivalent equipment.

206 It shall be possible to dismantle the propulsor shaft without removing machinery, gearbox or thrust bearing.

Guidance note: It is desirable to be able to dismantle the propulsor shaft without moving the rudder. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



207 With regard to the lubrication of gear and shaft bearings the following requirements shall apply:

- Adequate lubrication shall be ensured for propeller-shaft bearings and gear at all engine speeds, including trailing propulsor. Bearings external to the hull shall be self-lubricating with water.

- Loss of electric power supply shall not affect lubrication.

208 The propeller shafting shall be equipped with a suitable arrangement/device for turning the shaft, also when the shaft is disconnected from the gear.

209 Elastic couplings for single-engine propulsion installations shall be designed so that sufficient torque transmission can be maintained in the event of a failure in the coupling.

Guidance note: In the event of failure in the coupling, the coupling itself shall not introduce unbalanced forces. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

210 For couplings and clutches, which contain elements with backlash (due to angular clearances), the possible alternating moment amplitude shall always be less than the average torque load. In general, clearances in components exposed to a changing load shall be as small as possible.

Gears

211 Adequate lubrication shall be ensured for the gear at all engine speeds. Loss of electric power supply shall not affect lubrication.

212 Noise measurements shall be performed and documented for all gears at all relevant rotational speeds. The measurements shall include both air- and structural borne noise with and without damping.

213 In the case that shock requirements are specified, shock resistance calculations shall be performed and documented for the gear both with and without damping.

214 Special consideration shall be paid to ease of maintenance, particularly with regard to necessary access and space. Power take-off (PTO) shall be easily accessible.

215 Free-standing gears shall be arranged so that they will function in the case of flooding above the gear’s normal ventilation outlet.

216 The supplier to provide Mean Time to Overhaul (MTO) for all operational profile conditions with expected dynamic loads taken into consideration. Special attention shall be paid to loads resulting from air in the waterjet intake.

217 Fail-to-safety analysis shall be performed and documented for couplings and clutches that are physically or functionally integrated as a part of the gear.

218 The local monitoring and control system shall be able to monitor and control the propulsion line, (the shaft, and the transmission system), within their total operating range and modes of operation.

Guidance note: Special attention should be given to protect the transmission system regarding, but not limited to, synchronisation of propulsive engines. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



D 300 Steering gear


302 The following documentation shall be submitted for approval by NDLO:

— strength calculations for maximum expected loads. — fail-to-safety analysis of the steering gear.

303 Vessels shall be provided with at least two independent alternatives for steering. The auxiliary steering arrangement shall have the same performance characteristics as the primary. In addition, the steering gear system shall be equipped with a manual emergency steering arrangement that can be operated locally at the steering gear.

304 The hydraulic power supply and hydraulic reservoir for the steering gear shall not be used for other purposes.

305 Electric steering gear motors shall be equipped with a heating element that is automatically coupled in when the steering gears are turned off.

306 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Steering gear local control shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch13 The control system for steering of vessels shall be designed to handle extreme operating manoeuvres, and extreme load changes.vChange of steering mode shall be performed manually by the operator.

Guidance note: Other solutions may be accepted upon NDLO approval, and will be stated in the contractual specification. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 400 Thrusters

401 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: With regard to the lubrication of thrusters the following requirements shall apply:

- Adequate lubrication shall be ensured for thrusters at all engine speeds, including trailing propulsor.

- Loss of electric power supply shall not affect lubrication.

402 Thrusters for main propulsion shall be designed to manoeuvre and operate at full power with one thruster not in operation.

403 Grids for the protection of a propeller in a tunnel against foreign objects shall be installed.

404 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Thrusters local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch5 sec3

D 500 Water Jet

501 Water jet shafting shall be designed for the torque vibrations appearing during full steering of water jet at full vessel speed.



502 The water jet with shafting shall be designed for large and rapid changes in location of centre of impeller thrust as consequence of varying impeller flow. With more than one water yet installed, each water jet shall be able to maneuver and operate with full power with one propulsion line not in operation. Each water jet shall be equipped with functions for emergency steering both from the steering position at bridge and mechanically/hydraulically directly at the steering gear.

503 Cavitation limits for water jets throughout the operating range shall be documented. The inlet water flow velocity in relation to impeller r.p.m. shall define the water jet's normal operating conditions. When all water jets are in service and running with normal operating conditions, cavitation that can be harmful to the water jet components or the water ducting shall not occur. For vessels with multiple water jets, operation with only one water jet, moderate cavitation during high loads will be accepted. The water jets shall be able to operate from dead in water to full thrust without full cavitation. NDLO shall approve performance regarding maximum power increase rate and the acceleration time in each individual case.

504 The water jet steering system shall be designed and documented according to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Part 4, Chapter 5, Section 2, A200. The following additional documentation shall be submitted for approval:

- Maneuvering response - Bucket response from full ahead to full astern - Maneuvering response combined with Bucket response

505 The water jets should be able to operate with load variation from single steady water flow to complete air suction and back to single steady water with load variation reflecting high speed under extreme sea conditions.

506 With regard to the lubrication of water jet the following requirements shall apply:

- Adequate lubrication shall be ensured for water jet at all engine speeds. - Loss of electric power supply shall not affect lubrication. - Lubrication system for water jet shall be a separate system.

507 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Water jets shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch5 sec2.

508 The control system for water jets shall be designed to handle rapid and numerous subsequent deaerations due to loss of water (sudden load shedding).



509 The water jet control system shall monitor and control water jet position, bucket position, common or split system, mode of operation, status of manoeuvring system, and location of control.

Guidance note: The water jet control system should be based on well-proven technology, with documented high availability and with references from applicable systems installed in similar applications. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 600 Diesel Engines

601 The following documentation shall be submitted to NDLO:

- Documentation that the engine tolerates rapid load increase from idle to full power, and rapid start-up, both regarding component strength and control system according to operational profile and requirements.

- Relevant documentation of experience for long time operation on part and high load. - Certificate in compliance with ISO 3046 and ISO 8528-2. - Exhaust gas in accordance with ISO 8178/4 - Noise according to Draft International Standard ISO/DIS 4867: Code for the measurement and

reporting of shipboard vibration data, and ISO/DIS 4868: Code for the measurement and reporting of shipboard local vibration data.

- Certificate showing compliance with MARPOL 73/78, Annex VI. - Interface documentation for pipelines, electrical, control and monitoring system, air intake and

exhaust system, and auxiliary power intake/output. - Fail-to-safety analysis - Reliability analysis - Documentation of the regulator system with local operator panel. - Operating experience and damage statistics, together with a reference list of military and

civilian users. If the engine is NATO-codified, this shall be stated. - Drawing of exterior of engine with identification of centre of gravity and mass of engine - Specification of alarm and safety system. - Description of control system with characteristics including response to rapid load alterations. - Manufacturer's experience with engine operation in tropical climate, with effect on engine

output power, maintenance intervals and component life

602 The override shall include override of slow down functions, but not shut down functions.

Guidance note: The override of any power restrictions should not include functions which directly protect the machinery against fatal malfunctions. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

603 The following fuel standards shall apply for diesel engines:

- ISO 8217: Fuel Quality Standard for Distillate Marine Fuels, fuel quality ISO F-8217-DMA

604 In the case that combustion air is directly fed to the engine via external ducts, water drainage systems and filters to remove salt and sand shall be included in the air intake. The air inlet quality (maximum salt content, sand and particles) shall be in accordance with engine manufacturer's specification. Engine air intakes and exhaust outlets for propulsion engines shall be designed for the release of fire extinguishing agent in the engine machinery space without shutting down main engines. Air intakes for vessels without service area restriction are to incorporate anti-icing systems preventing clogging of air intakes and louvers by ice if relevant. Anti-icing systems on vessels with service area restrictions will be considered depending on operating area.



605 Engine driven lubricating oil pumps shall have capacity to provide necessary pressure for all relevant engine operation speeds.

606 The manufacturer shall specify the unique type designation for the diesel engine delivered. Any changes or modifications that affect use, size, form, adaptation, replaceability or maintenance shall be identified through the type designation.

607 The power output of the propulsion machinery shall not exceed 85% of the maximum actual load curve for the installation (ref. DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.3 Sec.1 B1703).

Guidance note: For each installation the actual load curve has to be identified and used when calculating the maximum continuous load. The manufacturer’s Maximum Continuous Rating (MCR) curve may not match with the actual load curve, and will then not be valid as calculation input. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

608 Propulsion machinery shall as a minimum have a time between major overhaul of not less than 8 000 service hours. This requirement is based on vessel operation in accordance with predefined operating profile. Major overhaul in this regard is defined as thorough overhaul that replaces those parts deemed necessary to allow the machinery to operate at rated conditions for another period of time (i.e. until next major overhaul).

609 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Diesel engine local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch3 sec1

D 700 Gas Turbines

701 The following documentation shall be submitted to NDLO:

- Description of minimum time for start-up (time up to idle, and acceleration from idle to full power, both directly after start-up, and from steady state idling). Documentation that the gas turbine tolerates rapid load increase from idle to full power, and rapid start-up, both regarding component strength and control system, according to operational profile.

- Noise according to Draft International Standard ISO/DIS 4867: Code for the measurement and reporting of shipboard vibration data, and ISO/DIS 4868: Code for the measurement and reporting of shipboard local vibration data.

- Interface documentation for pipelines, electrical, control and monitoring system, air intake and exhaust system, and auxiliary power intake/output.

- Fail-to-safety analysis - Reliability analysis - Documentation of the electronic control unit (ECU) - Operating experience and damage statistics, together with a reference list of military and

civilian users. - ISO rating and rating at different ambient temperature with defined back pressure at both air

intake and exhaust side. - Documentation of optimal operating point. - Relevant documentation of experience for long time operation at part and high load. - Mean Time to Overhaul (MTO) linked to operational profile - Fuel consumption at different load and rating. - Documentation of internal fire fighting system including type of fire fighting agent and

capacity. - Relevant documentation of experience from marine operations CoC or type approval

certificate. - Type approval of complete gas turbine package including gas turbine, gearbox, package, fire

fighting system, shaft, thrust bearing, local operating panel (LOP)/electronic control unit (ECU), and waterjet/propellers.

- Back pressure calculations on both intake and exhaust.



- Documentation of starting system. - Installation and dismantle of gas turbine from the machinery space. - Flexible mounting. - Documentation of slow down/shut down functions. - Documentation of air suction calculations. - Modes of operation, type of clutches, change from different modes. - Compliance with STANAG 1110. - Exterior drawing of turbine with identification of centre of gravity and mass of turbine - Longitudinal and cross section drawing - Turbine intended operating cycle (including mission cycle) - Specification on condition monitoring with alarm and safety parameters - Specification on method of compressor cleaning and if used, turbine cleaning - Documentation on capacity to perform emergency starting - Minimum and maximum continuous power and r.p.m. - Manufacturer's experience with turbine operation in tropical climate, with effect on turbine

output power, maintenance intervals and component life. - Description of control system with characteristics including response to rapid load alterations. - Description of minimum time for start-up (time up to idle, and acceleration from idle to full

power, both directly after start-up, and from steady state idling). Documentation that the gas turbine tolerates rapid load increase from idle to full power, and rapid start-up, both regarding component strength and control system, according to operational profile/requirements.

- Documentation of FAT, HAT and SAT. If the turbine is NATO-codified, this shall be stated.

702 The fuel oil system shall include arrangements for purifying fuel where necessary in order to meet the gas turbine manufacturer's specification.



704 The following fuel standards shall apply for gas turbines:

- ISO 8217: Fuel Quality Standard for Distillate Marine Fuels, fuel quality ISO F-8217-DMA

705 The pressure losses in air intakes and exhaust ducting shall not exceed the gas turbine manufacturer's specification. The interior of the intake ducting shall secure uniform airflow to the gas turbines, free from harmful turbulence. Unless specified otherwise by NDLO or the supplier, the normal air intake system shall be designed for a maximum pressure loss of 100 [mm] H2O with a clean air filter at ISO rating for the turbine. The exhaust system shall be dimensioned to give a pressure loss of maximum 100 [mm] H2O at ISO rating for the turbine.

706 The air inlet quality (maximum salt and sand content) shall be in accordance with turbine manufacturer's specification. Turbine air intakes and exhaust outlets shall be designed for release of fire extinguishing agent in the turbine enclosure while the engine is running on idle power. Air intakes for vessels without service area restriction are to incorporate anti-icing systems preventing clogging of air intakes and louvers by ice. Anti-icing systems on vessels with service area restrictions will be considered depending on operating area.



707 The gas turbines manufacturer shall document component life times and time between overhauls (TBO) based on defined worst case operating profile and ISO rating, taking into consideration all load and speed variations likely to occur.

708 Turbine driven lubricating oil pumps shall have capacity to provide necessary pressure for all relevant turbine operation speeds.

709 Water drainage systems shall be included in the air intakes and special consideration shall be made to gas turbine component tolerance to salt in combustion air.

710 The manufacturer shall specify the unique type designation for the gas turbine delivered. Any changes or modifications that affect design, use, size, form, adaptation, replaceability or maintenance shall be identified through the type designation.

711 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Gas turbines local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch3 sec2

D 800 Steam Turbines

801 In addition to the general requirements given in DNV HSLCNSC apply.

802 The following documentation shall be submitted: –– the manufacturer's experience with turbine operation in tropical climate, with effect on turbine

output power, maintenance intervals and component life –– turbine intended operating cycle (including mission cycle) –– results from shock testing. –– relevant documentation of experience for long time running on part load –– minimum continuous power and r.p.m. –– specification on condition monitoring with alarm and safety parameters –– specification of noise levels. To be submitted upon request: –– documentation of capability to withstand internal forces due to excessive motion and accelerations. –– documentation of tolerance against forces and deflections imposed on the turbine foundation and

shafting due to hull deflections.



804 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Steam turbines local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch5 sec3

D 900 Compressors

901 Compressors for starting air and instrument air shall be designed to operate continuously with a maximum working pressure for at least 3 hours.

902 Compressors for starting air and instrument air shall be freshwater or air cooled.



903 Compressors used for breathing-air (diving compressors etc.), shall be of approved type, and special precautions shall be taken to ensure that the compressed air will satisfy Norwegian standards for content of CO, CO2, Water, Hydrocarbons and Oxygen.

Guidance note: For vessels with NBC-citadel the air shall be taken from the citadel to ensure that non-contaminated breathing-air is available during NBC-conditions. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

904 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Compressor local control shall be in accordance with DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch5 Sec 4 E.

D 1000 Active Stabiliser Fin Systems

1001 Subject to approval are the flaps, fins, fin shafts, tilting machinery, system for folding in and out, fastening to the hull, hydraulic system, electric system and control system. The systems and components will be reviewed with regard to structural strength and functionality.

1002 The following documentation shall be submitted to NDLO for approval: — drawing of arrangement and hull attachement. — hydraulic system schematically — electric and control system schematically — strength calculations of load carrying parts. The calculations shall demonstrate strength capabilities of both system and components to withstand the design loads, see D1004.

1003 "Det Norske Veritas Product Certificate" (NV) or similar will be required for:

- Frame structural parts at fin location - Fin structural parts - Fin shaft or pintles - Fin carrier

"Works certificate" (W) or similar will be required for:

- bolts - stoppers

1004 The stabiliser system shall be designed according to the DNV Rules for Ships, Pt.3 Ch.3 Sec.2 unless other design rules are specified by NDLO. The manufacturer shall document the design loads and relevant safety factors of all load-carrying parts with the fin exposed to the highest possible load. Hydraulic systems are to comply with NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.6. Control systems are to comply with NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.9.

1005 A functional test shall be carried out during sea trials witnessed by a surveyor from NDLO, demonstrating correct function of all stabiliser system activities.

1006 For the location of the vessel’s fin stabiliser systems the following requirements shall apply:

- The fins shall be positioned in order to limit the effect on the vessel’s lateral movements. - The fins shall not protrude deeper than the vessel’s draught at the fin’s location. - Non-retractable fins shall be positioned so that they do not protrude outside the side of the

vessel.

1007 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Stabiliser local control shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt4 Ch13



1008 Non-retractable fins shall be fitted with positive mechanical stops to limit the angle of fin movement.

1009 Emergency operation of stabiliser fin system - Non-retractable fins shall be capable of being manually set and mechanically locked to zero

fin angle independently from electrical power (by no more than two persons) at all ship speeds. Any waiver regarding ship speeds shall be subject to approval by NDLO.

- Retractable fins shall be fitted with an emergency system capable of retracting the fins if the main system fails.

E Miscellaneous

E 100 Ventilation

101 In the case that two or more propulsion or power generating machinery are enclosed in same compartment, ventilation systems for machinery spaces shall be designed for release of fire extinguishing agent without shutting down of the machinery.

102 Ventilation systems are to comply with the requirements stated in NRAR Sec.6 G800.

E 200 Fresh Water Production

201 The fresh water production system shall be able to operate during NBC conditions, this in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Pt.6 Ch.10 Sec.1 C – Levels of NBC Protection.

202 The fresh water production capacity shall be established on the basis of tank capacity, mission length and water consumption. Fresh water needs of the crew, for the engine rooms and for cleaning the vessel must be taken into consideration. Production capacity calculations and type of production plant shall be approved by NDLO.

203 The quality of potable water shall be in accordance with Standard for Potable Water established by the Norwegian Ministry of Social and Health Affairs, regulation FOR 2001-12-04 nr 1372.

204 The fresh water’s chloride content shall not exceed 50 ppm.

Guidance note: If technical water with special requirements is needed, separate fresh water production unit may be considered. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

An alarm (salinometer) shall go off when the fresh water’s salt content exceeds the limit set. In the event of a too high salt content, the fresh water production unit shall be designed so that the water from the unit is then automatically prevented from entering the fresh water storage tank.

205 Material qualities in the fresh water generator system shall satisfy the requirements given in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.2 Ch.1 Sec.1.

Guidance note: If an osmosis plant is used, backflushing with freshwater must be considered depending on selected materials. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

206 The fresh water plant shall include UV filter and de-acidification filter.



E 300 Ride Control System (RCS)

301 The Ride Control System (RCS) shall, in addition to semi-automatic operation, be able to be operated manually in the case of severe failures in the control components of the RCS. It shall be possible to manually and mechanically fix relevant dampers to given positions such that the air cushion can be sustained in an emergency situation.

Guidance note: The RCS consists of the following main components:

- Air cushion fans - Bag fans - Bags - Fingers - Control system - Air cushion dampers


302 The fail-to-safety principle shall apply for failures in the automatic and remote control operation of all relevant dampers.

303 The RCS shall be instrumented such that operational disturbances can be discovered by the system operator.

304 Air cushion fans shall have the same redundancy philosophy as the main propulsion machinery. The fail-to-safety principle shall apply.

305 The air-cushion-skirts shall be designed such that, as a minimum requirement, the cushion pressure is maintained in the case of damage to one “finger” in the bow’s air-cushion-skirt and breakdown in one of the astern air-cushion-skirt “bags”.

306 Control, Alarm, Safety Functions and indications for Ride control system local control shall be in accordance with DNV HSLCNSC Ph4 Ch13

F Testing

F 100 General

101 The machinery, propulsion and positioning systems are to fulfil the requirements stated in DNV HSLCNSC. General information and requirements regarding testing, verification and validation is presented in Section 0.

102 In addition to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt 4 Ch 3 Sec 2 D Workshop Testing, gas turbines with attached gear box shall be tested at full power.

G Shock Loads

G 100 System requirements

101 Essential machinery components and systems with foundations and fastening shall be designed for a contractual shock level as defined in NRAR Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.1 C112. Essential components and systems are defined in NRAR Pt.0 B213. In addition, ship systems supporting weapon functions are defined as essential for naval vessels. Approval will be based on standards and acceptance criteria that are mutually agreed upon.



102 The essential machinery components and systems, as installed in the vessel, shal have capability to withstand contractual shock level without causing permanent degradation of foundation or fastenings or serious change of alignment rendering the machinery inoperable. This shall be ensured by:

- Statement of conformity shock performance for each component. - Foundation strength and deformation, taking into account the component mass, position in the

ship and type of support. A reduced performance after a shock incident mau be accepted, provided it is acceptable by the contracting Navy.

103 Shock compliance can be documented by either of the following methods:

- Throug calculations; documentation of the assumptions made during the calculations, the method of calculation and results whit conclusions shall be submitted.

- Through shock testing in test rig or other test arrangement. - Through full scale test of system as installed in vessel showing compatibility with mine shock

requirements. If shock compliance is documented through testing the following shall be submitted:

- Type designation and description of testing arrangement - Test procedure - Documentation on elastic support of machinery, if any - Readings taken during test - Test result and conclusion and engine condition after test.

In addition to shock loads, naval vessel can be exposed to heavy sea loads due to operation in extreme sea and weather conditions. Supplier shall identify, and provide documentation on, the strategy behind the selection of shock/vibration absorbers, and for all main components forward calculations identifying the need for and type of absorbers. Installation data and expected lifetime shall be submitted. The following factors shall be taken into consideration:

- Sea loads - Shock loads - Acoustic effects

Guidance note: Vibration in hull, propulsion line, propellers/waterjet and equipment may induce hydroacoustic noise. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The foundation shall be designed so that acceptable alignment is maintained and no permanent deformations arise when it is exposed to specified shock loads. Extra reinforcement of the foundation in connection with handling, installation, or replacement shall not be necessary.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.8: Electric Power Generation and Transfer Page 137


Section 8 Electric Power Generation and Transfer These rules and regulations apply to electric power generation and transfer systems onboard naval surface vessels. Electric power generation and transfer systems comprise all equipment for the production (i.e. generators, batteries), conversion (i.e. transformers, static and rotary converters), transmission and distribution of electric energy (i.e. cables, connecting systems, installation materiel), and all auxiliary equipment required to carry out these functions in a satisfactory manner (i.e. regulators, switches, protection, and other automatic devices). This section also covers most of the equipment that use electricity, i.e. all motors, heating and lighting equipment. The requirements stated in Section 7, which covers machinery installations, systems, and equipment for propulsion and auxiliary systems, impose important conditions to this section. Control and monitoring systems are dealt with in Section 9. Fire safety requirements can be found in Section 10. Requirements regarding electromagnetic environment (EME) are covered by Section 14. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0.


A 100 Application

101 Naval surface vessels are to comply with the requirements given in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.8, with the modifications specified in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.8 and this section (i.e. NRAR Section 8). In addition, the requirements stated in STANAG 1008 shall apply.

102 NRAR Section 8 shall govern whenever there is a conflict between the requirements of this section, Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.8 and Pt.4 Ch.8 in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC .

103 It is the workshop’s responsibility that the electric power generation and transfer systems comply with the rules and regulations stated in this section, and that the construction, quality, capacity and reliability of the vessel are in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings.

104 All equipment shall be approved by the Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation (NDLO) prior to installation. The specification of the vessel shall contain a list of type-approved equipment. Any deviations from this list shall be approved separately in each case, and in all cases the quality of the equipment used shall be equal to that type-approved.

A 200 Definitions

201 Casualty power system DNV rules fully applicable.

202 Damage control system(s) DNV rules fully applicable.

203 Darkened ship DNV rules fully applicable.

204 Essential Equipment DNV rules fully applicable In addition to the services defined in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.8 A204, the following services shall also be considered essential for RNoN vessels: - Main lighting systems.

205 Humidity resistant materials An insulation material is considered humidity resistant if its electrical resistivity is above a given limit when tested under specified humid conditions. The test is given in IEC 60092 -101. Other materials are



considered humidity resistant if they retain their mechanical properties after exposure for a longer period of time to dripping, seaspray or similar wet conditions.

206 Maximum permitted voltage asymmetry Maximum permitted voltage asymmetry is the maximum permitted ratio between the root mean squares of the negative sequence component (i.e. U-) and the positive sequence component (i.e. U+) of the voltage.

Guidance note: As an approximation for the maximum permitted voltage asymmetry, the following ratio can be used:

U

U - U

average l,

average l,.deviation l,max

Where: Ul, average: Average value for the three line-voltages. Ul, max.deviation: The line-voltage with the maximum deviation from the average value. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

207 Cyclic voltage variation tolerance Cyclic voltage variation tolerance is the permissible periodic variation of the user voltage. The cycle of voltage variation shall be longer than one period and shorter than 10 seconds.

208 Voltage transient tolerance Voltage transient tolerance is the permissible sudden voltage change (with the exception of voltage spikes) that exceeds user voltage tolerances. The voltage recovers and remains within the tolerance area for a specified length of time after the start of the disturbance. The voltage transient tolerance comes in addition to the user voltage tolerance.

209 Recovery time of voltage transients Recovery time of voltage transients is the time that elapses from the beginning of the disturbance until the voltage is again within the user voltage tolerance limits.

210 Voltage spikes Voltage spikes are voltage variations of less than 1 [ms] duration.

211 Total harmonic distortion Total harmonic distortion is the ratio of the root mean square (rms) value of the harmonic content (when the fundamental harmonic is removed) to the rms value of the fundamental harmonic, expressed in percent.

212 Individual harmonic distortion Individual harmonic distortion is the relation between the rms value of an individual harmonic and the rms value of the fundamental harmonic, expressed in percent.

213 Deviation factor Deviation factor is the maximum difference between corresponding ordinates of the wave and an equivalent sine wave (same rms value and frequency and having a phase relationship such as to make the difference as small as possible) expressed as a percent of the maximum ordinate of the equivalent sine wave.

214 Nominal frequency Nominal frequency is the designated frequency in hertz [Hz] for the A.C. system.

215 Frequency tolerance Frequency tolerance is the maximum permissible deviation from the nominal frequency during normal operation, with the exception of transients and cyclic frequency variations.

216 Cyclic frequency variation Cyclic frequency variation is the permissible periodic variation in frequency during normal operation, which can be caused by regular or randomly repeated loading. The cyclic frequency variation shall not exceed 10 seconds, and the duration shall be longer than one period.



217 Frequency transient tolerances A frequency transient is a sudden change in frequency, which exceeds the frequency tolerance limits and returns to and remains inside these limits within a specified recovery time after the initiation of the disturbance.

218 Recovery time at frequency transient Recovery time at frequency transient is the time from the start of the disturbance until the frequency returns to a value within the frequency tolerance, and remains there.

219 Selectivity Selectivity means that:

- Only the protective device nearest to the fault in the supply direction shall respond. - Transient currents occurring during normal operation shall not cause disconnection.

220 Unearthed electric system An unearthed electric system is a system where the neutral point and the supply lines are isolated from earth

221 Nominal user voltage Nominal user voltage is the specified line voltage at the equipment or system’s power supply interface.

222 User voltage tolerance User voltage tolerance is the maximum permissible deviation from nominal user voltage during normal operation, except on transient and cyclic voltage variations.

223 Automatic transfer switches For automatic transfer switches (ATS) the following definitions shall apply: ATS 0: Automatic transfer switch (static) without time delay that automatically detects faults in the power source and immediately transfers the user to another power source. The supply characteristics to the user shall always be within specified tolerances. ATS 1: Automatic transfer switch with time delay that automatically senses when the power supply is outside its user tolerances and transfers the user load to another source of power within 0.5 [s]. ATS 2: Automatic transfer switch that, upon loss of the primary power supply, transfers the user load to another source of power within 5 [s].

224 Accessibility Equipment is accessible when it can be inspected without moving or dismantling other fixed installations, pulling down linings, and similar.

A 300 Documentation

301 In addition to the requirements stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.1 B200 and Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.8 A301, the location of light fixtures shall be submitted NDLO for approval.

302 Short-circuit calculations shall comply with IEC 61363.

303 The following analyses shall be carried out by the yard:

1) Electric power balance analysis 2) Load flow analysis 3) Short circuit, three-phase and line-to-line, minimum/maximum fault currents 4) Transient analysis, such as large motor start-ups that may cause critical transient voltages 5) Selectivity analysis 6) Harmonic analysis 7) Reliability analysis.

Items 2 - 6 shall be performed using electrical distribution system analysis (EDSA).



Guidance note: Other software tools may be accepted upon approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

All of the above mentioned analyses shall be carried out and documentation, both in an electronic format and on paper, shall be handed over to NDLO as a part of the specification. Updated analyses (“as built”) shall be handed over prior to harbour acceptance tests (HAT).

B Design Principles

B 100 Environmental conditions


102 Shock requirements, and the treatment of shock for RNoN vessels, will be given in specific guidelines by NDLO. All essential equipments shall meet shock requirements, which will be given in specific guidelines by NDLO. Important equipment shall at least maintain its functionality after being exposed to shock. Essential equipment shall in addition maintain its functionality during shock exposure. All non important equipment shall maintain initial position after being exposed to shock.

103 All equipment shall be designed for the environmental conditions specified in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.7 B101.

104 Conductors and equipment shall either be located well away from the magnetic compass, or screened so that no magnetic field present will interfere with the compass.

B 200 Earthing

201 Guidance note: The primary purpose of earthing is to increase the safety of personnel, i.e. to avoid hazardous contact voltages, secondly to reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI) on communication equipment as well as electronic equipment, and thirdly to reduce fire hazard. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 All electric components mounted on shock absorbers and vibration dampers shall be earthed with flexible copper strings in addition to the earthed cable screen.

203 Neither the neutral point nor any of the phases in an A.C. system shall be earthed, nor any of the poles in a D.C. system.

Guidance note: Exceptions from this requirement can be accepted upon NDLO approval. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

204 If a series connection of earthed parts is used (e.g. one part is earthed in another earthed part), the arrangement shall be such that the earthing on the part that is in operation cannot be broken by mistake during replacing, or when carrying out maintenance on the other part.



B 300 Marking

301 Standard signplates, which carry warnings and first aid instructions in case of accidents involving electric equipment, shall be mounted on all main switchboards. Wording on the signplates shall be given in Norwegian. The signplates used shall be approved by NDLO.

Guidance note: Wording in English may be accepted upon NDLO approval. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


303 All equipment necessary for the safe operation of electric power generation and transfer equipment/systems shall be marked according to KNMS 500-5012-E.

304 Circuit breakers and fuse gear for each circuit shall be marked with the following:

- Circuit number - Name of the equipment - Location of the equipment - Rated load current - Adjustment of over-current protection

Circuit breakers for feeder circuits from the main switchboard shall, in addition, be marked in accordance with the following colour code:

- Blue: circuit breakers related to the propulsion and navigation of the vessel - Red: circuit breakers related to the weapon systems - Green: circuit breakers related to damage control - Yellow: circuit breakers related to circuits non-important for the propulsion of the vessel - White: for less important equipment

Circuits with emergency shutdown function have a nameplate with red background.

Guidance note: The marking plates are to be in accordance to KNMS 500-5012-E. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

305 Fuses for control circuits, instruments or instrument transformers shall be marked with the name or description of the circuit, phase and current rating.

306 Bus bars shall be marked with polarity or phase identification. The signs + and - are to be used for positive and negative polarity, respectively. Phase identification shall comply with the relevant IEC standard.

Guidance note: Alternatively the code L1 - L2 - L3 or the letters R – S - T and colour code black/white/red can be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



B 400 Indicator lights


B 500 Enclosures

501 The table below gives the types of enclosures required for different types of equipment in different locations. Table: Enclosure types in relation to location for different types of equipment

Location

Sw

itch

boa

rds

Con

trol

gea

r an

d m

otor

st

arte

rs

Rot

atin

g m

ach

ines

Tra

nsf

orm

ers

and

re

ctif

iers

Lu

min

aire

s

Hea

tin

g ap

pli

ance

s

Soc

ket

ou

tlet

s

Acc

esso

ries

su

ch a

s sw

itch

es a

nd

con

nec

tion

b

oxes

Inst

rum

enta

tion

co

mp

onen

ts

Above the floor IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44

Dry control rooms IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22

Below the floor 14) N N IP 44 N IP 44 IP 44 N IP 44 IP 56 Engine and boiler rooms

Closed compartments for fuel oil and lubrication oil separators

IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 N IP 44 IP 44

Fuel oil tanks N N N N N N N N IP 68

Ballast and other water tanks, bilge wells N N IP 68 N N IP 68 N N IP 68

Ventilation ducts N N IP 44 N N 9) N N N 9)

Deckhouses, forecastle spaces, steering gear compartments and similar spaces

IP 23 1) IP 23 1) IP 23 1) IP 23 1) IP 23 IP 23 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44

Ballast pump rooms and similar rooms below the load line

IP 44 IP44 IP 44 10) IP 44 10) IP 44 IP 44 IP 56 3) IP 56 3) IP 56 3)

Cargo holds 2) N N IP 44 N IP 55 N IP 56 3) IP 56 3) IP 56 3)

Open deck, keel ducts IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 4) IP 56 IP 55 IP 56 IP 56 3) IP 56 3) IP 56

Battery rooms, paint stores, stores for acetylene welding gas bottles

N N EX 8) N EX 8) EX 8) N EX 8) EX 8)

Dry accommodation spaces IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 5) IP 22

Bath rooms and showers N N N N IP 44 IP 44 N 6) IP 56 IP 56

Galleys, laundries and similar rooms 7) IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44

Storage rooms for explosives 11), 13) EX 8) EX 8) EX 8) N EX 8) EX 8) N EX 8), 12) EX 8)

Damage control deck 15) IP 44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44 IP44

Guidance note: The following footnotes apply to the table above: N Normally not accepted for installation in this location.

1) Equipment that is not in continuous use shall be provided with heating elements for keeping it dry when not in use. The heating elements are normally to be automatically switched on when the equipment is switched off. Continuously connected heating elements may be accepted provided the maximum allowed temperatures are maintained when the equipment is in operation.

2) For truck battery charging arrangements, see DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4, Chapter 8, and Chapter 2, Section I305. For electrical installations in cargo holds for dangerous goods, see footnote 13, for guidance see DNV Rules for Ships



Pt. 5 Chapter 11 Section 2 B 300. For craft carrying cars with petrol in their tanks, see DNV Rules for Ships Pt. 3 Chapter 3 Section 10

3) IP 44 may be accepted, when placed in a box giving additional protection against ingress of water. Equipment for control and indication of watertight doors and hatches shall have water tightness based on the water pressure that may occur at the location of the component, if intrusion of water can affect the control or indication system.

4) Rotating machines on deck shall be naturally cooled, i.e. without external cooling fan. Exemptions may be made for machines, which are used only in port. A signboard shall be fitted on the machines, requiring that machines be provided with additional covers at sea.

5) Connection boxes may be accepted installed behind panels in dry accommodation spaces provided being accessible through a hinged panel or similar arrangement.

6) Special socket-outlets with double insulated transformer, for razors, can be accepted when so placed that they are not exposed to splash, e.g. from showers.

7) Stoves, ovens and similar equipment may be accepted with IP 22 when additionally protected against water splash by hose washing of the floor.

8) For storage rooms for explosives exemptions from certified safe type equipment may be accepted after consideration in each case. Minimum enclosure type is IP 65. The following minimum explosion groups and temperature classes apply for the different locations:

Location Explosion

group Temperature

class Battery rooms II C T 1 Stores for welding gas bottles II C T 2 Lamp rooms and paint stores II B T 3 Storage rooms for explosives - T 5

9) May be accepted upon NDLO approval. 10) Electric motors and starting transformers for side thrusters may be accepted in

enclosure IP 22, provided that:

- The motor and the starting transformer are equipped with heating element for still-stand heating.

- The room is not used as pump room for ballast, fuel oil and similar. 11) Only equipment absolutely necessary to support the functionality of the room shall be

installed. 12) Switches for lighting shall be located outside the room. 13) Specification of electrical installation, arrangements, and type of equipment, shall be

submitted to NDLO for approval in each case. 14) IP 23 may be accepted if the equipment is located or so arranged that damage due to

the fire-fighting system is avoided. 15) Corridors and staircases shall have minimum IP 23. On damage control deck IP 44 is

required. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

502 In areas where sprinkler-, water mist-, or other liquid-based fire-fighting systems are used, IP 44 is required for all essential and essential and important equipment.

503 Enclosures shall be of metal, with the following exemptions:

- Enclosure for luminaries, switches, socket-outlets and similar in accommodation spaces. - Screens on luminaries, and windows in other enclosures, also in other spaces than dry

accommodation spaces.

Guidance note: Other exemptions may be accepted on a case-by-case basis under the approval of NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



504 Enclosures for lamp holders, switches, sockets, junction boxes and similar shall be of corrosion-resistant materials or of materials treated against corrosion. The material shall be at least self-extinguishing, and resistant to oil vapours.

505 Electric equipment shall be protected from water, steam, oil and oil fumes. If this is not possible, necessary protection to prevent damage to the electrical equipment shall be implemented. Joints and couplings in piping systems shall be located in such a manner that a leakage does not jeopardize the electrical equipment. If this is not possible, the joints and couplings shall be shielded.

B 600 Lighting system

601 The lighting system shall be planned and installed in order to attain maximum safety and minimum vulnerability taking combat damage and other mechanical damage into consideration.

Guidance note: Focus should be on cable installation, separation and protection.

---e-n-d---o-f---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

602 The lighting system in each compartment, which requires alternative power supply, shall have its redundant supply from another distribution panel located in a different watertight compartment or in a different predefined distribution zone.

Guidance note: Each redundant distribution panel and the power supply cables should be located as far as practicable from each other to minimize the system’s vulnerability due to combat damage. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C System Design

C 100 Supply systems


102 The following requirements shall be followed for all use of A.C. to machinery and equipment:

- All machinery and equipment of 5 [kVA] or higher shall be supplied with 440 [V] three-phase.

- Wherever practical, machinery and equipment of less than 5 [kVA] shall be supplied with 440 [V] three-phase.

Guidance note: Where this is not practical, the following preferred ranking priority should be used:

- 440 [V] single-phase - 230 [V] three-phase, or 115 [V] three-phase - 230 [V] single-phase, or 115 [V] single-phase


C 200 D.C. voltage variations




202 Characteristics of and requirements to standard low voltage D.C. supplies are given in STANAG 1008, Annex C.

C 300 Main source of electrical power









309 All feeder circuits shall be equipped with multipole circuit breakers.

Guidance note: Shore connections may be equipped with fuses. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

310 Distribution boards for essential and important users shall have alternative sources of power supply.

C 400 Emergency source of electrical power

401 The requirements for emergency source of electrical power which are given in Pt.4 Ch.8, are not made applicable to naval surface vessels. Availability and independence are covered by the requirement for alternative source of power as required by 300 and 600.



C 500 Casualty power distribution system




504 For vessels with a displacement of more than 1,000 [tons], a casualty cabling system shall be installed. The casualty cable system is intended to be able to supply equipment that is important for the vessel’s propulsion, navigation, damage control and fighting capability. This includes equipment such as:



- Consoles for electronic equipment, radio, radar, navigation and fire control - Weapons - Fire and bilge pump starters - Boards for internal communication

Guidance note: For duplicated equipment, casualty cabling may be omitted upon approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

505 The casualty cable system shall be able to establish a provisional power supply to damaged parts of the permanent plant. A casualty cable network shall be constructed according to relevant requirements by means of loose cables connected to certain fixed cable points. The casualty cable system shall consist of:

- Flexible cables of suitable lengths with plugs at both ends. - Cable racks or brackets mounted in the compartments where the cable shall be used. If it is

practicably possible, each casualty cable shall have its own bracket. - Casualty lighting supply contacts, which are connected to all main switchboards, important

distribution boards, and equipment having manual or automatic transferring. - Lengths of permanently located cable connected to two sets of casualty contacts for carrying

emergency power through bulkheads or decks without affecting water tightness. The watertight cable penetrations shall be located as high as practicably possible. The number and length of permanently installed casualty cables shall be kept to a minimum.

- At least three portable connection boards shall be available, consisting of three outgoing contacts, located respectively fore, amidships and aft. The connection board shall have a 1.0 [m] extension cable.

Guidance note: The portable connection boards can also be used as part of the fixed casualty cable system to simplify and reduce it. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

506 The casualty cable system shall comply with requirements stated in KNMS 500-5014: Electrical equipment marking.

C 600 Distribution






606 Capacitive leakage currents shall not exceed the limits given in STANAG 1008.

Guidance note: In order to reduce capacitive leakage currents at single-pole earth faults, capacitors in filters or similar shall as far as possible not be connected between phase and earth but between the phases due to personal safety (contact hazard). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



607 Fault currents at single-pole earth faults shall not exceed 30 [mA].

Guidance note: A Petersen coil adapted to the A.C. system or subsystem of the vessel may be installed if the capacitive fault currents at single-pole earth faults exceed 30 [mA]. When Petersen coils are used, measure should be taken to ensure continuous operation of the automatic insulation monitoring system. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

608 A control circuit shall be branched from the main circuit. Where appropriate, a joint control circuit supply for several circuits can be arranged for essential and important users on the following conditions:

a) Two units with the same important objective shall have power supply from two different systems.

b) The power supply shall normally be provided from the same bus bars as the main circuits. c) Each individual control circuit shall have separate short-circuit protection. d) Switching gear shall be marked with a warning that the control current circuit shall also be

disconnected when the switch shall be disconnected for maintenance. e) For less important consumption, a joint control current supply can also be arranged on

condition that pt. b and d are followed.

609 The circuit for the under-voltage protection for each circuit breaker shall not supply other equipment than a possible connection coil and return power relay.

610 The voltage circuit for a generator’s instruments shall have separate fuses.

611 The alarm for the refrigeration rooms shall have power supplies from a UPS system.

Guidance note: A separate UPS is not required if the alarm is supplied by a ships-technical control system with backup requirements. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

612 Single-phase circuits shall be connected to the three-phase system so that the load on the three-phase system is symmetrical. Reference is made to STANAG 1008.

613 Casualty supply contacts shall be connected to the lighting transformer’s primary winding and be located close to the transformer.

C 700 Shore connection




704 Shore connections shall be dimensioned to cover the power requirements calculated in the power analysis for harbour loading conditions, as well as the additional capacity for future load increases 20%.

705 When supply from shore is used, the connection of supply cables shall be designed with suitable connection boxes conveniently located and permanently connected to the main switchboard.



706 Shore connections shall be in accordance with NATO STANAG 4143, but plug sockets may be used for current levels up to 125 [A] Safety interlock shall be provided, so that the shore connection switch can only be operated when shore power is present.

707 Vessels shall have earth connections to shore for dry-docking. Fused circuit breakers that can be removed simultaneously and replaced while non-current carrying shall be installed in the shore-connection box if socket connections are not used.

C 800 Choice of cable and wire types

801 Only cables in accordance with the NDLO Cable Specification shall be used. Cables that have material containing fluorine shall not be used due to the danger of generating poisonous gases at high temperatures.

Guidance note: The cables used on board RNoN vessels shall have as little weight as practicably possible in relation to their use. NDLO Thin Wall Cable Specification should be used for vessels that are weight critical. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



C 900 Control gear for motors and other consumers


C 1000 Battery supplies


1002 Guidance note: The charging current for batteries may be calculated from the following formula: I = C20 · 0.8 · 0.16 Where: C20 = 20 hour capacity [Ah] 0.8 = The factor that multiplied with C20 [Ah] gives 5 hours capacity 0.16 = The factor for determining the charger’s rated current In addition, the load to other possible users outside the battery should be included. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


1004 Tripping of the UPS system shall not cause damage to equipment in operation.



C 1100 System voltages

1101 The following nominal user voltages and frequencies shall be used for the A.C. system:

- A.C. 60 [Hz]: 115/2301)/440 [V] - A.C. 400 [Hz]: 115/440 [V]

Guidance note: 1) 230 [V] for A.C. 60 [Hz] is normally used for illumination and domestic equipment. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

1102 The nominal user voltage for the D.C. system shall be 24/28 [V].

Guidance note: Other nominal user voltages may be accepted upon NDLO approval. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C 1200 A.C. voltage and frequency variations

1201 Tolerances in 60 [Hz] and 400 [Hz] systems shall be in accordance with STANAG 1008. The figures below shall apply for frequency characteristics for 60 [Hz] power supply and voltage tolerances, respectively.



Frequency [Hz]

t [sec]

Figure: Frequency characteristics for 60 [Hz] power supply (NATO STANAG 1008)

Recovery time at voltage transient

t [sec]

Figure: Voltage tolerances (NATO STANAG 1008)



1202 The maximum permitted voltage asymmetry shall be less than 2%.

-

C 1300 Circuit protection

1301 A main cable supplying a distribution switchboard having pure motor load and being short circuit protected with electromagnetic instant release shall be dimensioned for maximum load.

1302 Under-voltage protection, or a combination of under-voltage and overload protection with automatic reconnection, shall be used when instantaneous start is necessary after voltage is again within specified tolerance limits for the equipment. Use of starters with under-voltage protection with automatic reconnection shall be limited. Under-voltage protection shall allow normal start of the motor when the voltage is higher than 85% of the rated voltage. It shall trip when the voltage is lower than 60% of the rated voltage.

1303 Bus-tie circuits between switchboards shall be protected by multipole circuit breakers with time delayed over-current protection and short-circuit protection with instantaneous release.

1304 Internal switchgear (bus-tie) between the bus-bar sections shall have sufficient making and breaking capacity for the service it is intended for. The use of short circuit, over-current and under-voltage protection is normally not permitted for such equipment. If wrong operation may cause damage, instructions for correct operation shall be given on signboards near the operating stand.

1305 All circuits, except for dedicated fire pumps and steering gears, shall be protected against short-circuit currents and against thermal overload in such a way that damage to materiel is prevented.

1306 Each dedicated fire-fighting pump circuit shall have short circuit protection and a time-delayed over-current relay. Trip release current shall not be less than 200% of the full load current.

1307 All circuit breakers shall be selected according to their rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS according to IEC 60947-2 Clause 4).

1308 Selectivity shall be achieved for the whole distribution system to the final distribution board, including the user interface. Selectivity shall be obtained by coordinated use of circuit breakers and fuses. Circuit breakers and the rest of the electric system shall be dimensioned to withstand thermal and dynamic stress on the highest short-circuit current during the time disconnection is delayed. All single units in electric equipment and all circuits shall be selectively protected against short-circuit currents and against thermal overload in such a way that damage to materiel is prevented, and such that continuous operation is ensured for all important users. In the over-current range the distance between the characteristics shall be great enough for the circuit breaker nearest the generator to stand the load currents from other users in addition to the relevant user’s overload or arc fault. There shall be a time delay of at least 50 [ms] between the release characteristics of two successive circuit breakers to secure selectivity, unless selectivity is proven and documented through testing. When connecting fuses and over-current relays in series the release time for the relay shall be set higher than the melting and arcing time of the fuse.



D Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies

D 100 Mechanical construction


102 There shall be adequate lighting for both the front and the rear of the main switchboards. General lighting shall be so arranged to provide sufficient light for safe control and operation when any one of the supply cables is activated, even if there is no voltage on the bus bars.

Guidance note: The lighting should be supplied from the generator side of the circuit breaker. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 Equipment shall comply with the shock requirements, which will be given in specific guidelines by NDLO.

104 All operation of circuit breakers, switches, fuses and other equipment shall be made from the front of switchboards without having to open any doors.

Guidance note: Exemptions from this requirement may be granted upon NDLO approval. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 The main switchboards shall facilitate a 20% increase in spare circuits, and a 25% increase in future loads.

106 In cases where the bus bars are placed horizontally in the lower half of the switchboard, they shall be screened in such a way that objects cannot fall onto them and cause short circuit.

107 The top and bottom of main switchboards shall be drip and spray-proof.

108 Cable entrances shall be made in such a manner that, although there may be a certain amount of displacement of the switchboard in any direction, this will not cause any serious tension in the cables or damage them in any way according to the vessel’s shock and vibration requirements. Guidance note: Cables shall be installed to ensure that sheath-stripping, cable connections and cableties do not lead to property damage. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

109 The wiring for the control circuits of a generator breaker shall be kept within the generator section of the switchboard. This does not apply to parallel connections for operating the breaker from the central manoeuvring panel, or any other main switchboard, provided these are protected by separate fuses.

110 All current carrying parts in switchboards and distribution boards shall be protected against accidental contact by personnel.

Guidance note: If placed behind doors, the interior front is to comply with enclosure type IP 20. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

111 Current carrying conductors in aluminium shall not be used.



112 Bus bars and other non-insulated bar connections shall be mounted on supports of insulated material of an approved type. The mechanical strength shall be great enough to withstand the greatest possible short-circuit current, according to 60439-1 and IEC 60865.

Guidance note: In order to prevent short circuit when locating circuit breakers the minimum distances from the arc chamber, prescribed by the manufacturer, shall be observed. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

113 Non-insulated current-carrying parts shall be at least 30 [mm] mutually separated from each other and at least 16 [mm] distant from the earth. These distances can be reduced if the conductors are screened by plates of insulating material.

114 Measures shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment and personnel due to short circuits within enclosures. Electrical equipment (i.e. switchboards, distribution boards, converters etc.) shall be equipped with an arc protection system if the short circuit level is above 25 [kA] rms or if the feeding circuit breaker exceeds 1 [MVA].

115 All switchboards and assemblies shall be safe for operation in front of, or at the rear, against effects of internal arcs occurring inside the enclosure. All partitions in switchboards and assemblies shall withstand internal arcs to prohibit spreading to other cubicles. Switchgear and switchboards above 25 [kA], or with a total power capacity of 1 [MVA], shall be type tested to demonstrate that they will withstand the effects of an internal arc failure.

D 200 Remote operated switchboard


D 300 Instruments

301 Standard black and white instruments shall be used in light and well-lit compartments. Black - yellow instruments shall be used in compartments where it is important to retain night-sight, or in dark and poorly lit compartments. Instrument lighting shall be located so that the person reading the instruments is not bothered by light reflections on the instrument glass. The instrument glass shall be non-reflective.

302 Systems with several main switchboards joined together by cables (bus ties) shall have a directional kW-meter in each board where the cables are connected. In addition, an amperemeter for each of the remote generators shall be installed in the primary main switchboard or in the control desk for the electric power supply.

E Rotating Machinery

E 100 Motors


102 Generators shall have a certificate from the manufacturer and from a classification society.

103 Motors with a horizontal shaft shall be placed longitudinally because of bearing loads and gyroscope effects.

104 Eyebolts, or other lifting devices of adequate size and mechanical strength, shall be fitted to all motors exceeding 70 [kg]. A fastening for a lifting device shall be fitted above the motor.



105 Unless otherwise specified, the motors shall be designed for continuous operation S1.

106 The following maximum induced shaft voltages caused by magnetic unbalance shall apply:

- Slide bearings: 0.5 [V] - Ball bearing: 0.1 [V]

107 Motors shall be able to deliver 125% of the torque, equivalent to the rated power and rpm, for 2 hours.

E 200 Generators

201 The rating and number of the aggregates shall be determined after a complete power balance. A 20% increase in power requirements during the building period shall be reckoned, as well as an increase of 25% during the life span of the vessel. When choosing the rating of aggregate, consideration should be paid to the highest and lowest loads. The total generator capacity shall be determined by aggregates installed less one (n – 1 philosophy). That is, if two aggregates are selected then 50% of the total generator capacity shall cover the highest load according to the power balance, plus the prescribed increases of 20% and 25%.

Guidance note: Wherever practically possible there shall be an even number of generators. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 Aggregates with a horizontal shaft shall be placed longitudinally because of bearing loads and gyroscope effects.

203 Eyebolts or other lifting devices of adequate size and mechanical strength shall be installed on all generators weighing more than 70 [kg]. There shall be a bracket for the lifting device above the generator.

204 The following maximum induced shaft voltages caused by magnetic unbalance shall apply:

- Slide bearings: 0.5 [V] - Ball bearing: 0.1 [V]

205 Generators less than 1 [MW] shall be able to be started and produce full rated voltage at terminals within 10 seconds. For generators greater than 1 [MW] up to 20 seconds is accepted.

206 Voltage deviation between full load (at rated power factor) and no load shall not exceed 2%.

207 When running generators in parallel, the voltage regulator shall not cause power oscillations, or have an amplifying effect on existing power oscillations. Reference is made to STANAG 1008.

208 Generator sets shall be rated according to ISO 3046, and shall be able to deliver 110% load for one hour within a period of 12 hours of operation.

209 The engine shall have an overspeed protection that is activated at a predetermined value between 110% and 120% of rated rpm.



210 The active and reactive load sharing between generators running in parallel shall, in the area between 20% and 100% of each generator’s rated load, comply with the following requirements (without the power management system activated):

- The deviation for different generators shall not exceed 5% of the ideal load distribution, given the relevant load situation.

- For generators of different ratings, deviation shall not exceed 10% of the proportional load of the largest generator, or not more than 25% of the proportional load of the smallest generator.

211 Generating sets with foundation and fastenings and auxiliary systems shall be designed for the following environmental conditions, both statically and dynamically:

- Permanent trim: 5° - Permanent list: 22.5° - Pitching: ± 15° - Rolling: ± 45°, typically with period 10 [s] for a monohull.

Guidance note: For multihull vessels, exceptions from these requirements may be granted by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Extreme values are not regarded as acting simultaneously.

F Miscellaneous Equipment

F 100 Switchgear



103 All switching equipment shall be designed for the frequency of on-and-off switching which it will be subject to in normal use. The moveable parts of the switch shall not be live when in open position.

104 Under-voltage and manoeuvring coils, including contactor coils, shall permit connection when voltage is 85 – 110% of the nominal value. Disengagement shall not occur before the voltage is below 65% of the normal. The above-mentioned coils shall not react on the permitted transient voltage variations.

105 The following maximum temperature increases on full load and on ambient temperature are permitted:

- Make and break contacts, laminated copper: 30°C - Make and break contacts, massive bronze or copper: 60°C - Make and break contacts, massive, silver-plated: 75°C - Insulated windings, at rated voltage and frequency, measured by the resistance method:

o Insulation class A: 60°C o Insulation class E: 75°C o Insulation class B: 85°C o Insulation class F: 110°C o Insulation class H: 135°C

- Terminals for connecting external cables with temperature class max. 85°C: 40°C - Operating handles of metal: 15°C



- Operating handles of insulating material: 25°C The temperature of the connecting terminals for cables shall be in accordance with the requirements to temperature for the cables used.

106 Short-circuit protection may have a time delay up to 0.5 [s], if necessary to achieve selectivity. When determining the relay current and time delay the relevant momentary and steady state short-circuit currents shall be considered, as well as the time delay for the under-voltage protection, if such is used. If time-delayed short-circuit protection is used, measures shall be taken to avoid under-voltage trip of other upstream users.

107 Motor starters and connecting equipment shall have a connecting and disconnecting capacity corresponding to at least that of the starting current of the motor.

108 Switches of the contactor type shall not be used as short-circuit protection.

F 200 Galley equipment


F 300 Batteries

301 Battery cells shall be designed to prevent electrolyte leakage from occurring on heeling up to 45o.

302 There shall be emergency eye-washing equipment mounted in each battery room, battery locker and within reach of the battery boxes.

F 400 Socket outlets

401 Plug sockets with more that 16 [A] rated current shall interlock with a switch so that the plugs can only be inserted when the switch is in the “off” position. Plug sockets shall be of a type that complies with KNMS 506 – 5015.

402 Plug sockets for portable tools shall be distributed throughout the vessel so that such tools can be used everywhere without needing more than 15 m of cable between the plug socket and the tool.

403 At workbenches where portable electric equipment shall be used, a plug socket shall be mounted for each 2 - 3 [m] of bench. In the electronic compartment, plug sockets for hand-lamps, tools and portable instruments shall be installed. These sockets shall be at least 1.5 m from all electronic equipment.

404 There shall be at least one double plug socket in each cabin and Technical room. No plug sockets shall be installed adjacent to showers or baths.

405 All galley equipment shall be supplied from isolating transformers.

F 500 Luminaries

501 Average general lighting for different locations, referenced at 0.85 [m] above the floor, shall be as follows: Location Lux Local lighting requirements (see below) Lowest deck 150 B, C Cabin 150 A, B, C Toilet/shower room 150 B Mess 150 D



Galley 300 E, F Pantry 300 E, F Corridors, stairways 150 H, I Office 300 A Sick bay 150 A, C, N Bridge 150 O Operation room 200 A, O Radio room 300 A Instrument room 150 O Engine control room 200 A, G, H, I, L, M Engine room, boiler room 200 1) F, G, H, I, J, K, L Steering engine room 100 Workshop 300 F Cooling, Refrigeration room 100 Storeroom 100 Chain locker 100 Operation room 200 A, O Library 300 Helicopter hangar 500 O Wheelhouse 200 A, L. O Where: 1) Measured on the floor The following average local lighting requirements for different locations shall apply: Place Location Lux Comments A Writing desk, average on surface 300 h B Mirror lighting 200 v 1) C Berth lighting 200 v 2) D Dining table, average 200 h E Cooker top 300 h F Work bench, average 300 h G Important boards, main switchboard, office desk: - Lighting on main instrument and important areas 300 3) - Lowest lighting on less important areas 75 3) - Lighting on back of switchboards 75 - 150 3) H Less important boards, fuse boards 150 3) I Detached, less important instruments 100 3) J Engine top-average (1 meas. point /m2. min 2) 200 h K Engine side-average (1 meas. point/m2. min 2) 150 v L Important control points and service equipment 200 4) M Log table, drawing board 300 h N Operation table, special area lighting O Special area lighting Where: 1) Measured 50 [cm] from mirror at normal face height (approximately 1.6 [m]), photocell aimed

at mirror 2) Measured 50 [cm] from berth fixture, photocell aimed at fixture 3) Measured with photocell on a plane with switchboard/control desk/instruments 4) Measured on the plane perpendicular to normal line of vision h Illuminance on horizontal plane v Illuminance on vertical plane



502 The following standard types of lamp holders shall normally be used for glow-lamps, mercury lamps, sodium lamps and other similar discharge tube gas lamps:

Lamp holders Type Maximum voltage [V]

Maximum power [W]

Maximum current [A]

Screw socket: Goliath E40 250 3000 15 Medium E27 250 200 4

24 40 2 Small E14 Lamp holder E14 (ceramic material) is also permitted for

110 [V] and 230 [V], maximum 15 [W]

24 5 1 Miniature E10 Only for warning lamps

Bayonet-socket (plug-socket): Normal B2 24 40 2 24 40 2

Small double contact B15s Lamp holders B15s (ceramic material) are also permitted for 115 [V] and 230 [V], maximum 15 [W]

24 40 2 Small single contact B15d Lamp holders B15d (ceramic material) are also permitted

for 115 [V] and 230 [V], maximum 15 [W] 24 5 1 Miniature B9

Only for warning lamps

Goliath lamp holders E40 shall be fitted with an effective mechanism to lock the lamp to the holder.

Guidance note: Other types of lamp holders, especially for warning lamps, may be approved after evaluation in each case. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

503 All lamp holders shall consist entirely of self-extinguishing, humidity resistant material. Material that comes into contact with live parts shall be non-inflammable.

504 Lighting fixtures shall be designed and mounted so that heat dispersion from the lamp is ensured. The insulated conductors connected to the fixture shall be adequately protected against high temperatures. The temperature of those parts of the fixture that can be touched shall not exceed 60°C.

505 Wires in the fixtures shall have a temperature class corresponding to the highest operating temperature of the fixture.

506 Fixtures in the engine room and similar rooms shall have clear and transparent shades. In other places the shades shall be dim and translucent. The fixtures shall be compensated such that the power factor is cos φ = 0.9.

507 An emergency button for activating the dimmed lanterns (i.e. switching the lights on) shall be installed on the bridge at the steering console/position.

508 All reactors, capacitors and switching equipment that is part of an installation of a discharge tube lamp, shall be enclosed in earthed metal. The equipment shall be approved by NDLO.

G Installation and Testing

G 100 Principles




102 Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.10 D (Inspection and Testing) in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC shall apply.

103 For all generating sets, together with their switchboard equipment, the following additional tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- 110% load test for one hour with continuous monitoring of temperature - Output test of the diesel generators under variable loads, including testing of sudden load

changes/steps as specified by NDLO. Transient frequency and voltage-variations shall meet stated requirements when switching on motors and load specified by NDLO.

- Selectivity testing

104 For shore connection equipment the following tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Function - Interlocks - Phase sequence indicator

105 For electric motors the following additional tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- For larger motors, i.e. motors rated more than 10% of the generator, the starting current

shall be measured with a transient recorder. Voltage, current and frequency variations shall be documented.

- Load test of one hour’s duration for motors rated above 100 [kVA]. - Testing of thermal release relays on loss of one phase.

106 For converters, rectifiers, and UPS systems, the following additional tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Load test at rated load for one hour - Measuring of temperature - Trip of UPS systems

107 For transformers the following additional tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Insulation test in cold and warm condition - Load tests of one hour duration for transformers rated above 10 [kVA] - Measuring of temperature

108 For lighting systems the following additional tests shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Measuring of illuminance in the different rooms with a luxmeter - Testing of emergency lights and low-intensity illumination

109 For electric heating elements the following additional test shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Insulation tests in cold and warm conditions



110 For electric equipment the following additional test shall be carried out at the harbour acceptance test (HAT):

- Testing of the special equipment as specified by NDLO

111 Based on selectivity analyses carried out by the yard (ref. A303), NDLO reserves the right to require verification of the results by spot tests.

112 A complete test programme shall be presented by the yard. Test forms providing all operating data shall be worked out for all tests and signed by the yard and NDLO’s inspector. These forms shall be assembled into a test report that shall be handed over to NDLO in five copies. Equipment certificates shall be included in the test report.

G 200 Generators




204 Generators shall have three-phase voltage control.

G 300 Switchboards


302 At least one of the main switchboards shall be located on or above the damage control deck.

303 The passage in front of and behind the main switchboard shall have a covering or grate on the floor of insulating and oil resistant material.

304 If practicable, starters and switches shall be so placed that personnel can see if the motor is running. If the motor is not visible from the control stand, there shall be a green indicator lamp on each manual switch that shows that the motor circuit is live.

305 The cable screen shall be removed on those parts that are inside the board, and shall be earthed close to the penetration. The cross section of the cable screen shall be maintained.

306 The main switchboard shall have equipment necessary for controlling all the generators that can be run in parallel.

G 400 Cables









Cables that are normally submerged shall be laid in watertight pipes or ducts. Required cable pipes for pipes that are normally submerged should be in accordance with KNMS-505-5006








414 Cable runs shall be so located that when machinery is dismantled or moved, the cables are not damaged, and do not obstruct the work.

415 The cable runs shall be located in adequately ventilated positions to ensure that the temperature remains below the level specified for the cables used.

416 25% of the cable run capacity shall be reserved for extensions after the vessel is delivered.

417 Cable clamps shall be fastened using with screws of acid resistant material.

418 Cables shall not be fastened direct to beams, bulkheads or similar mechanically loaded construction elements. Should it however be necessary to fasten cables to such constructions, lugs shall be welded to the construction the cable shall be fastened to. Light bulkheads in cabins and messes and similar are exceptions to this rule.

419 Cable clamps and supports shall not have sharp edges, which can damage cables.

420 Cable shall have protection against mechanical damage.

Guidance note: Examples of places where such protection may be necessary are:

- Places where cables may be trodden on or damaged in some other manner by passage of the crew

- At hatch openings and transport channels - At exposed places in storerooms - At places outside, where the cables can be exposed to combat damage

This protection may consist of screens, gratings, pipes or steel ducts.




421 All cable pipes shall be fastened to prevent damage occurring through vibration.

Guidance note: The rules for fastening of cables apply to the extent that these are applicable. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

422 Cable pipes, or cable ducts and their fastenings, shall not absorb tension or pressure forces from the hull, or other components.

423 Care shall be taken that the use of different metals in cable trays, cable supports and similar does not cause corrosion. Special care shall be taken in the use of copper and aluminium. Where copper and aluminium come into contact with each other, cupal sheets shall be used.

424 Compression glands for single cable penetrations shall be used for watertight cable penetrations. Cable transits constructed as a steel frame (welded to the bulkhead or deck) with sealant blocks for cable penetration shall be used for multi-core cables.

425 The cable runs shall withstand the mechanical stress caused by repeated short-circuits.

426 Cable trays and/or ladders shall be used for all cable runs. Trays and ladders shall withstand mechanical forces resulting from short circuits, vibrations, and shock.

427 Power supply cables shall be separated from signal and antenna cables. If there is no screening between cables (bulkhead, cable ducts), the distance between parallel heavy current cables and signal cables shall be at least 0.2 [m]. Where heavy current cables and signal cables cross each other at an angle of at least 45 degrees, the distance can be reduced to a minimum of 0.1 [m].

428 Cables through tanks containing combustible fluids shall be protected by means of two concentric pipes.

G 500 Screening and earthing of cables




504 Approved ducts and penetrations, which connect the screen concentrically to the earth, shall be used.

505 The cable’s copper braiding shall be earthed at both ends of the cable, except for single core cables.

Guidance note: Earthing at both ends may upon NDLO approval be omitted due to electromagnetic signature. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

G 600 Marking of cables






604 Signboards shall be in accordance with KNMS - 505 - 5013. The system for cable marking and signboard marking is given in KNMS - 500 - 5014.

G 700 Batteries




704 Batteries shall not be installed in the accommodation.

705 Cable penetrations to the battery room shall be gas- and watertight.

706 Batteries in the battery room shall be installed in open racks of acid-proof material. Under each shelf there shall be acid-proof plastic pans, which can be dismounted for cleaning. A removable protective frame shall be used to keep batteries in place and prevent them from coming loose and being damaged by shock.

G 800 Low intensity illumination





805 Low intensity illumination shall be installed in at least the following spaces:

- all service and accommodation alleyways

- living spaces, including toilets and washrooms

- hangar spaces, including changing room and working area for flight deck personnel

- control and work stations

- cargo spaces

- gun mounts

- Replenishment At Sea (RAS) transfer station



808 For lighting in magazines, both white and red lamps with their own switches (or selector switches) can be used for alternative lighting under normal conditions and "darkened ship".



G 900 Emergency lighting


902 The emergency lighting shall be operable for a minimum of 5 hours.



905 The emergency light batteries shall be charged by the normal lighting circuits in the compartment in which they are mounted. A holding relay shall be attached to the lights so that they are automatically lit when the ordinary light disappears, but not when the light is switched off.

906 Emergency lights shall be installed at important places on the vessel to provide limited light when other light sources fail.

Guidance note: The following places shall have emergency lights:

- Watch-stations where crew shall remain on watch, and continuous lighting are essential.

- Larger compartments containing machinery, emergency chutes, and very important posts on upper and lower levels shall have a light at each entrance and exit.

- All ratings’ rooms and messes shall be equipped with lights that light the exits. - All emergency passages and hatchways leading to the weather deck from

compartments where crew are stationed or posted shall have a light for each stair or hatchway.

- Emergency lights shall adequately illuminate hull and machinery arrangements, which in an emergency situation can be dangerous or obstructive to traffic.

- Emergency lights shall provide adequate light for first aid treatment, and for operating tables.

- There shall be adequate emergency lighting in the engine room for traffic, and for important control and service functions.

- Emergency lights shall provide sufficient light for weapon and ammunition stores, loading compartments and similar.


907 Corridors and each watertight section shall have at least one portable emergency light. Damage control stations shall be provided with a row of at least five portable lights. Portable light shall be operable for at least five hours.

908 Emergency lights, both fixtures and portable, shall be type approved by NDLO.

H Electric Propulsion

H 100 General


102 With regard to electric propulsion the following documentation shall be submitted:



- The efficiency of driving machinery, transformers, frequency converters, generators and motors at the following load conditions:

o 25% o 50% o 75 % o 100 %

Guidance note: The efficiency information may be presented as curves. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- Overload capability in percent and time. - Power factor (cos φ) for all consumers. - Fuel consumption diagrams (Mussel diagrams) for the driving machinery. In addition it shall

be specified what standards and regulations this information is based upon. - Reliability data (MTBF = Mean Time Between Failure) and repair data (MTTR = Mean Time

To Repair) shall be specified for relevant load conditions.

H 200 Design principles


202 The propulsion propellers may be powered from a combination of electric motors, diesel engines and turbines. The minimum requirement of electric propulsion is:

- 2 driving machines (i.e. diesel engine or gas turbine) - 2 generators - 2 electric motors

203 Generators shall be designed to withstand possible harmonic currents without overheating or causing damage.

204 The switchboards shall be equipped with means to detect and extinguish fire.

205 For fixed rpm, induction machines shall be used. The starting torque and starting method shall be adapted to the load torque of the propeller in order to achieve a safe acceleration. The maximum start-up time is 10 seconds.

206 The B-side bearing (opposite shaft journal) on twin bearing motors with one shaft journal shall be isolated from the motor housing for all frequency controlled motors and all motors rated above 200 [kW]. On motors with a continuous shaft with two shaft journals and shaft voltages exceeding 0.5 [Vrms] for slide bearings or 0.1 [Vrms] for ball bearings, the shaft voltages shall be shorted using slip rings. Other solutions may be accepted, given that no current damage on the bearings or other equipment in connection with the motor is caused by shaft voltages. Respect shall be paid to voltages caused by cathodic protection.

Guidance note: Combination of electric motor and diesel engine powering the propeller: If a proper bearing earthing is non-existent, there will be currents floating as indicated in the figure below.



M

Enginegear


207 Transformers may be freshwater cooled, indirectly with double coolers, with direct coolers, or with natural or forced air. Temperature and leakage alarms shall be installed.

208 The requirement for integrated reserve power (ref. E201) does not apply for electric propulsion systems.

209 Power systems fed from the electric propulsion system shall comply with the requirements stated in STANAG 1008.

H 300 System design


302 The installations shall be rated sufficiently to withstand overload caused by manoeuvring, acceleration and emergency manoeuvre.

303 The propulsion system shall be equipped with regulators as part of the power management system (PMS).

304 There shall be a separate power management system (PMS) for each individual supply line for propulsion.

305 The PMS shall consist of independent autonomous components to minimise consequences of a malfunctioning component (voltage drop, transients, and frequency variations). The components shall be controlled both locally and from main control stations.

306 The PMS shall have a master/slave operation option, as well as an independent operational mode to enable common or separate power supply for propulsion.

307 All operator panels for propulsion shall display consumed and available power for propulsion.

308 Means for emergency propulsion control shall be available at a local operating panel (LOP).

309 Emergency operation shall be possible from steering engine room.

H 400 Control System Design

401 Safety functions shall have an override option in case of emergency.



402 The frequency converters shall be equipped with a fault analysis system.

403 The frequency converters shall be easily programmable for authorised personnel onboard.

404 The frequency converters shall have the option to select:

- rpm control - Torque control - Power control

405 Frequency converters for propeller machinery shall have their own earth fault detection and tripping system with a signal to the main alarm system. One malfunctioning frequency converter shall not cause faults in the remaining parts of the installation. Faults causing tripping or reduced performance shall give a signal to power management system (PMS) that shall ensure optimal operation of the remaining installation.

406 Frequency converters shall be cooled indirectly through double freshwater coolers or directly using deionised freshwater.

407 Frequency converters for propulsion shall have at least two individual cooling systems. The converter load capability at reduced cooling shall be specified.

I Converters

I 100 General

101 The requirements given in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.7 generally applies.

102 Converters shall have a 25 % higher capacity than calculated continuous load, except for propulsion systems.

103 Converters shall be mounted on noise/vibration dampers.

104 Converters used in parallel operations shall be designed for load sharing. Normally the load shall be as per % equally shared between the converters, within a limit of +/- 10%

I 200 Transformers

201 The terminal board shall have the phases permanently marked on it.

202 Transformer windings shall be able to withstand humidity, salinity and oil vapours.

203 Transformers for steering equipment shall be located as near as possible to their equipment.

204 Transformers shall be mounted on noise/vibration dampers.

205 In addition to the requirements given in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.8 Sec.6 B, the following tests shall be performed:

- Insulation test in cold and warm condition - Load tests of one hour’s duration



- Measuring of temperature

206 Autotransformers shall not be used.

Guidance note: Autotransformers may be accepted for electric bow thrusters upon special approval by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

I 300 Rotating converters

301 To the degree that the rules are relevant, the same requirements apply to converters as to A.C. generators.

I 400 Static converters

401 Static converters shall be located so that they are adequately cooled.

402 Static converters shall be protected against short circuit and over-loading. Power outputs shall have short-circuit protection.

403 The converters shall have over-voltage protection.

404 Printed circuit boards shall be at least self-extinguishing, and they shall be humidity resistant. The boards shall be fastened in such a manner that resonance vibration is avoided. Components shall be properly fixed to avoid problems due to vibration.

405 The following test shall be carried out for static converters:

- Load tests of one hour’s duration - Measuring of temperature

J A.C. Supply Systems Above 440 V

J 100 Application

101 Equipment for electrical propulsion with ratings above 440 [V] shall meet the requirements stated in relevant IEC standards.

J 200 General requirements

201 Faults shall not cause increased pressure that may present any danger to personnel and surroundings.

Guidance note: In general, this requirement applies to the following types of equipment:

- Switchboards - Converters - Transformers - Motors


202 The ability of cables, transformers, motors and generators to withstand stresses caused by harmonic currents or voltages shall be measured and documented.

203 All equipment shall have a clearly visible warning sign, indicating voltage level.



204 A continuous earth fault detection system with alarm shall be installed. The detection system shall have the option to be split into sections, with one section per galvanic coupled installation.

J 300 Design principles

301 Motors above 440 [V] shall have protection against over-temperature.

302 For generator circuits the following requirements apply:

- Generator circuits are to be provided with a circuit breaker. - The protection system is to include automatic de-excitation of the generator for short-circuits

in the generator itself or in its cables to the switchboard. - An earth fault protection system shall be provided.

303 The secondary side of power transformer switchgear is to be interlocked with the switchgear on the primary side so that the transformer cannot be energised from the secondary side when the primary switchgear is opened.

304 Shore connection circuits shall be approved by NDLO.

305 For voltage transformer circuits the following requirements apply:

- Short-circuit protection (fuses) are not required on the primary side. - The secondary side is to be protected by fuses.

306 For insulation fault protection and monitoring the following requirements apply:

- Automatic disconnection of circuits having insulation faults shall be arranged. This earth fault protection shall operate at 1/3 or less of the earth fault current.

- There shall be arranged an alarm for earth faults.

307 Overvoltage protection shall be arranged for lower-voltage systems supplied through transformers from higher-voltage systems.

308 For high voltage systems the generator neutrals shall be earthed through a large resistance or a Petersen coil. For high resistance earthing, the value of the resistance shall comply with:

RC

j

j

j

n≤

=

1

31

ω

Where: Rj = The earthing resistance C1…Cn = The per phase capacitance (phase-earth) for the individual components galvanic connected to the generator For Petersen coil earthing, the Petersen coil shall be tuned according to:



C 3

1 = L

j

n

j=1

j

ωω

Where: Lj = The total coil and generator inductance. C1…Cn = The per phase capacitances (phase-earth) for the individual components galvanic connected to the generator

Guidance note: For divergent cases with a substantial change in total capacitance, the coil might have to be adjusted to meet the requirement of maximum 2 [A] single-phase earth fault current. The earth fault currents shall be measured after completion of the installation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

J 400 Switch- and control-gear assemblies

401 Switchboards shall be constructed with metal clad enclosures in accordance with IEC 60298.

402 Power circuit breakers shall have the option to be disconnected from the bus, using circuit breakers with a visible gap or indicator, or by pulling the breakers into disconnected position.

403 Signal and control circuits shall, with the exception of necessary short connection leads, be separated from the main circuits with earthed metal partition walls. Fuses shall be accessible without danger to personnel.

J 500 Cables, construction, and testing

501 Cables rated above 1 [kV] and cables rated less than or equal to 1 [kV] shall not share a common cable run. The former shall be clearly marked with voltage level. The cable terminations shall be constructed using material approved by the manufacturer. After completion, the high voltage cables shall be voltage tested according to IEC 60502 (Part 1.3). The cable runs shall withstand the mechanical stress caused by repeated short-circuits. The design of cable runs and the selection of power and signal cables shall be in accordance with the NDLO Cable Specification. This also applies to the arrangement and distance to other circuits in order to avoid electromagnetic interference.

J 600 Miscellaneous equipment

601 Socket-outlets Socket-outlets shall only be used after special approval by NDLO.

K Additional Requirements for D.C. Systems

101 For each compound wound D.C. generator that shall be operated in parallel the circuit breaker shall have a contact for the equalising connection. This shall connect before and break after the main contacts.

102 The return-current relay for D.C. generators with compound windings shall be connected to the pole opposite to the one the compound winding is connected to.

103 Commutator and collector ring machines shall run practically spark free on all relevant loads without damage being done to the commutator or the brushes.



104 Slip rings and commutator segments shall be insulated from earth, and from each other, by mica or another material of similar quality.

105 The commutator segments shall be of cold-rolled copper.

106 It shall be stated how often the brushes have to be replaced.

107 The commutator brushes shall be able to be adjusted in axial direction to avoid wear ridges. The brush rocker shall be adjustable. Normal position shall be marked.

108 For compound wound generators it is required that after adjustment to within ± 1% of rated voltage on 20% load, deviation from the adjusted value is not in excess of 1.5% at full load. On loads from 20 to 100%, maximum deviations from the voltage mean value shall not be in excess of 3%. Deviations shall include the effect of the driving engine’s speed variations.

109 For shunt wound generators, the automatic voltage control shall keep the voltage within ± 2% of the adjusted value between idle and full load at steady state operation. When there is no automatic control, the voltage shall not increase more than 15% above rated voltage when the load is removed. On incremental load there shall be no increase of voltage on the bus bars when the voltage regulator is in function.

110 The voltage of each generator shall be adjustable separately within ± 2.5% of rated voltage. An adjustment accuracy of 0.5% of rated voltage is required for generators of more than 100 [kW], and of 1% for generators under 100 [kW]. The equipment shall make it possible to reduce no load voltage to 10% below rated voltage when the generator is cold (20°C).

111 D.C. generators, for parallel operations, shall be compound wound, and have characteristics that provide stable load distribution on all relevant loads. When the load is between 20 and 100% of rated load, any deviation from the ideal load distribution, in accordance with the output of the generator, shall not exceed 7.5% for generators of equal rating, and 15% for the largest generator in the case of generators of different ratings. The voltage drop over series field winding and connections to the terminal board shall be of equal rating for each generator. Series field windings shall be connected in parallel by means of equalising connections. The cross-sectional area of equalising connections shall be at least 50% of the main cable in the negative pole.

112 D.C. motors with rapid load variations shall have mechanical brakes in addition to the electric one.

113 D.C. motors shall be connected to the driven equipment in such a manner that the load cannot be removed unintentionally.

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.9: Control and Monitoring Page 172


Section 9 Control and Monitoring This section covers rules and regulations regarding control and monitoring systems and functions, in particular computer-based systems. The requirements and regulations within this particular NRAR section are the RNoN supplementary rules to those found in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by NRAR Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Some important abbreviations and definitions are also listed in Pt.0.

Subsection 1 General requirements

A Classification

A 100 Rule applications

101 General Philosophy The overall philosophy with respect to control and monitoring of RNoN vessels is based on the following principles:

a) The design of the control and monitoring system shall as a minimum comply with the intentions of the general requirements of DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC.

Guidance note: This principle implies that the general rules of DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt 4 Ch 9 forms a basis for NRAR Sec 9. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

b) The control and monitoring system shall facilitate low manning in operations with low intensity.

Guidance note: This principle implies that the system shall be designed for periodically unattended machinery spaces and remote control and monitoring of propulsion etc. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

c) The life-cycle cost (LCC) shall be as low as reasonably practicable.

Guidance note: This principle implies that the design shall be computer-based, and shall preferably make use of open (non-proprietary) standards, and make use of COTS-modules. Training of new operators and standardisation between different types of ships is also factors that shall be reflected in the design as far as practicable. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

d) The control and monitoring system shall be designed to withstand military random damages, and facilitate recovery from damages, and operations with damages.

Guidance note: This principle implies that the design shall be based on a distributed topology, with a high-redundancy network which has the capability to reconfigure in a damaged scenario. Manual and local operations of systems shall be possible if the automated systems do not work. For certain ship types there will be required a Damage Control System which shall speed-up and facilitate the work of the damage control organisation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 The rules in this section shall apply for control and monitoring systems on RNoN vessels. This section refers directly to the rules in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt 4 Ch 9 (Control & Monitoring



systems). RNoN vessels shall be designed towards other relevant notations, and in this section will cover NDLO’s overall requirements for control and monitoring systems. For that purpose this section covers NDLO’s additional rules as following:

DNV HLSC – ref NRAR Sec 9 Pt 4 Ch 9 (Control and Monitoring systems) General – requirements in NRAR sec 9 refers

directly to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt 4 Ch 9

Pt 6 Ch 3 (Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces)

NRAR Sec 9 subsection 3D is RNoN additional requirements to DNV HSLCNSC Pt6 Ch3.

Pt 4 Ch 13 (Control and Monitoring of propulsion, directional control, stabilisation and auxiliary systems)

NRAR Sec 9 subsection 3E is RNoN additional requirements to DNV HSLCNSC Pt4 Ch13.

Pt 6 Ch 5 (Integrated Computer Systems) NRAR Sec 9 subsection 4E is RNoN additional requirements to DNV HSLCNSC Pt4 Ch13.

103 Safety functions, alarms, local controls and essential instrumentations are described in NRAR Section 7. NRAR Section 7 also includes requirements regarding LOP’s with any necessary local functions. NRAR Section 9 includes control and monitoring of LOP or local termination cabinet at a higher level

A 200 Classification principles




A 300 Alterations and additions







A 400 Assumptions


B Definitions

B 100 General terms






















B 200 Terms related to computer based system












B 300 Additional Definitions for RNoN Vessels

301 Condition-based maintenance (CBM) system A condition-based maintenance (CBM) system is an independent software tool specially developed to predict and display/present the level and type of optimal maintenance for a ship system (or a defined number of systems). The software makes its analyses/predictions based on inputs from the monitoring and control system and from additional sensors specially installed to perform condition monitoring.

302 Levels of control The following four levels of control are defined: - Platform (or emergency) level control: Platform level control is defined as operating the

platform equipment from its own local operation station on a defined local operating panel (LOP). Platform level control is considered an emergency mode of operation in the case of failure or degradations of the normal remote monitoring and control functions.

Guidance note: Platform level control is not within the scope of NRAR Section 9, Control and Monitoring. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

- Local level remote control: If fitted, local level remote monitoring and control is performed

from a local sub-station in, for example, the machinery space by the use of a local control unit (LCU). This LCU may control the platform equipment in a defined ship area, e.g. a machinery space, or defined ship systems such as the power management-, propulsion- or rudder system. Local level remote control requires less manning than emergency control.

- Remote level back-up control: In case of failure or degradation in the normal remote control of the rudder- and/or propulsion systems, the bridge will have independent hard-wired back-up control for these systems.

- Remote level control: This describes the normal situation when control of the vessel and its sub-systems is made through the monitoring and control system. Monitoring and control is performed from dedicated workstations on the bridge and in the machinery control room.

303 Bumpless transfer Bumpless transfer relates to avoiding unintentional system behaviour due to transfer of rudder- and propulsion control between different user workstations and/or change of operational system modes. Bumpless transfer is in accordance with the fail-to-safety principle.

304 Electrical blackout An electrical blackout is an unintended condition for the electrical plant resulting in no available power on the main switchboards, causing a black-ship condition until generated power again is available.

305 Control system modes Control system modes correspond to the different levels of control, i.e. platform/emergency-, local-, back up-, and normal remote mode. Depending on the type and size of the vessel, the normal remote control mode may include additional modes available to the operator, such as a defined harbour mode or a training mode.

Guidance note: Likewise, the platform systems, e.g. the propulsion- or electrical system, may have defined operational modes depending of the task the vessel is performing, such as a silent propulsion mode or asynchronous electrical generation mode. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



C Documentation

C 100 General

101 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt4 Ch9: The “Approval centre” referred to in table C1, will be NDLO unless stated otherwise.

102 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt4 Ch9: The “Approval centre” referred to in table C2, will be NDLO unless stated otherwise.







109 For computer-based systems the following additional documentation shall be submitted for approval: - Interface documentation for all software and hardware interfaces, including:

o Interface Requirements Specification (IRS) o Software Configuration Management plan o Hardware Configuration Integration (HCI) plan o Real Hardware Item (RHI) specification and plan

- Man-Machine-Interface - Mimics - Necessary information to support/modify the system during its lifetime - System accreditation and security documentation (if applicable) - Failure Mode, Effect and Criticality Analysis (FMECA) - Fail-to-safety analysis

C 200 Type approved products




C 300 Plans and particulars




D Tests

D 100 General

101 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Society is defined in NRAR section 1, A202.

102 Tests in the presence of NDLO representatives according to 200, 300, and 400 shall be performed at the manufacturer’s works.





D 200 Software module testing


D 300 Integration testing



D 400 System testing




D 500 On-board testing



503 The test program for harbour and sea trials shall be approved by NDLO.





Subsection 2 Design Principles

A System Configuration

A 100 General



103 The control and monitoring system shall be designed according to the following principles: - Control units shall be distributed as close to the processes as possible - Sub-systems connected to the monitor and control system shall be designed as autonomous in

order to increase survivability.

104 The control and monitoring system shall be designed on a philosophy of modularity, meaning that the failure or degradation of one system component will not compromise the total system.

105 All user workstations for the control and monitoring system shall be multifunctional, with the same capability of monitoring and control in order to increase the redundancy and versatility of the system.

Guidance note: This requirement relates to both stationary and portable workstations (if applicable). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

106 It shall be possible to perform control and monitoring operations from other locations than the machinery control room and the bridge.

Guidance note: The applicability of this requirement will depend on the type of vessel under consideration. Exceptions from the requirement shall be approved by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

107 If the communication network fails, the system shall be able to resume when connection re-establishes. The server configuration shall be designed redundant, if the primary server fails, the secondary server will operate as server. The primary server will take over the server task when operative. This change in server configuration shall not inflict the control and monitoring system The operator shall be informed when a server reconfiguration has occurred

108 The control and monitoring system shall have a reliability of at least 99% against mission critical failure within a period of 30 consecutive days of operation in accordance with a sailing plan defined by NDLO.

109 All alarms, statuses and commands shall be recorded and time stamped in the control and monitoring system.

110 All equipment under control (EUC) shall be related to a system breakdown structure group, controlled by the control and monitoring system.

Guidance note:



Examples of such control groups may be: Damage-, auxiliary-, propulsion-, power management control- and control system network group. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

111 Based on restricted system access, the control and monitoring system shall support the possibility to split the total scope of system control. It shall be possible to dedicate fragmented scope of control to a defined user workstation.

Guidance note: For example, this may be the case when battle stations are ordered and the damage control officer must concentrate his/her work to damage monitoring and control tasks only. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: This functionality may not be applicable on smaller vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

112 The communication link in harbour between the control and monitoring system and the remote control station shall have the capacity to support the remote control and monitoring functions such that there is no significant deterioration of performance (e.g. response times) compared to normal/onboard operation.

113 The systems hardware and software shall be designed to enable future modification, upgrade and replacements. Ref Subsection 4 A 504.

A 200 Field instrumentation





205 Propulsion control systems shall have their own emergency power supply with a capacity to power the propulsion control system for at least 4 hours.

Guidance note: Propulsion engines and engines for power supply with electronic governor and electronic fuel injection shall have their own emergency power supply sufficient for 4 hours uninterrupted. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A 300 System


A 400 Integrated system





B Response to Failures

B 100 Failure detection



103 Monitoring and control system components shall be monitored.

Guidance note: This includes build-in test equipment (BITE). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

104 Monitoring and control system component statuses shall be provided to the user.

105 The operator shall be informed about the consequences of a monitoring and control system failure.

Guidance note: The monitoring and control system failure may, for example, include loss of redundancy in network or monitoring. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

106 In the case of a component failure in the monitoring and control system, an alarm shall be issued, making the operator aware of the failure and that the redundancy of the function has been reduced or lost.

B 200 System response



203 In case control signals, electrical power or mechanical controls are lost, essential equipment shall automatically enter an operation mode safe to personnel, operation and other equipment. An alarm shall be activated to notify this change of operation mode.

204 The monitoring and control system shall control all applicable systems according to the principles of fail-to-safety and bumpless transfer.

205 In the case of component failure in the monitor and control system, processes that cannot be handled manually by the operator shall be brought to a safe state by automatic safety processes independent of the control functions.

Guidance note: In case of component/system failure the monitoring and control system should take the system to an inactive state in a controlled way. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



C Emergency Operation

C 100 Manual emergency operation

101 Essential equipment, systems and other objects shall be designed such that actuators or other necessary control and monitoring equipment allow manual emergency operation, with or without auxiliaries.

102 Emergency operation auxiliaries shall be mounted rigidly on the essential system.

Guidance note: It shall not be required to assemble any emergency operation tools, handlebars, sticks, etc. to perform manual operation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

103 A communication system for emergency operation shall be installed.

Subsection 3 System Design

A System Elements

A 100 General




104 The extent of monitoring will be specified on a project-by-project basis. The requirement stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.9 G101 shall apply as a minimum.

105 The extent of control will be specified on a project-by-project basis. The requirement stated in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.9 G102 shall apply as a minimum.

106 A monitoring and control system is intended to cover the following four functions: 1) Provide monitoring/alarm: Alarm the user when a process segment or equipment under

control (EUC) enters an abnormal condition. Provide the user with system status overview information.

2) Provide remote control: Render the possibility to remotely control connected ship systems. 3) Provide automatic control: Automatic control of certain parameters, e.g. to keep/maintain

process segments within defined limits. 4) Provide a safety system: Intervene when certain abnormal situation is about to occur, or has

occurred, in order to effectuate defined actions (e.g. shut down and slow down) to secure important and essential equipment from damage and/or breakdown.

Guidance note: The monitoring and control system is to be defined as an essential instrumentation and automation system. Reference is given to DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.1 B103. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



A 200 Automatic control






A 300 Remote control




304 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Transfer of propulsion- or rudder control responsibility from one operator/user station to another shall be based on an approved take/request procedure. The following requirements shall apply: - In response to a user’s request for transfer of control, the control system shall provide the user

with support information regarding conditions that are yet to be fulfilled and/or actions that need to be taken.

- The control system shall not allow a transfer of control to be initiated without ensuring that the necessary conditions are fulfilled Guidance note: Necessary conditions to be fulfilled in a request for transfer of control procedure shall be approved by NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---




308 In the event of failure or degradation in the remote control of essential systems, it shall from the bridge be possible to transfer these functions to an independent hard-wired back-up system.

309 It shall be possible to transfer propulsion- and rudder orders from the bridge to the machinery control room (MCR) and machinery space(s) using independent hard-wired communication links.

A 400 Protective safety system









A 500 Alarms















515 If parts of the fire detection system are temporarily disconnected/disabled, the control and monitoring system shall clearly display this by a visual warning.

516 In order to optimise the monitoring and alarm handling system, and based on restricted system access, the following software properties shall be supported: - Possibility to adjust alarm sensor parameters, such as limit value(s) and time delay. - Possibility to set alarm sensors in off-scan mode. - Possibility to inhibit alarms.



- Possibility to filter alarms due to predefined alarm priority level in order to separate critical from non-critical alarms.

- Possibility to filter alarms due to frequency of appearance for a defined period of time. - Alarms shall be time stamped. Both first occurrence and latest repeating of an alarm shall be

shown in the alarm list.

Guidance note: The log of adjustments made to alarm limits, time delays etc. should contain date and time of adjustment/change, who performed the change, and preferably a possibility to make a comment about the changes made. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A 600 Indication




A 700 Planning and reporting


A 800 Calculation, simulation and decision support


802 If system operates in simulation mode this should be clearly visible.

803 Onboard training system The monitoring and control system shall have the possibility to support user group training. The system shall have the capability to simulate several simultaneous incidents. The incidents that shall be possible to simulate shall include, but not be limited to, fire, flooding, and equipment degradation/loss. It shall be possible to utilise all user workstations in such training, although at least one workstation will at all times be dedicated to normal monitoring and control. Onboard training shall not affect the normal operation of the monitoring and control system.

Guidance: This requirement may not be applicable for smaller vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A 900 Condition-based maintenance monitoring

901 The monitoring and control system shall log operating hours for relevant equipment to support maintenance planning.

Guidance note: Relevant equipment will be specified in cooperation with the NDLO. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

902 In addition to normal storage for trend curve representation and short history data, the monitoring and control system shall include a storage medium that history data shall be transferred to and stored, as well as retrieved from when needed.

903 The monitoring and control system shall enable the transfer of historical condition data to a storage medium outside the vessel’s monitoring and control system.



904 The monitoring and control system shall export data to a condition-based maintenance software tool based on a current standard multitasking operating system.

905 The monitoring and control system shall monitor the supply of fuel oil to machinery from the cleaning system and the service tanks.

906 The monitoring and control system shall have the capability to measure and calculate the fuel consumption.

B General Requirements

B 100 System operation and maintenance



B 200 Power supply requirements for control and monitoring systems







C Additional Requirements for System Design of HS, LC and NSC

C 100 Alarm system in the accommodation

101 It shall be possible to transfer the watch duty-/alarm responsibility from the machinery control room to other control locations, thus leaving the machinery control room unattended. Cabins for engineering officers and enlisted, recreation rooms and mess-rooms shall be equipped with a watch-calling system with information about the alarms system, and facilities to mute the local acoustic alarm.

Guidance note: This requirement only applies for ship systems intended for DNV’s class notation E0 as defined in HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.13 Sec.3. Class notation E0 applies to periodically unattended machinery spaces. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 If alarms are not acknowledged within a defined time limit, all watch-calling units shall be activated.



103 Watch-calling units in cabins, recreation rooms, and mess rooms shall be located adjacent to the exit door.

D Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces

D 100 General

101 Unattended Machinery Spaces (UMS) For RNoN vessels designed for unattended machinery spaces, the requirements in DNV HSLCNSC Pt 6 Ch 3 (Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces) apply in general, and additional requirements are given in this section. In the case of conflict between the rules/requirements of this NRAR section and any rules given in DNV’s HSLCNSC regarding control and monitoring systems and functions, the rules stated in this NRAR section shall apply.

102 It shall be possible to monitor the amount of received/delivered fuel oil through the filling pipe from the monitoring and control system.

103 It shall be possible from the monitoring and control system to control the flow rate of fuel oil through the filling pipe, the transfer of fuel between tanks, and the level of fuel oil in the storage tanks.

104 A Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system shall enable remote monitoring of spaces that are considered hazard area operation.

Guidance note: Examples of possible hazardous areas: - Replenishment at sea (RAS) positions - Gangways - Quarter-deck - Man Over Board (MOB) davit and launching position - Helicopter deck and hangar - ROV/AUV deck, launch and recovery area Vessel size and type may render parts of this requirement unnecessary. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 For watch-keeping in harbour, monitoring functions for fire and flooding detection shall be possible to transfer to a station outside the ship.

106 For watch-keeping in harbour, the vessel shall support the capability to monitor other vessels. The scope of such monitoring will be defined on a project-by-project basis.

107 Means shall be available to control and monitor the fire detection and extinguishing systems and the bilge fluid detection and removal system when the vessel is out of normal operation.

Guidance note: The control and monitoring may be from a manned location on board the vessel or from a position outside the vessel (from shore or from another vessel). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

D 200 Power management system

201 The power management control system is considered an essential system.

Guidance note:



The power management system (PMS) is an independent and integrated part of the monitoring and control system. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 It shall be possible to remotely monitor and control all outgoing feeders in the main switchboards from the monitoring and control system.

203 It shall be possible to remotely monitor and control all outgoing feeders for vital loads in zonal switchboards from the monitoring and control system.

Guidance note: Three types of loads are defined: - Vital for survivability - Vital for mission - Sheddable

According to NRAR Section 8 B400, vital loads shall be marked by colour code red, blue, or green. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: This requirement is not applicable to small vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

204 It shall be possible to monitor and remotely control the manual changeover switches from the monitoring and control system. The monitoring and control system shall monitor the earth failure monitoring systems in all galvanic isolated nets where such systems are installed.

205 The monitoring and control system shall monitor power connection systems such as shore connections and power supplies, and ensure that transfer of power is performed in a secured way.

206 The monitoring and control system shall monitor transformers, frequency converters, battery chargers, batteries and rectifiers.

E Control and Monitoring of Propulsion, Directional Control, Stabilisation and Auxiliary Systems

E 100 General

101 Control and Monitoring of Propulsion, Directional Control, Stabilisation and Auxiliary Systems

The requirements in DNV HSLCNSC Pt 4 Ch 13 (Control and monitoring of propulsion, directional control, stabilisation and auxiliary systems apply in general for RNoN vessels, and additional requirements are given in this section. In the case of conflict between the rules/requirements of this NRAR section and any rules given in DNV’s HSLCNSC regarding control and monitoring systems and functions, the rules stated in this NRAR section shall apply.

102 In normal operation the monitoring and control system shall control the optimal propulsion between dead in water and maximum continuous rating for the propulsive engines. By activating an interlock, slow down functions and/or power output may be overridden.

103 The rudder- and propulsion system shall as a minimum be possible to monitor and control from the bridge, the machinery control room, and locally in the machinery space(s).



E 200 Stabiliser control system

201 The stabiliser control system shall be designed to handle extreme load changes.

202 The stabilisers shall be remotely monitored and controlled from the bridge. It shall also be possible to control the stabilisers locally in the machinery room.

203 The stabilising fins shall automatically be put in a preset locked position when the ship speed is below the designed working range of the stabilising system.

E 300 Ride control system

301 The Ride Control System (RCS) shall as a minimum be able to monitor and control the following: - Lift fans including shaft systems and bearings - Astern bag fans, both pumps, shaft and bearings - RCS dampers position - The status, mode and function of the RCS control system

Guidance note: This requirement only relates to vessels with applicable systems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Subsection 4 Additional Requirements for Computer Based Systems


A 100 Assignment of responsibility when installing integrated systems


A 200 System dependency


A 300 Storage devices



A 400 Computer usage


A 500 System response and capacity


e) The monitoring/alarm system shall be based on the following design principles:

- Alarms shall alert, inform and guide the user - Alarms shall be useful and relevant



- Alarms shall have a defined response

Guidance note: The key element in alarm system performance is the human users, and therefore the system must be designed to match the human users’ needs. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

f) The monitoring/alarm system philosophy shall be based on three alarm level priorities:

1) Alarms indicating abnormal conditions that may cause harm to personnel, equipment or

environment, and which need immediate attention or action by the user. 2) Alarms indicating abnormal conditions that may lead to severe process disturbances and

problems. Quick user attention and/or action are required, but there will normally be available time to consider the best options.

3) Alarms indicating abnormal conditions that need the user’s attention, although there is no immediate danger for severe process disturbances and problems.



504 A growth margin of at least 30% is required for electronic cabinets. This is related to input and output devices and circuit boards, to ensure that new upgrades, both software and hardware, can be installed. Rules regarding growth margin apply for both essential and important control and monitoring equipment. NDLO shall specify the growth margin for non important equipment. These rules apply for each cabinet, termination cabinet including everything from LOP or local termination cabinet to top system, and field instrumentation. These rules apply for all wiring between cabinets and termination cabinets or other means of signal transfer.

Guidance note: For smaller vessels where space or displacement is a critical parameter, this requirement for minimum growth margin may be reduced. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

505 The overall performance requirements (eg. response time, bandwidth, dataflow, storage capacity, etc.) of platform management system shall be designed to meet the growth margin.

A 600 Temperature control


A 700 System maintenance



A 800 System access





A 900 System Security

901 The monitoring and control system shall enable need-to-know access restrictions placed on all information stored or processed as well as all commands available on the monitoring and control system.

902 The monitoring and control system shall be able to require users to identify and authenticate themselves to it before the users get access to (selected) functions and information.

903 The monitoring and control system shall provide selective auditing of all accesses and attempted accesses to the monitoring and control system.

904 The monitoring and control system password mechanism shall have the following strength and structure:

- minimum length of 8 characters - be different from the user's previous 5 passwords - be stored encrypted - possibility to assign the password a minimum life span

905 The monitoring and control system shall not allow that:

• systems/users external to the monitoring and control system perform remote log-in • systems/users external to the monitoring and control system perform remote monitoring and

control system supervision/maintenance • systems/users external to the monitoring and control system perform remote software

activation • downloading of software is performed through external connections

906 The monitoring and control system shall provide functionality to allow the operator to temporarily hide the contents of the operator screen, where the functionality:

• can be activated manually • is deactivated by specifying the operator password

Guidance note: The monitoring and control system shall inform the officer on watch which user account that is blocked and on which console the log-on attempts is made. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

907 The monitoring and control system shall provide the possibility to automatically block a user account after given number (1:10) of failed log-on attempts within a given time period.

908 The monitoring and control system shall provide functions to maintain the log and to view log reports with the possibility to filter on information including but not limited to:

• date and time • operator identity • security related event • command result i.e. whether the command was successful or not • terminal identity (for log on attempts)

909 The monitoring and control system shall provide an audit storage capacity allowing minimum 60 days of continuous operation of the monitoring and control system and where as a minimum 20% of the audit storage capacity remains unused after 60 days. The monitoring and control system shall notify the monitoring and control system administrator if the amount of stored audit information exceeds a customisable threshold value (related to the audit storage capacity).



910 The monitoring and control system shall provide functions for automatic backup and manual restore of the monitoring and control system software, databases and other stored information (backup of dynamic information is not required). The monitoring and control system backup function shall not impact the performance of the monitoring and control system ship control capability.

911 The monitoring and control system shall only allow communication between monitoring and control system subsystems and external systems with different security classification or operational mode through:

• a manual security review and release position, • or physically separated interfaces (e.g. diskette drive) • or through one-way filters ensuring that no classified information flows from the monitoring

and control system to the system with lower security classification

912 The following monitoring and control system components shall have facilities to be locked separately, or inside a cabinet with key not part of the main key system of the vessel :

• All monitoring and control system operator positions (with computers) able to perform monitor and control functions

• Network components (switches etc) • Recording devices (e. g. backup)

913 Any monitoring and control system equipment storing/processing "BEGRENSET" (RESTRICTED) information shall be installed/placed in lockable rooms.

914 The monitoring and control system shall only allow installation/loading of new or revised monitoring and control system software from storage media by means of physical and/or computer program security measures.

915 The monitoring and control system software shall include virus checking software which will be able to run:

• automatically at monitoring and control system start-up • initiated manually by the operator • automatically when diskettes or similar storage media are introduced into the system.

916 No wireless LAN or other wireless configuration of the monitoring and control system shall be possible. Unless authorized by NDLO

Guidance note: Wireless equipment may be installed upon NDLO approval. Computers etc. with built in wireless utilities shall be inhibited by default.


B System Software

B 100 Software requirements









B 200 Software development




C Control system Networks and Data Communications Links

C 100 General










110

DNV rules fully applicable.



113

DNV rules fully applicable.





C 200 Network analysis


C 300 Network test and verification


C 400 Network documentation requirements


C 500 Wireless communication










C 600 Documentation of wireless communication


D User Interface

D 100 General

101 The user interface of the system shall show all required information in a clear and unambiguous form.

Guidance note: Vessel specific operational characteristics, such as high speed, sea capabilities, vibrations etc., must be taken into account when designing the user interface in order to ensure safe operation. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: System mimics should use a background colour that gives a good contrast to the system objects, preferably light grey. In general, static object colours should be used moderately. Active objects, changing colour due to system status, should be of the brightest colours. The use of cyan colours (very bright colours) should be avoided. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



102 Mimic objects (or icons) that reflect changes in the status of systems- or equipment shall have the following colours: Grey - Objects indicating an inactive EUC (e.g. stopped/closed) Green - Objects indicating an active EUC (e.g. running/open) Red - Objects indicating a failure in an EUC Yellow - Objects indicating a EUC in stand-by mode White - Objects indicating a EUC in local control mode Flashing red – Objects indicating not acknowledged failure/alarm Flashing green – Objects indicating EUC in start/opening process (no steady state) Flashing grey – Objects indicating EUC in stop/closing process (no steady state

103 The system shall display information using toolbar menus and icons of a consistent and standardised format. State of the art control technology shall be utilised.

104 All screenbased mimics shall be possible to reach within three clicks on the control tool.

105 The mimic texts for monitoring and control system alarms shall be given in Norwegian.

Guidance note: Wording in English may be accepted upon NDLO approval.


E Damage Control System

E 100 General requirements

101 The monitoring and control system shall support a damage control indication designed to enhance manual methods of monitoring and reporting damage control incidents/status and the subsequent follow-up actions onboard. This chapter describes the requirement for a comprehensive monitoring and control system to support aid to the Damage Control (DC) organisation. By this support the DC can be performed in an effective way without time delay, and with a minimum need for personnel. This chapter further describes the requirements for a Decision Support system designed to give the DC officer enough information to make informed decisions on resource allocation. The system will in addition support the Commanding Officer with mission decision aid by supporting updated operational status images of the ships major systems.

102 The monitoring and control system shall support interfaces to applicable networks/systems.

Guidance note: This includes both hardware and software interfaces. Applicable network/system interfaces may include the following: - Platform systems intended for remote monitoring and control - Weapon systems - Navigation system - Administrative system - On-board training system - Wireless paging system - Another vessel and/or land facility provided for monitoring and/or control The applicable networks/systems will depend on vessel type, vessel size, and vessel’s mission, and will be identified on a project-by-project basis..




103 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) shall support damage control surveillance of defined high-risk areas throughout the vessel. The extent of CCTV monitoring will be identified on a project-by-project basis. As a minimum, all machinery spaces and areas regarded as potential fire risk areas shall be covered.

E 200 User Interface

201 The monitoring and control system shall enable computer-based NBCD plotting from all user workstations, with a comprehensive card-index file of ship incidents and the status of all NBCD systems.

Guidance note: For this purpose the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN) uses standardised symbols defined in SMP-17(A) Part B. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 Any change in a damage incident situation, either automatically by sensor input or manually by computer-based NBCD plotting, shall result in an automatical update of the incident’s status log and timetable. The functionality shall be approved by NDLO.

Guidance note: For this purpose the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN) uses standardised symbols defined in SMP-17(A) Part B. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

203 The monitoring and control system shall at all times present visible information of the present ordered equipment protection level. The CCTV system shall have a camera lock-on function that responds to activated fire or flooding alarms.

204 The user interface of the system shall show all required information in a clear and unambiguous form, and be used while wearing anti-flash clothing.

205 The system shall use toolbar menus of standardised and well known icons.

206 For the damage control officer to make informed decisions on resource allocation, this system shall have a comprehensive display of ship incidents, and status of all NBCD systems.

207 The monitoring and control system shall support the use of predefined checklists and information (“kill-cards”) for decision support, where this is relevant. The extent of such tools will be specified by NDLO on a project-by-project basis.

208 In order to keep track of personnel status and provide decision support on crew allocation, the monitoring and control system shall hold a muster roll (i.e. a database) containing crew positions in all operational situations. The muster roll shall be fully revisable by NDLO during the lifetime of the ship.

Guidance note: The muster roll is a list/roster containing a manning plan according to all watch conditions. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



209 The system shall provide a single overview screen showing the vessel in the profile view and the selected deck levels in plan view, according to the damage situation, containing incident- and major ship systems status.

210 The Damage Control system shall audio visually present all alarms from fire, flooding and NBCD systems to an interface for a overview screen with automatic display of location.

211 In the Machinery Control Room the Damage Control and Decision Support system shall be able to present the damage control status on a large screen or board visual and readable from all operator positions. This also regards to ensure sufficient free space.

212 The Damage Control decision support features shall have continuity if network fails, and facilities to synchronize damage control system when connection re-establishes.

E 300 Communication

301 Damage control system shall present and transfer internal information’s and messages within the NBCD organisation.

302 Reports of incidents and / or status change throughout the ship shall be simultaneous to all control stations, and automatically cause an update of status log.

E 400 NBC, monitoring and control

401 To be able to get quick response to NBC measurements there is a need for early warning and easy operation of NBC equipment in order to take correct countermeasures against the NBC threat.

402 Damage control system shall monitor radiation and gas contamination.

403 The damage control system shall monitor and control the pre-wetting system.

404 For vessels equipped with a system to maintain overpressure in the citadel, this pressure shall be monitored by the monitoring and control system.

E 500 Fire fighting system, monitoring and control

501 Fire detection system and fixed fire extinguishing systems shall be monitored and controlled by the damage control system. The Fire detection system shall be autonomous and shall not be inflected by faults in the monitoring and control system or its network.

502 The location of a fire shall automatically be presented on the presentation screen in the Damage Control system.

503 In the case of a fire alarm, the monitoring and control system shall automatically close fire retardant doors. Relevant doors are to be defined by NDLO.

Guidance note: Warning by means of flashing lights before automatic closing. Possibilities for manual override of automatic closing to be implemented. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

504 The damage control system shall include a fault warning function which automatically and continuously monitors the fire sensors to detect any abnormal operational condition.



505 The philosophy for automatic control of the ventilation system in accordance with damage control shall be approved by NDLO.

506 The damage control system shall monitor selected doors and hatches throughout the ship.

507 For limited periods, authorised personnel shall have possibility to remotely turn off the fire detection system in the engine room from the damage control system.

508 When a fire alarm sensor is activated the damage control indications display shall be able to differ the presentation due to type of fire sensor in alarm.

Guidance note: This relates to flame (optical), heat or smoke sensors in order to better support damage control management ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 600 Flooding, monitoring and control

601 The monitoring and control system shall, independent of the bilge system, enable the detection of water intrusion or leakage in all compartments, which by the nature of their function, equipment or location can be subjected to inadvertent flooding. This includes compartments subject to leakage in larger cooling system above the waterline. E.g. leakage detection in the radar cooling system

Guidance: This requirement may not be applicable for smaller vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

602 The location of a leakage or flooding shall automatically be presented on the presentation screen in the Damage Control system.

603 The monitoring and control system shall be able to support stability calculations, including both static and dynamic parameters, to detect damage stability and intact stability conditions. The stability calculations shall include top deck icing. The monitoring and control system shall continuously calculate the vessel´s static pitch angle. The Monitoring and control system shall calculate the vessel´s submersion at the load-line marks. The stability calculations shall include the possibility for the user to introduce other concentrated loads.

Guidance note: This requirement may not be applicable for smaller vessels. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



Subsection 5 Component Design and Installation

A General

A 100 Environmental strains




A 200 Materials


A 300 Component design and installation









A 400 Maintenance, checking


A 500 Marking


A 600 Standardising DNV rules fully applicable.

B Environmental Conditions, Instrumentation

B 100 General




B 200 Electric power supply





B 300 Pneumatic and hydraulic power supply


B 400 Temperature





405 Table C1 is an extension of Table B1 of DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.5. Table C1 Parameter class for the different locations on board Parameter

Class Location

E Open deck, masts for vessels to operate in arctic climate

Temperature

F Inside cabinets and desks with temperature rise of 5°C or more installed in location E

406 Class E: Ambient temperatures − 40°C to + 55°C.

407 Class F: Ambient temperatures − 40°C to + 70°C.

408 Cabinets exposed to temperature variations and/or water spray shall be designed and equipped such that unacceptable humidity and/or frost, which may reduce the functionality of the equipment, are prevented.

409 For monitoring and control equipment, the requirements given in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 Sec.5 shall apply, unless NBC class requirements (DNV HSLCNSC Pt.6 Ch.10 Sec.3) give higher temperature classes in which these classes shall apply.

B 500 Humidity





B 600 Salt contamination


B 700 Oil contamination


B 800 Vibrations




B 900 Inclination


902 See DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Part 5 Ch.14 Sec.7 A100.

B 1000 Electromagnetic compatibility

1001 Refer to NRAR Section 14.

B 1100 Miscellaneous



B 1200 Shock

1201 All essential and important control and monitoring equipment are to be designed for a contractual shock load as defined in Sec.1 D300.

1202 Shock requirements, and the treatment of shock for RNoN vessels, will be given in specific guidelines by NDLO.

C Electrical end Electronic Equipment

C 100 General



C 200 Mechanical design, installation DNV rules fully applicable.




C 300 Protection provided by enclosure


302 Minimum requirement for enclosure on bridge shall normally be IP44 unless the risk for water ingress on the bridge is small.

303 With regard to enclosures, reference is made to NRAR Section 8 B600.

C 400 Cables and wires


C 500 Cable installation


C 600 Power supply








C 700 Fibre optic equipment





C 800 Sensors

801 For sensors belonging to essential functions, use of switches shall be avoided as far as practicable.



802 All measured and calculated values presented by the monitoring and control system shall have a total accuracy fit for purpose. The total accuracy for presented values shall be documented through analysis and shall be approved by NDLO. Analysis of the total accuracy of the presented values shall include all relevant static sources to the uncertainty in the measurement (such as linearity, repeatability etc). The analysis shall in addition cover dynamic characteristics to demonstrate that the system is fit for measuring dynamic changes of the measured value.

Subsection 6 User Interface

A General

A 100 Application


A 200 Introduction



B Workstation Design and Arrangement

B 100 Location of visual display units and user input devices






104 The user workstations shall be designed and equipped to optimise safe operation of the user interface in all modes of operation. The man machine interface (MMI) strategy for the monitoring and control system shall be approved by NDLO.

Guidance note: Modes of operation include damage- and/or battle situations while wearing anti-flash clothing. Anti-flash clothing is utilised onboard naval ship in damage- or battle situation. It contains gloves and a hood covering head and neck made of an anti-flammable material. It must be possible to operate the monitoring and control system stations while wearing anti-flash gloves. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

C User Input Device and Display Unit Design

C 100 User input devices







C 200 Visual display units





C 300 Colours


C 400 Requirements for preservation of night vision (UIDs and VUDs for installation on the navigating bridge)






D Screen Based Systems

D 100 General









109 DNV rules fully applicable. .

D 200 Illumination


D 300 Colour screens


D 400 Computer dialogue








D 500 Application screen views


The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.10: Fire Safety Page 205


Section 10 Fire Safety This section covers requirements regarding fire safety. Fire safety requirements for FRP naval vessels are dealt with in section 11. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0. Unless expressly specified, this section shall comply with ANEP-77 "Naval ship code", Chapter VI Fire Safety, Edition 3

A General

A 100 General

101 Designs that are documented to provide equivalent safety to prescriptive rule requirements can be accepted by the Naval Administration. Alternative design and arrangements can be accepted based on relevant documentation, as it is acknowledged that there are significant difference between a naval vessel and a commercial vessel. Alternative design and arrangements to meet the minimum fire safety level as defined by the SOLAS Ch II-2, is accepted when documented in accordance with the procedures given in SOLAS Reg.II-2/17. This might include the use of other materials than steel in parts of the vessel. For each vessel type, design fire threat levels shall be established, including weapon damages. This is a part of the total threat analysis.

Guidance note: The design threats might imply deviations from SOLAS and DNV requirements, as these requirements are based on protection against areas with statistically high fire risk during normal operations, and not random weapon damages For the DNV’s recommended practices and interpretations to SOLAS regulations, see Pt.4 Ch.10 App.A in the Rules for Classification of Ships MSC/Circ. 1002 “Guidelines on Alternative Design and Arrangements for Fire Safety” outlines the methodology for the engineering analysis required by SOLAS II-2/Regulation 17. Aluminium in load carrying structures shall only be used for to naval vessels designed for a threat level that is not implying a rapid fire development outside areas with structural fire protection ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 Fire fighting components and systems required to be of an approved type shall be approved by a recognized society. Documentation verifying approval shall in such cases be submitted. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 A102)

103 Following rules apply in addition to Rule Basis: All fire divisions and penetration thereof shall be designed to resist a contractual shock level, in addition to internal blast requirements (for selected) divisions, dependent on weapon damage scenario, fire threat analysis and survivability requirements.



B Rule References and Definitions

B 100 Definitions Rules for ships/High Speed Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec. 7

In order to accommodate a wide range of naval craft with different requirements for survivability, the following machinery space arrangements are defined: Basic machinery space configuration (B): Main propulsion units placed in one compartment. There is no requirement for propulsion power after flooding or fire in the machinery space. This arrangement requires acceptance by the contracting Navy. Standard machinery space configuration (S): Main propulsion units are placed in separate compartments divided by a watertight and fire insulated bulkhead. Reduced propulsion power will be available after flooding or fire in any of the compartments. Enhanced machinery space configuration (E): Main propulsion units placed in separate compartments with a compartment in between where the bulkheads are watertight and fire insulated. Reduced propulsion power will be available after fire in any one of the compartments or flooding from a certain damage length as defined in Sec.5. Machinery space configuration Standard (S) is considered as default unless otherwise agreed.

C Documentation

C 100 Requirements for documentation

101 The following plans and particulars shall be submitted for approval:

- Fire pumps and fire main - Capacity calculation for fire pumps - Fixed fire extinguishing arrangement in engine, boiler room and other spaces where a

fixed fire extinguishing system is required. Specification and location of equipment and calculation of discharge capacities, if required

- Fire control plan - Fixed fire detection and fire alarm systems in accommodation spaces, service spaces,

machinery spaces (including TV monitoring system) and other special spaces, if required. Specification and location of detectors, equipment alarms and call points. Wiring diagrams for the system

- Ventilation systems. Layout, dimensions and penetrations of ducts through fire divisions and details of fire dampers

- Penetration of cables and pipes through fire divisions - Arrangement of means of control for closure of openings, stopping of ventilation fans and

stopping of fuel oil pumps in machinery spaces of category A - Bulkheads and decks within fire control zones. General arrangement plan showing fire

control zones, the fire insulation and draught stops. Details of insulation and specification of materials

- Fire doors and hatches in different types of bulkheads and specification of doors and hatches

- Deck coverings and surface materials specification and positions. Calculation of restricted use of combustible materials

- Furniture and textile materials specification and positions - Means of escape from different compartments. - Pressure loss calculations for piping in fire-extinguishing systems



D Fire Control Zones

D 100 Fire control zones

101 Boundaries for fire control zones shall as far as possible coincide with boundaries for NBC zones.

102 The fire control zones shall be ventilated and served by an independent fan and duct system. Regarding NBC requirements for ventilation systems see Pt.6 Ch.10 in the Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 E104)

E Fire Integrity of Bulkheads and Decks

E 100 Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks

101 In addition to complying with the specific provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and deck mentioned elsewhere in this subsection, the minimum fire integrity of bulkheads and decks shall be as described in SOLAS Ch. II-2 Regulation 9 for cargo ships, with the following additions given in Pt.4 Ch.10 in the Rules for Classification of Ships.

• Boundaries of the wheelhouse and of the machinery spaces shall be A-60 class against adjacent spaces. Where, in the opinion of the Naval Administration, the adjacent spaces are of negligible fire risk, the boundaries may be A-0 class. (Rules for Ships, January 2011 Pt.4 Ch.10 Sec.2 B701)

• Boundaries of escape routes shall be of B-0 class. (Rules for Ships, January 2011 Pt.4 Ch.10 Sec.2 B701)

However, the fire risk categories of spaces in these rules are given as guidance – the content and fire risk in each room shall be established ( by the means of a fire threat analysis) to give each room the correct category number. A fire threat analysis combined with survivability and mission capability requirements may require added protection of high value rooms with equipment and/or personnel that is critical for the function of the rooms, and added protection of control stations. If a wartime scenario is identified as relevant in the fire threat analysis, the boundaries of these rooms shall be protected to minimum “A-15” level for bulkheads and minimum “A-30” for deck below – see guidance note. In general, a minimum of “B-15” division shall apply to divisions towards corridors/escape routes. If an “A”-class division is required, this should be at least “A-15”

Guidance note: Operation rooms, weapon system rooms, radar rooms, gyro rooms, etc might be regarded as “high value rooms”. Note that SOLAS Ch. II-2/Regulation 9 might imply stricter requirements for some boundaries of control stations (see SOLAS Ch. II-1/Regulation 3 for definitions). If random weapon damages scenarios are relevant, the bulkheads towards main escape/damage control corridors shall be structural division in steel of minimum “A-15” ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 For engine room bulkheads separating main propulsion units, the following apply:

o For vessels with standard engine room configuration, the division separating the main propulsion units shall be at least A-60.

o For vessels with enhanced engine room configuration, the compartment separating the propulsion units shall be at least 600mm wide, consist of A-class boundaries, and be insulated according to SOLAS CH. II-2/Regulation 9 for cargo ships.



Fire insulation materials shall preferably be laid on the outside of rooms with explosive risk, e.g. storage rooms for explosives and loading rooms. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 F103 Modified) Guidance note: Standard and enhanced engine room configurations are used to describe propulsion redundancy, and are defined in Sec.7.


103 Rule Basis apply if no random weapon damages with internal fragment, blast or shock effects are defined If fire threat and random weapon damages analysis includes such effects, no “B” class divisions are allowed as part of a “A”-class division.

104 External boundaries which are required in D101 to be of steel or other equivalent material may be piercedfor the fitting of windows and sidescuttles provided that blind covers of steel are fitted at the inside of the structure. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 F106)

E 200 Division penetrations

201 Ducts with cross section less than 0.02 m2, shall be in steel at the penetration, or have a steel sleeve, at a minimum length of 450 + 450 mm, equally divided on both sides of the fire division. Ducts shall be insulated at least 450 mm on the side of the fire threat.

Guidance note: If aluminium is used in ducts outside the areas of the penetration, it must be verified (test or analysis) that the aluminium in the protected room/other side of the fire will not melt during the appropriate time. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

F Ventilation Systems

F 100 Requirements for ventilation system

101 The ventilation system shall comply with SOLAS Ch. II-2/5.2, 8.2, 9.4 and 9.7 as applicable to passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 H101) In addition the requirements stated in NRAR Section 6 (Piping Systems) G800 (Ventilation systems) shall apply. See also Section 10 E for penetrations of fire divisions

102 The main inlets of all ventilation shall as far as practicable be located in a safe distance from the exhaust of weapon systems and outlets from stores and tanks with flammable liquids. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 H102)

103 For vessels with standard or enhanced engine room configuration (as defined in Sec.7), the ventilation system serving one propulsion line shall not be connected to the system serving the other propulsion line.



(Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 H103)

104 Means shall be provided to evacuate smoke from spaces without reversing the fans and without using the ordinary ventilation system. Portable smoke removal fans shall in this connection be located in each fire control zone.

Guidance note: A portable smoke removal fan may be of smoke extraction type or overpressure type. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

(Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 H104) In addition it is acceptable to use the ordinary ventilation system, if it has built in capabilities of evacuating smoke and will not spread smoke or fire to other compartments.

105 It shall be possible to remotely operate ventilation fans and dampers from control stations for both shutdown and opening.

G Material Requirements

G 100 Restricted use of combustible material

101 Following rules apply in addition to Rule Basis. All pipe and duct insulation, even for cold service systems, shall be non-combustible. The surface of such insulation shall comply with fire reaction requirements according to FTP-code requirements for bulkhead and ceiling lining (FTP Code Part 2 and 5), ref. SOLAS Ch.II-2/Regulation 6

102 The following requirements shall be complied with:

1. Accommodation spaces shall comply with requirements to rooms containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk, as defined in SOLAS Ch. II-2 Reg. 3.40.

2. Freestanding furniture and case furniture can be constructed with frames of fire-restricting

materials.

3. Upholstered furniture shall be tested to BS 5852:1990, flaming source 7 (wood crib approximating the burning of four sheets of full size newspapers).

4. Wardrobes shall be of deck-to-deck construction and have self-closing doors.

5. Floor coverings shall comply with Part 2 and Part 5 of Annex 1 in the FTP Code.

For berths, cabinets, benches/sofas, chairs, tables, and other structurally integrated components the following shall apply:

- Showcases or cabinets with glass fronts shall have toughened, and preferably laminated, glass. - Wardrobes shall be erected up to panelled ceilings.

Guidance note: Smaller quantities of combustible material may be used if these do not significantly increase the fire load. Combustible materials shall have good fire technical surface properties against ignition. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



H Fire Detection Systems

H 100 Areas to be protected

101 The detection system shall be of an addressable type being capable of identifying each detector. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.11 D102)

102 Machinery spaces of major fire hazard shall be provided with a suitable combination of smoke and heat detectors. In addition, flame detectors shall cover all engines, heated fuel oil separators, oil-fired boilers and similar equipment. One flame detector may as a maximum cover a pair of engines. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.11 D103)

H 200 Requirements for systems

201 For vessels with standard or enhanced engine room configuration (as defined in Sec.7), no loop shall cover more than one main propulsion line.

202 Control panels shall be located on the bridge at damage control stations, at the damage control station and at the engine control room. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 J203) Control panel (indicating unit) shall also be located at watch station by the gangway. It shall be possible to activate and acknowledge the alarm at the bridge, at the damage control centre and at the engine control room.

203 For the combined fire detection and alarm system the following requirements shall be adhered to:

- The activation of manual operated call points shall give immediate fire alarm on board. It

shall be possible to activate the fire alarm manually from the damage control centre, from the bridge, and from manual fire alarm release units placed in high fire risk areas.

- In compartments with noise, where there is a possibility that the audible alarm would not be heard, a visual alarm signal shall be arranged according to DNV HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch. 14 Sec. 8 B401.

- The Firepanel shall be designed according to EN54.

H 300 Detector configuration

301 All compartments, other than compartments listed in DNV HSLCNSC Pt. 5 Ch. 14 Sec. 11 D*, shall have combined smoke and heat detectors. The detectors shall function so as to only activate the smoke sensing element if the compartment is only filled with smoke and there is no fire, and by activating both the heat and smoke detectors/sensors when there is a fire in the compartment. Based on information from such detectors, the system shall be able to identify compartments where there is fire, compartments in which there only is smoke and no fire, and indicate the direction of smoke and fire spread.



H 400 The alarm system

401 If installed, portable watch-call units shall be able to indicate pre-alarm, the full fire alarm, and the location of the fire.

402 The fire detection and alarm system shall have facilities for interconnecting fire alarms from one vessel to another.

Guidance note: The control and monitoring system onboard these vessels may fulfill these requirements. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

403 The fire detection and alarm system shall have facilities for connection to a shorebased fire surveillance system.

Guidance note: The control and monitoring system onboard these vessels may fulfil these requirements. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

I Fixed Fire-extinguishing System

I 100 Fixed fire-extinguishing systems for machinery spaces

101 Machinery spaces of category A shall be fitted with a water based total extinguishing system, complying with the SOLAS terms and rules, and being approved as a total extinguishing system by IMO/SOLAS. A fixed gas fire extinguishing system complying with the provisions of the FSS Code can be accepted if a fixed local application fire extinguishing system is installed in the same space. The total extinguishing system must be compatible with a fixed local application fire extinguishing system based on low expansion AFFF foam.

Guidance note: If design threat level implies the risk of puncture of structural boundaries, gaseous system shall be avoided. CO2 based systems should be avoided as total flooding systems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

102 When shut-down of the engines is unacceptable, means shall be provided to make it possible to trigger the system without shutting the engines down.

* 102 The detection system shall be of an addressable type being capable of identifying

each detector. 103 Machinery spaces of major fire hazard shall be provided with a suitable

combination of smoke and heat detectors. In addition, flame detectors shall cover all engines, heated fuel oil separators, oil-fired boilers and similar equipment. One flame detector may as a maximum cover a pair of engines.

104 Auxiliary machinery spaces of minor fire hazard, cargo spaces, fuel tank compartments and similar spaces shall also be fitted with smoke detectors meeting requirements of Pt.4 Ch.10 in the Rules for Classification of HS, LC and NSC.

105 Areas of no fire risk and areas with minor fire risk and limited area such as bathrooms within cabins, void spaces and tank compartments need not to be provided with fire detectors.

106 Switchboards shall be covered as defined in E207. 107 As a minimum, an alarm shall immediately sound in the space where a detector

has been activated and in the wheelhouse. This alarm can be an integrated part of the detector or be provided from the fire detection control unit.



I 200 Fixed local application fire extinguishing system

201 Following rules apply in addition to Rule Basis:

The following requirements for a low expansion foam system shall apply:

a) The low expansion foam system shall consist of a sprinkler or water spray system with an AFFF concentrate approved by a recognised institution as the extinguishing agent.

Guidance note: Ordinary AFFF cannot be used on fires involving solvents as the substances then dissolve the foam instantly. If a low expansion foam is to be used on fires involving solvents, e.g. as an extinguishing agent in paint stores, so-called Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) can be used. A pre-mixing installation cannot be used when AFFF is used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: Low expansion foam based on AFFF cannot be used for extinguishing fires in butane, butadiene etc. in liquid form or fires involving compressed gases in general. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

b) High velocity nozzles for low expansion foam.

Guidance note: The foam nozzles used shall not have foam-generating devices, i.e. so-called non-aspirating nozzles. High-velocity nozzles should normally be used, but in cases where only large flat surfaces are to be covered, medium-velocity nozzles may be used. The nozzles should normally be of the standard full cone type without pig’s tails, but special nozzles may be used where so is required. The nozzles are fitted approx. 0.6–1.0 [m] above the objects to be protected, and the minimum nozzle pressure is 5 bar gauge. The nozzles should be arranged so that they provide complete coverage over the risk areas for the objects to be protected. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

c) An arrangement of nozzles which ensures good coverage of the area over the engines and other high risk objects, with a capacity of at least 20 litres/minute/m2. For areas with lower fire risk objects a capacity of 5 litres/ minute/m2 may be used.

d) The capacity of the system shall ensure that the system can be used for at least 10 minutes. Additionally extra quantity of foam concentrate for 5 minutes use shall be submitted, or the amount of foam concentrate shall ensure that the whole surface of the bilge is covered, which ever greatest.

The installation shall be designed so that the system operates for one minute, after which it stops automatically. It is restarted by activating the start button on the foam panel, after which the installation functions for another minute, and so on.

Guidance note: It shall be possible to adjust the pre-set one-minute action period. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

It must be possible for the ship’s crew to refill the system. It shall be possible to refill the premix tank from the vessel’s freshwater system.

Guidance note: Shelves for containers of extra foam concentrate should be positioned in the vicinity of the premix tank or the foam concentrate tank. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

e) Arrangement shall be made to isolate the fire main in the machinery space and supply the foam system with water from a pump outside the machinery space.

The system shall be independent of any fire pump or fire main located in the protected area.



f) The means of control of any such systems shall be readily accessible and simple to operate and shall be grouped together in few locations at positions not likely to be cut off by a fire in the protected space. The controls may be located in the damage control central, engine control room and bridge, and as a minimum in the space containing the TV monitoring system.

It shall be possible to operate the system both manually and automatically. The automatic mode shall be governed by the fire alarm system. It shall be possible to switch between automatic and manual release mode of the foam installation using a key switch positioned on the front of the installation’s control panel.

A dedicated control panel for monitoring and controlling the system shall be installed. The control panel shall indicate the following statuses:

- Failure of the main power supply system, and failure in the control circuit for this

system - Failure of the alternative power supply, and failure in the control circuit for this system - Pressure in the foam pipeline during operation - Automatic or manual release mode - Low level in the foam and premix tank

The fixed local application fire extinguishing system shall be monitored by the platform management system.

The use of a low expansion foam extinguishing system in an engine/machinery room shall be combined with TV monitoring of the engine room.

g) The system shall be capable of quick response time, maximum 30 s from activation.

h) The main components, foam tank and foam pump shall be located outside the protected space in a space categorised as a control station.

i) If the system is not arranged as a premix system, the system shall be arranged with two foam mixing units and two foam concentrate pumps placed together with the storage tank for foam concentrate to ensure a degree of redundancy.

Guidance note: For low expansion foam extinguishing systems, the system configuration should be one of the following:

- Premix tank, pump, and piping system - Freshwater tank, pump, foam mixing device, foam concentrate tank, and piping

system - Outlet from main seawater line, foam concentrate tank, foam mixing device, and

piping system If several rooms are to be protected, a system configuration consisting of a dedicated seawater pump, foam concentrate tank, injector, distribution valves, and piping system may be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

One pump shall be fitted for each room to be protected. Other solutions may be accepted under the approval of NDLO. The standby pump (where one is installed) shall start automatically if the correct pressure in the foam pipeline is not achieved within a pre-set time. For this purpose, pressure sensor and transmitter shall be installed after the fine filter.



Guidance note: Centrifugal pumps should be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A coarse filter shall be mounted on the suction side of the water or premix pump. A fine filter shall be mounted on the pressure side after the water and premix pump, and before any foam concentrate injection.

Guidance note: Over-capacity for possible future system expansion should be considered. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

j) There shall be not less than two sources of power supply for the system.

k) The tanks for foam concentrate and premix shall be constructed using materials that are in accordance with foam supplier’s specifications and NDLO’s paint and piping specifications.

The gasket in the pumps shall be resistant to foam concentrate.

Material in pumps shall be in accordance with requirements stated in NRAR Section 6 (Piping Systems) A400 (Materials).

l) The tanks shall be equipped with locally readable level indicators, and a manhole for inspection and tank cleaning.

It shall be possible to drain premix tanks to land.

m) The piping system shall be mounted so that it can easily be flushed and drained. A full capacity flush connection shall be mounted on the system after the pumps.

n) For electrical equipment that comes into direct contact with the extinguishing agent, the degree of encapsulation shall be at least IP 56. Direct contact means equipment which is exposed to a direct jet from a nozzle or reflected jet.

o) Release cabinets shall have an indicator showing the pressure achieved in the foam pipeline. Release switches for activating the installation shall be protected against unintentional switching by means of a transparent cover or some similar arrangement

I 300 Design considerations

301 For vessels with standard or enhanced engine room configuration (as defined in Sec.7), the fire extinguishing systems shall be so designed that full fire extinguishing capabilities are maintained in the machinery space not affected by the fire after discharge in the affected space of a fire extinguishing system required by Rule Basis. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 K301 Modified)

302 The systems serving one propulsion line may be interconnected with the systems serving the other propulsion line provided discharge of the second extinguishing charge is possible by separate manual activation only.

Guidance note: The propulsion redundancy is based on the assumption that the second propulsion line is fully operative after a fire incident in the first propulsion line. This includes the fire fighting function. When fire fighting agent intended for the second propulsion line is consumed to fight fire in the first propulsion line, the redundancy requirement is not longer fulfilled.




I 400 Water spraying system for storage rooms for explosives

401 The requirements given in NRAR Section 15 (Storage Rooms for Explosives) shall apply.

I 500 General requirements for fixed fire-extinguishing systems

501 Clear and easy-to-read operating instructions, explaining how to activate the fixed fire-extinguishing system, shall be available. These instructions shall be displayed in a clearly visible position next to the release positions. Reference is given to SOLAS regulation II-2/5-1.7.

502 Release positions shall be arranged in the damage control centre, the engine control room, on the bridge and outside the protected space.

503 In case fixed fire-extinguishing systems are integrated in a platform management system, there shall be a separate Local Operating Panel for control and monitoring.

J Fire-extinguishing Equipment

J 100 Portable fire extinguishers

101 For point extinguishing in cabinets with electric equipment, CO2 apparatus fitted with injection nozzles suited for the cabinets shall be used.

102 Portable extinguishing equipment Portable equipment for supporting fire fighting shall be of the following types:

a) Portable low expansion foam apparatuses based on use of Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) extinguisher for extinguishing class A and B fires.

b) Portable dry chemical apparatuses based on potassium bicarbonate for extinguishing class A fires.

c) Portable dry chemical apparatuses based on sodium bicarbonate for extinguishing fires in deep fat fryers in galley/pantry.

d) Portable CO2 apparatuses for extinguishing fires in cabinets containing electrical or electronic equipment. The apparatuses must be equipped with a CO2 plug for injecting the gas into cabinets. The cabinets must be equipped with a corresponding female plug. It shall be possible to attach an ordinary snow nozzle on to the plug for the purpose of using the apparatus for other purposes than injecting into cabinets. The snow nozzle must be easily removable in order to use the plug.

e) Portable low expansion foam equipment comprising:

- 2 m, - 1 ½” hose with NOR coupling lock no.1, - Injector with NOR lock no.1, - pick up hose comprising 75 cm flexible hose coupled to a metallic suction pipe of length 40 cm, - 15 m 1 ½” hose with NOR 1 couplings NOR lock no.1, - Nozzle with NOR lock no.1 - Locker with lid, made of fire-retardant GRP polyester for storing of the equipment listed above - hinges and closing devices shall be of seawater resistant quality, hot galvanized items will be accepted, - hinges and closing devices must be fastened by using reinforcements as necessary, - for transport purposes a handle shall be mounted in each end of the locker, - NOR-couplings shall be made of seawater resistant aluminium



J 200 Fire extinguishers in machinery spaces

201 Portable air-foam equipment shall be provided at each damage control station.

J 300 Portable foam applicators outside machinery spaces

301 All naval surface vessels should carry as a minimum 1 set of portable air-foam equipment (as described in Rule Basis) in each damage control stations or a number to the satisfaction of the Naval Administration. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 L301)

K Fire Pumps and Fire Main

K 100 Capacity of fire pumps

101 Water for fire fighting purposes are supplied from the main seawater system as described in Sec.6. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 M101)

102 There shall in addition to the pumps described in Sec.6 be provided portable fire pumps located such that they can be easily transported for assistance. The pumps shall be fitted with independent source of power. The capacity of each portable fire pump shall be at least 25 m3/h. The number of portable fire pumps shall be as follows:

- For vessels with a displacement above 4000 [tons]: at least 3 pumps - For vessels with a displacement between 400 and 4000 [tons]: at least 2 pumps - For vessels with a displacement of less than 400 [tons]: at least 1 pump

Guidance note: Requirements to portable fire pumps can be found in NRAR Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.2. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

K 200 Water distribution system

201 Fire hydrants shall be in accordance with KNMS S-1310 and KNMS S-1315.

202 All isolating valves essential for the operation of the fire water distribution system shall be remotely operated from above the damage control deck. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 M202)

203 The number of hydrants is determined on the basis that it shall be possible to reach each point on board with two independent fire hoses, of 15m length each. One hydrant shall be located near the entrance to each engine room. One hydrant is to be located close to the hawsehole so that the anchor chain can be hosed effectively.

204 The 38 [mm] fire hoses, in accordance with Norwegian Standard NS 4016 - 4018, shall have a maximum length of 15 [m].

205 On sheltered decks, hoses shall be connected and mounted on brackets according to NDLO’s specifications. On open decks, hoses shall be placed in fire hose lockers.



Guidance note: The fire hose lockers should be placed as close to the fire hydrants as possible. Hoses that cannot practicably be placed in the vicinity of the fire hydrants may be placed at the nearest damage control station. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

206 Emergency bulkhead connections for fire hoses shall be fitted in watertight divisions to allow a run of fire hoses through watertight and gastight divisions. The arrangement shall ensure that the watertight and gastight integrity is maintained. However, where the main seawater system is so arranged that one damaged section of the fire main will not impair the supply of water within the watertight zone, emergency bulkhead connections are normally not required. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 M212)

207 Fire hydrants under sheltered decks shall be marked with luminous red paint. Fire hydrants and fire hose lockers on open decks shall be marked with red paint. All fire hydrants shall have a numbered sign.

208 Flushing hoses and water-filling hoses on sheltered and open decks shall have a colour distinctively different from the fire hoses.

209 To secure water supply in case of broken pipework in the fire main system, a number of 65 [mm] hoses of 20 [m] length, in accordance with Norwegian Standard 4016-4018, shall be provided. The number and positioning of the hoses shall be as follows:

- Two hoses at each fire main pump to bring water from pump to the fire main in case of a broken raiser.

- A number of hoses to ensure emergency connection between the points where raisers from seawater pumps are connected to the fire main at the damage control deck or at open decks.

210 All firewater equipment, irrespective of dimensions, shall be fitted with No. 1 NOR connection.

L Firefighter’s Outfit

L 100 Number and location

101 The number of firefighter’s outfits, including breathing apparatuses, shall be 10% of the crew size, incremented according the length of the vessel as follows:

- 0 – 40 [m]: Multiplier = 1 - 40 – 85 [m]: Multiplier = 2 - over 85 [m]: Multiplier = 3

Guidance note: For example, for a frigate with 100 [m] length and a crew of 120 the number of firefighter’s outfits, including breathing apparatuses, will be 120ּ0.10ּ3 = 36. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The minimum number of firefighter’s outfits, including breathing apparatuses, shall be 2.

102 The firefighter’s outfits shall be stored so as to be easily accessible and ready for use in damage control stations. Preferably 1/3 of the breathing apparatus shall be stored in such way that they are accessible from open deck.



(Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 N102)

L 200 Personal equipment and breathing apparatus

201 Following rules apply in addition to Rule Basis Firefighters outfit shall comprise:

a) A watertight firesuit approved in accordance with the standard EN – 469.

b) A flash hood approved in accordance with standard EN 13911.

c) A self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) approved in accordance with the standard EN-137.

d) Fire gloves in accordance with current EN standard for firemen’s gloves, alternatively the current NFPA standard (if an EN standard do not exist).

e) Fireman’s helmet approved in accordance with standard EN 443, and being approved by a “Notifying body” for the purpose of obtaining the “Ships steering wheel”.

f) Fireman’s communication being integrated in the firehelmet providing wireless communication as follows:

- between firemen, - between firemen and Damage Control Stations/Damage Control Centre, - providing reduction of audible noise from the surroundings.

202 A high-pressure compressor with accessories suitable for filling the cylinders of the breathing apparatuses shall be installed in each fire control zone in the safest possible location. The capacity of each compressor shall be at least 75 litres per minute. The air intake for the compressor shall be equipped with a filter.

Guidance note: Other arrangement that ensures at least one filling station in each fire control zone may be accepted as equivalent.


M Other Spaces

M 100 Storage rooms for explosives

101 Requirement for storage rooms for explosives are described in Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.15

M 200 Paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers

201 Paint store and stores containing flammable liquids which can vaporize and form explosive atmospheres, shall be ventilated as a minimum by 12 air changes per hour. Such compartments shall have independent ventilation with separate intake and outlet. The outlet shall terminate well away from the intake of the ordinary ventilation system.

202 Paint store and stores containing liquids which can form explosive atmosphere shall be located outside the NBC citadel and as far as possible away from living quarters and manned spaces.

M 300 Spaces containing pressure chambers and oxygen storage tanks

301 Fire safety for diving systems shall comply with DNV-DSS-105 "Rules for Certification and Verification of Diving Systems" or equivalent military standards for diving facilities.



(Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 O301)

M 400 Protection of weapon systems

401 Special consideration should be taken for the protection of weapon systems from fire hazards. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 O401)

402 The hull shall be protected from heat and blasts in connection with launching of weapons. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 O402)

N Helicopter Facilities Requirements for fire safety for helicopter facilities are to found in NRAR Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.3.

O Fire Control Plans

O 100 Requirements

101 Fire control plans shall be provided as to comply with the requirements in SOLAS Ch. II-2/15.2.4. (Rules for Ships/High Speed, Light Craft and Naval Surface Craft, January 2011 Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.10 Q101)

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.11: Fire Safety for FRP Naval Vessels Page 220


Section 11 Fire Safety Requirements for FRP Naval Vessels This section covers fire safety requirements for fibre reinforced plastic/polymer (FRP) naval vessels. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviation and definitions are listed in Pt.0.


A 100 General




104 Some alternative designs are identified in these rules. Designs that are documented to provide equivalent safety to prescriptive rule requirements can be accepted. Alternative design and arrangements can be accepted based on relevant documentation, as it is acknowledged that there are significant difference between a naval vessel and a commercial vessel. Alternative design and arrangements to meet the minimum fire safety level, defined by the HSC code for cargo craft, is accepted when documented in accordance with the procedures given in SOLAS Reg.II-2/17. For each vessel type, design fire threat levels shall be established. This is a part of the total threat analysis. The design threats might imply large deviations from SOLAS requirements, as SOLAS requirements are based on protection against areas with statistically high fire risk.

Guidance note: MSC/Circ. 1002 “Guidelines on Alternative Design and Arrangements for Fire Safety” outlines the methodology for the engineering analysis required by SOLAS II-2/Regulation 17. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


A 200 Rule references and definitions







A 300 Requirements for documentation




302 For RNoN FRP vessels the overall fire safety concept shall be documented in a Fire Safety Concept study. This concept describes all active and passive fire protection systems, and takes into account the damage control organisation and equipment related to fire protection. The concept should cover limitations in the designed fire protection based on relevant fire scenarios.

B Structural Fire Protection, Materials and Arrangements

B 100 Fire control zones

101 Vessels with length above 40 m shall be subdivided into fire control zones by 60 minutes fire resisting divisions, with possible reduction down to 30 minutes in accordance to HSC Code 7.4.1.1. Special considerations will be made for vessels with length of up to 60 m, as rooms with minor fire hazards, such as voids, tank compartments and steering gear rooms need not to be included in the calculations for the 40 m zone. Cabins and public areas are not to be located outside the defined fire control zones.


B 200 Structural fire protection

201 Following apply in addition to DNV rules:

Guidance note: A fire threat analysis for the rooms may be used for establishing a fire hazard category and hence requirements for fire divisions enclosing, e.g. store rooms, lockers etc in accordance with the content of the compartment. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 It shall be documented for all parts of the vessel, to what extent a fire in any compartment will threaten the structural integrity of the vessel.


B 300 Material requirements




304 Following rules apply in addition to DNV rules:

Guidance note: 10 minute fire restricting material can be accepted on the 30 minute structural fire division facing the cabins/public spaces. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

305 No fire safety requirements apply to surfaces of void spaces and tank compartments. Moderate flame spread properties are required for areas of little or no fire risk.



306 “10 minutes fire restricting material” can also be applied for other rooms that are considered to have little or no fire risk, e.g. sanitary spaces, lockers. For vessels with only one fire control zone, “10 minutes fire restricting material” can be used in all areas of minor fire hazard provided that the smoke control philosophy, escape philosophy and the response time for the firefighters can demonstrate safe evacuation and manual fire fighting within 10 minutes. For such vessels areas of tanks, voids, and other areas with no fire risk, no fire reaction requirements to materials apply.

307 For furniture and furnishings refer to NRAR section 10 G102.

B 400 Arrangements

401 All doors shall be self-closing or automatically closing upon fire detection from any one fire detector, although they must allow for the exit of people inside the area or compartment. Doors to bathrooms inside cabins need not comply with this requirement.

Guidance note: This requirement need not apply to doors that are normally closed. (E.g. X-Ray marked doors according to NRAR Pt.2 Ch.2 Sec.2. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

B 500 Means of escape





C Ventilation

C 100 Ventilation zones and active smoke control

101 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The requirements stated in NRAR Section 6 (Piping Systems) G800 (Ventilation systems) shall apply.

102 Ventilation systems shall be arranged as separated and independent systems for each fire control zone. Within each fire control zone, ventilation zones shall be arranged, enclosed by either fire resisting divisions or smoke tight boundaries. Alternative smoke control arrangements may be accepted.

Guidance note: Alternative arrangements may include use of separate smoke extractions fan units and with corresponding smoke control philosophy, e.g. stop of ventilation in case of smoke or fire development. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---






106 DNV rules fully applicable. The smoke control philosophy is to tailored to the escape philosophy.

Guidance note: At least one escape route shall be kept free of smoke during smoke development in any compartment. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---


D Fire Detection System

D 100 Arrangement

101 DNV rules fully applicable. In addition, NRAR section 10 H and applicable parts of NRAR section 9 applies.






107 DNV rules fully applicable. In addition the alarm shall sound at locations specified in D101.

E Fire Extinguishing System and Hazardous Spaces

E 100 Fixed fire extinguishing system for machinery spaces





103 DNV rules fully applicable. In addition fixed local application fire extinguishing system in accordance to NRAR section 10 I200 should be evaluated.

Guidance note: If design threat level implies the risk of puncture of structural boundaries, gaseous system shall be avoided. CO2 based systems should be avoided as total flooding systems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



E 200 Other fire hazardous spaces or equipment

201 Storage rooms for explosives, including ammunition, decoy and similar equipment shall be arranged in accordance with NRAR Sec. 15.





206 Spaces intended for storage and handling of equipment with combustion engines and fuel shall be subjected to separate risk analysis to establish appropriate fire safety measures. If no risk analysis is performed, spaces shall comply with requirements as for enclosed car ferries.



F Fire pumps, Fire Main and Portable Extinguishers

F 100 Fire pumps, fire main, and fire hoses

101 DNV rules fully applicable. In addition NRAR section 10 K applies.

102 The fire main, including supports, couplings and valves shall be made of fire resistant and corrosion resistant materials.

Guidance note: Material requirement and qualification test depends on design threat level. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---





105 Water shall be readily available from the hydrants. Dry pipe systems can be accepted, if fire detection or fire alarm implies automatic start of fire pumps.

Guidance note: Readily availability means within [20] seconds. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e—

106 Refer to NRAR Pt.2, Ch.2, Sec.2 for RNoN standards for fire hydrants, nozzles, hoses, etc.

F 200 Portable fire extinguishers

201 DNV rules fully applicable. In addition NRAR section 10 J applies.


G Sprinkler System

G 100 Sprinkler System



103 The system may be based on use of sea water from fire mains, and need not use dedicated fresh water tanks.

Guidance note: A dry system is preferred, and in that case special precautions shall be taken to ensure automatic release of the system, i.e. use of gas to pressurize the piping, detectors etc. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e—


105 It shall be possible to release the system manually from local positions and centralised manned control stations.

106 It shall be possible to perform testing of piping and nozzles by connecting fresh water supply to the system.

H Firefighter’s outfit

H 100 General

101 Refer to NRAR section 10 L101.

102 Refer to NRAR section 10 L200 for rules concerning breathing apparatus sets.







I Additional Fire Protection (optional)

I 100 General

101 DNV rules fully applicable. Recuirements in subsection I will apply to RNoN vessels.

I 200 Accommodation



203 DNV rules fully applicable. Alternative arrangements can be applied.

I 300 Engine room







The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.12: Safe Evacuation of Personnel Page 227


Section 12 Safe Evacuation of Personnel This Section covers requirements concerning the safe evacuation of personnel, including requirements regarding communication equipment, personal life-saving appliances, muster list, emergency instructions and manuals, and survival craft and rescue boats. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0. Unless expressly specified, this section shall comply with ANEP-77 "Naval ship code", Chapter VII Escape, Evacuation and Rescue, Edition 3

A Escape, Evacuation and Rescue Eq. Stowages (Regulation 9) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 9

A 100 General stowage No photoluminescent or reflective marking is visible on upper decks, when doors and hatches to upper decks are in opened position.

A 200 Rescue craft

201 The boats stowage shall be equally distributed on both sides of the vessel

202 The stowage areas for survival- and rescue craft shall ensure easy and safe access to the boats and transport to hospital facilities for personell carried on stretchers. Due to hyperthermia risks, it shall be possible to carry a person in a horizontal position all to the hospital facilities

203 Life boats shall be located in deck-house recesses in superstructures or in separate semi-enclosures provided with protection from water spray. Free fall lifeboats are not accepted unless they have alternative means for lowering.

A 300 Fast Rescue boats

301 The Fast rescue boats shall be embarked not higher than 8 metres from waterline in the lightest seagoing condition.

302 The Fast rescue boats shall be stored in a position suitable for launching and recovery, close to midship.

303 The Fast rescue boats shall be located in deck-house recesses in superstructures or in separate semi- Enclosures provided with protection from water spray

304 The Fast rescue boats shall be stowed in a state of readiness for launching in not more than 2 minutes

305 The stowage areas for Fast rescue boats shall be suitable for, in a safe manner, to do repairs and maintenance on the boats in all weather conditions where it shall be possible to launch the boats

306 Painters shall be permanently attached to each Fast rescue boat. The painter shall be attached to the ship as far forward as practical in order to have a small angle on the painter. The painter shall consist of: - A lifting ring with handles, WLL 6 tons - 30 mm Polypropylene rope (main painter), attached to ring with a schackle - 10 mm Polypropylene rope (hawser line), bunsed up with the main painter, half a meter from the lifting ring



Example:

B External Communcication Equipment (Regulation 13) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 13

B 100 Communication

101 One radar transponder shall be stowed in each survival craft.

B 200 Signalling equipment

201 NDSMD approved pyrotechnical kit for each class of vessels, shall be used.

C Emergency Escape Breathing Devices, EEBD (Regulation 20) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 20

101 Norwegian standard EEBD, Ocenco M-20.2, NSN 4240-01-439-5937, shall be delivered

102 Each cabin shall have EEBD coverage similar to the amount of beds in the cabin and shall as far as possible, be mounted in the same manner in all cabins

D Launching Arrangements (Regulation 22)

D 100 General

101 Launching devices shall be possible to operate from a fixed position, only using hydraulic control handles.

102 The boat davits operating position shall be arranged with unrestricted view for the operator,throughout the launch and recovery of the boat

103 Boat lifting devices shall be capable of turning or hinging back far enough for boats to be stowed without projecting beyond the side of the ship



104 In case of power loss the boat davits shall be equipped with a brake controlled gravity lowering and it shall be possible operate this from both on-board the rescue boats and from stowage position, by personell on deck.

105 In case of a power loss, it shall be possible to move the davit inward and outward, in order to let the boat lean against the ship side and let the crew embark the boat in a safe manner from deck. The brake controlled gravity lowering shall be capable of launching the boat to embarkation deck, stop and allowing crew to embark before launching to sealevel

106 In case of power loss, it shall be possible to recover the fast rescue boat from sea level to emarkation deck in no more than 2 minutes, and to its normal stowage possition in no more than 5 minutes.

D 200 Davits for Fast Rescue boats

201 The launcing device for fast rescue boats shall be of davit type and fit the boats single point lifting arrangement.

202 The Fast rescue boat davits arrangements shall be capable of launching and recovering the boats, fully manned

203 The boat davits shall be designed in order to avoid pendular movement of the boat while launching and hoisting

204 If a guiding frame is used to avoid pendular movement, each support (if not mechanically connected) shall move parallell to each other

205 The boat davit operating position shall allow davit-operator and boat-operator to communicate visually and in other ways, throughout the launch and recovery of the boat. Hence, davit-operator position shall be placed in front of the Fast Rescue boat, facing aft

206 The boat davit operating positions shall allow davit-operator to communicate on internal communication system with boat operator and bridge, throughout the launch and recovery of the boat without removing the hands from the main control levers.

207 It shall also be possible to communicate between bridge and launching stations on a fixed internal system with loadspeaker on launching station.

E Evacuation Arrangements (Regulation 23) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 23

E 100 Climbing net

101 The climbing nets on the vessels shall be at least 4 metres wide and each deck where use of climbing nets can be expected, shall be equipped with at least one climbing net on both sides of the vessel. The nets shall be suitable for the deck hight in the lightest seagoing condition, when the bottom of each net is to be submerged to one meter below surface.

102 The following requirements for the climbing net shall apply: - the net shall be made from manila rope or rope - frame rope at least 25 mm with tensile strength 10 kN (minimum) - net rope at least 20 mm with tensile strength 3 kN (minimum) - size of squares maximum 300 x 300 mm - horizontally planks of size 60 mm x 60 mm x 4 m shall



be sewn in between one meter below the top and one meter above the bottom of the net. Distance between the planks shall be between one and 1,5 meter. - an aluminum bar with 25 mm diameter x 4 m shall be sewn in at the bottom and the top - at the top end of the net maximum 5 pieces of rope size 30 mm x 3 m, each of tensile strength 2000 kg (minimum) shall be fastened at one meter interval. Other materials may be used provided the dimensions, breaking strain, weathering, stretching and gripping properties are at least equivalent to those of manila rope.

103 The climbing nets shall be certificated to WLL 2000 kg

104 The rigging and retrieving of each climbing net shall be possible by four persons.

105 A weather protected stowage position shall be provided for each climbing net

E 200 Pilot ladder

201 Pilot transfer arrangement shall be in accordance with SOLAS, Ch. V, Regulation 23, Pilot transfer arrangements

202 The rigging and retrieving of the embarkation ladders shall be possible by two persons.

203 A weather protected stowage position shall be provided for the embarkation ladders

F Survival Craft (Regulation 24) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 24

F 100 Liferafts

101 The liferaft must be of a material which is unaffected by contact with fuel-oil, oil-products or residues. The containers are to be made of a fire retardant material and have grey colour (RAL 7040)

102 Liferafts are to be in compliance with the requirements of 4.1-4.2 in the LSA Code, except from point 4.1.5.1 (sea anchor) and 4.1.5.4 (equipment container).

103 Preferably the liferaft floor shall be equipped with automatic drain valves (gravitation) and two stowage bags shall be mounted on the upper tube at both sides of the raft.

104 The sea anchor shall not be self-releasing

Guidance note: Sea anchor shall be of “Icelandic” type and the hawser line shall have a breaking strength of at least 10 [kN]. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

105 The equipment containers are to be made of waterproof material. The containers shall be easy to open and close and capable of floating in water for at least 30 minutes, without damaging the contents. This shall apply after every time the containers are opened and closed. Preferably without using a zipper.

106 The following additional equipment shall be fitted in the equipment-containers. This equipment is to be called “NORNAVY PACK A” or “NORNAVY PACK B” with reference to the SOLAS equipment.



- Repair equipment in waterproof container - A number of six approved chemical lights - 5 plastic bags per person for water collecting purposes and personal hygiene - 1 signal pistol, with 10 signal lights - 1 signalling mirror (heliograph) - One set of instructions in Norwegian and in English covering operational and survival

instructions. The instructions shall be water resistant and shall be easily readable under emergency conditions.

- One search and rescue transponder (SART) - One buoyant rescue quoit. - One topping up pump or bellows

107 Medical equipment to be in accordance with Norwegian Rules of ship medicine (FOR 2001-03-09 nr. 439). Navy vessels to be defined as category A og B, ref § 4. NB! Includes morphine 10mg/ml injection 10x1 ml Following equipment accordning to STANAG 1185, not included by SOLAS. - Oinment to prevent sunburn - Anti-glare eyeshields/sunglasses (2 pairs) - De-oiling agent

Guidance note: Oinment to prevent sunburn has to be equivalent to minimum 200ml lotion, sunblock minimum 24. If lotion is chosen it has to be changed yearly. De-oiling agent has to be wet napkins with documentated effect, e.g. PlumWipes Heavy -Duty. Ten napkins for each person. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

The total first aid kit to be called NORNAVY

108 With reference to the SOLAS equipment in the raft, liferafts-containers are to be marked: Emergency pack: NORNAVY A or NORNAVY B Approved by: NORWEGIAN NAVY First aid kit: NORNAVY

Guidance note: Some small liferafts may not have enough volume inside the containers to include complete NORNAVY-pack, and some are also to small to include the SOLAS A-pack. NDSMD can give dispensation if this problem occurs. If NORNAVY-pack is removed, rafts are to be marked SOLAS A- or B-pack only. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

109 There shall be storage nets between the roof stiffeners above the topmost main floating chamber.

110 On self rightening liferafts the canopy shall be fitted with a green net for grabbing, with a square size of 100mm x 100mm.

111 Liferafts shall be equipped with Near infrared indicator light (NIR) and extra light indicating where the entrances are. Both capable of being shut on and off.

112 Liferafts shall be equipped with easy access boarding arrangement (stairs) on at least two entrances.

113 The topping up pumps or bellows shall be of a hard powered type.



G Life-Jackets (Regulation 25) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 25

G 100 Life jacket, general service

101 The combined battle/working-lifejacket (BWLJ), NSN 4220-25-152-7143, with EN ISO 12402-2 approval shall be used and shall be provided to each person on board.

102 Additional life-jackets shall be carried for 50% of the number of embarked persons and stowed in at least two separated, conspicuous, readily accessible places as near as practicable to the evacuation stations.

103 Additional BWJ's, for 50% of total accomodation, shall be stored inside the compartment, directly accessible from outside evacuation area (muster station), on deck

104 Means to store and secure BWLJ's, ready for sea, with capasity equal to the number of persons assigned, shall be provided in watch stations, battle stations and at any other manned watch station where crew members will bring their personal life-jacket.

G 200 Life jacket, additional

201 Crewsaver 27, NSN 4220-99-476-6310, shall be used by MOB-diver or Surface swimmer. At least two lifejackets shall be issued for each ship

202 Secumar 16L, NSN 4220-12-381-4781, shall be used for working purposes.

H Personal Thermal Protection suits (Regulation 26) Additional requirements to ANEP-77 “Naval Ship Code”, Chapter VII, Regulation 26

H 100 Immersion suits

101 N6 Nordic, NSN 4220-25-152-3428, marked SJØFORSVARET (in block capitals of the Roman alpahabet) on the back, shall be delivered.

102 Immersion suits for 100% of the embarked personell, shall be stored inside the compartment and shall be provided in watch stations, battle stations, hospital and at any other manned watch station, with a capasity equal to the number of persons assigned.

103 Additional immersion suits (50% of total accomodation) shall be stored inside below deck, directly accessible from the outside evacuation area (muster station), on deck.

104 Additional immersion suits shall be distributed to every muster station, with a number relative to the persons assigned to each muster station.

H 200 Anti-Exposure suits

201 Nordkapp Artic (PS4022), NSN shall be delivered for work on deck, helicopter deck, RAS-deck, in rescue boats, damage control, etc. in artic enviroment

202 Nordkapp Anti-exposure (PS4022-1), NSN not ready, shall be delivered for work on deck, helicopter deck, RAS-deck, in rescue boats, damage control, etc. in normal Norwegian enviroment



I Rescue Arrangements (Regulation 27)

I 100 Mass Rescue

101 A device capable of rapidly recovering rescue craft or survival craft and transfering survivors to the ship shall be provided. In addition MES-slides shall be equipped with hand-lines, and climbing nets along the ship sides shall be provided.

102 The MES shall be provided with slides, equipped with hand-lines or ladders to aid in climbing up the slide

103 At least two climbing nets along each side of the vessels sides shall be delivered

I 200 Line Thrower

201 Pneumatic Linethrower (PLT), NSN 1095-25-160-4277, shall be used

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.13: Radiation Hazards Page 234


Section 13 Radiation Hazards This Section covers requirements regarding radiation hazards. Requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) are covered by Section 14. All general requirements, abbreviations and definitions for NRAR as a whole are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements.

A General

A 100 Application


A 200 General requirements

201 The Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation (NDLO) shall approve all deviations from these rules and requirements on a case-by-case basis.

202 NDLO reserves the right to define additional requirements concerning radiation hazards, exceeding or exempting the requirements stated in this NRAR section and DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.5 Ch.14 Sec.13. In the case that additional requirements and exemptions exist, these will be stated in the contractual specification.

203 Compliance shall be sought with the Regulation on Radiation Protection and Use of Radiation (In Norwegian: Forskrift om strålevern og bruk av stråling), pursuant to the Act of 12th of May 2000 Nr. 36 on Radiation Protection and Use of Radiation, administered by the Norwegian Radiation Protection Authority (NRPA).

B Definitions

B 100 Terms
















C Documentation



D Design Principles

D 100 General





D 200 Prevention of auto ignition


D 300 Prevention of personnel exposure





E Installation

E 100 General






E 200 Marking




F Testing

F 100 Harbour Acceptance Tests (HAT) for the vessel


The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.14: Electromagnetic Compatibility Page 237


Section 14 Electromagnetic Compatibility This section covers rules and regulations regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) for surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN). Requirements regarding electric power generation and transfer equipment and systems are dealt with in Section 8. Requirements regarding radiation hazards (RADHAZ) are covered in Section 13. All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0.

A General

A 100 Application


Guidance note: Electronic and electrical systems play major roles in supporting naval vessels in all their operational modes. Some of these systems generate powerful electromagnetic (EM) fields, while other systems are highly sensitive to these EM fields within the same frequency band. This calls for the principles of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) engineering to be applied in naval designs. Examples of electromagnetic transmitters and receivers used on board naval vessels include, but are not limited to, the following:

- Search and surveillance radar - Navigation radar - Tracking radars - GPS (i.e. Global Positioning System) - LF/MF/HF/VHF/UHF radio equipment - Satellite communication (Satcom) - SART (i.e. Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) - Mobile telephones - NAVTEX



103 This section includes design-, development-, performance-, and verification requirements regarding the electromagnetic environment (EME), electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and electro-static discharge (ESD) for surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN).

104 The Norwegian Defence Logistics Organisation (NDLO) reserves the right to define additional requirements regarding electromagnetic compatibility, exceeding or exempting the rules stated in this section, on a project-by-project basis. In the case of additional requirements these will be stated explicitly in the vessel-, system- and/or relevant work specification.

105 The yard shall appoint a qualified EME manager for all newbuilding- and major modification projects. The yard’s EME manager shall establish a project-specific EME organisation to ensure that necessary measures are taken to control the electromagnetic environment (EME). It is the responsibility of the EME manager to control any EME-related activities throughout the project, including EME related activities conducted by sub-contractors.

Guidance note: The EME manager should have decision-making power with regard to EME-related issues. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

106 An EME team shall be established as a part of the EME organisation. The EME team shall report its agreed recommendations, through agreed information channels, to the NDLO for comments.



Guidance note: The EME team should be organised by the EME manager, and should include representatives from all relevant subcontractors and suppliers of mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment. The major objective of the EME team is to ensure that involved parties are held informed about EME-requirements and activities. Hence, the EME team should be an efficient forum for discussions of EME related problems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: Frequently held progress meetings between the members of the EME team should control the EME-activities in the project. An EME progress report should be presented well in advance of each meeting. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A 200 Principles




A 300 Standards

301 The following standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), all of latest edition, shall be applicable:

- MIL-STD-464: RADHAZ, Hero - EN 61000-4-2: Testing and measurement techniques, ESD immunity test - MIL-STD-237: Electromagnetic compatibility management guide for platforms, systems and

equipment - MIL-STD-419: Grounding, bonding and shielding of electronic equipment and facilities - MIL-STD-461: Electromagnetic emission and susceptibility requirements for the control of

electromagnetic interference - MIL-STD-462: Measurements of electromagnetic interference characteristics - MIL-STD-490: Specification practice - MIL-STD-1310: Shipboard bonding, grounding and other techniques for electromagnetic

compatibility and safety - MIL-STD-1377: Measurements of effectiveness of cable, connector and weapon enclosure

shielding and filters in precluding hazards of electromagnetic radiation to ordnance - MIL-STD-1385: Preclusion in ordnance hazards in electromagnetic fields, general

requirements - NAVSEA/OP 3565 Vol. I: Technical manual, electromagnetic radio hazard to personnel, fuel

and other flammable materials - EN 100015-1: Protection of electrostatic sensitive devices.

B Definitions

B 100 Terms








106 Electromagnetic (EM) Citadel. The boundary in a platform’s structure at which it is necessary to stop the currents induced in the upper/topside structure or fittings from entering the platform and cross coupling to other systems within the citadel.

Guidance note: The EM citadel is not necessarily the same as the gas-tight NBC citadel. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

107 Above decks equipment. Any equipment installed or used on the exposed upper deck, topside, or outside the electromagnetic (EM) citadel. This includes areas such as the hangar, the bridge or FRP/GRP structures of a metal vessel, and any compartment on a non-metallic vessel that does not incorporate an electromagnetic screen.

108 Aerial. A device designed to efficiently couple electromagnetic energy between a transmission line and free space. Aerials may be used for transmission or reception.

109 Antenna. Synonymous with aerial, see 108.

110 Below decks equipment. Any equipment installed or used within the electromagnetic (EM) citadel.

111 Blind arcs. Specific areas, obstructed from relevant transmission beam or line of sight, within the horizontal or vertical plane of that beam or line.

112 Bond/bonding. The process of connecting together metal parts so that they make low impedance electrical contact for D.C. and A.C. currents with high frequencies.

113 Broadband noise. An electromagnetic interference that has its spectral energy distributed over a broad frequency range in relation to the frequency bandwidth of the equipment receiving the interference and is present over all or a significant portion of, the tuning range of the affected receiver.

Guidance note: Examples of sources of broadband interference noise are hull generated intermodulation products, atmospheric disturbances, arcing, electrostatic discharges, and short duration pulses. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

114 Earth. Any conductor system that makes a direct electrical connection with the sea or earth.

115 Earthing. The process of ensuring a satisfactory electrical connection between the structure, including the metal skin of an object or vehicle, and the surface of the earth.

116 Electromagnetic Environment (EME). A term encompassing electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), electromagnetic interference (EMI), ESD and RADHAZ, as well as the internal and external EM vessel environment. EME includes the totality of electrical and magnetic field strength (or power flux densities), voltages and current, whether intentionally or unintentionally generated, at a given location.



117 Electro-technical Equipment. Electro-technical equipment comprises any equipment for the generation, distribution and utilisation of electrical power, and any equipment based on electrical signals or actuation for communication of information, control of plant, and/or measurement of physical quantities.

Guidance note: Electro-technical equipment may be a completely functional entity in its own right, or may be a functional sub-assembly incorporated in primary equipment that is otherwise of a mechanical- or chemical-engineering nature. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

118 Functional EME. The ability of electrical and electronic equipment, subsystems, and systems, with any sensors and/or aerials in operational condition, to share the electromagnetic spectrum and perform their desired functions without unacceptable degradation from or to the specified electromagnetic environment.

119 Fundamental EME. The ability of electrical and electronic equipment, subsystems, and systems, with any sensors or aerials, to share the electromagnetic spectrum and perform their desired functions without unacceptable degradation from or to the specified electromagnetic environment.

120 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Sparks created by differential charging of ship structures, with intermittent contact due to ship or wind-induced motion.

121 In-band frequencies. Frequencies that fall within the designated operating frequency range of an equipment, taking into account the bandwidth of the receiver.

122 Platform. Entire vessel including all inherent systems.

123 Radiation Hazards (RADHAZ). Relates to the risk of harmful effects in human bodies, and to the inadvertent ignition of flammables or electro-explosive devices (EED), resulting from electromagnetic radiation in the radio frequency band up to 300 [GHz].

124 Radio Frequency (RF) Burn. A personnel hazard caused by small electric shocks from weatherdeck or other metallic structures caused by EM charging of these structures, due to use of high power communication transmitters.

125 System. A combination of equipment and/or outfits performing a related task, e.g. communication system, propulsion system etc.

126 Topside. The whole exposed area of a ship above the main deck. This includes all weatherdecks, superstructure(s) and masts.

127 Upper deck. Same as Topside

128 Unintentional emissions. Emissions that radiate from electro-technical equipment other than those for which the equipment was designed to radiate.

Guidance note: Unintentional emissions could include unwanted harmonics, side lobes from aerials, and broadband electromagnetic interference. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



129 Weapon system. Weapon equipment includes sensors, data processors, decoys, weapon launchers and the appropriate naval armament stores, communication equipment/system, and electronic warfare and navigation equipment for both surface and underwater systems.

B 200 Abbreviations

201 The following abbreviations shall apply in this NRAR section: AC = Alternating Current CDR = Critical Design Review DC = Direct Current EED = Electro-Explosive Device EMC = Electromagnetic Compatibility EMECD = Electromagnetic Environment Control Document EMEMD = Electromagnetic Environment Maintenance Document EMETP = Electromagnetic Environment Test Plan EME = Electromagnetic Environment EMI = Electromagnetic Interference ESD = Electrostatic Discharge ESDS = Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Device FAT = Factory Acceptance Test FO = Fibre Optic GA = General Arrangement HAT = Harbour Acceptance Test HF = High Frequency LOS = Line Of Sight MCT = Multi Cable Transit PDR = Preliminary Design Review PE = Protective Earth RAS = Replenishment at Sea RF = Radio Frequency SAT = Sea Acceptance Test WGBCO = Wave-Guide Beyond Cut-Off More abbreviations are defined in NRAR Section 0.

C Documentation



102 The EME manager shall produce an Electromagnetic Environment Control Document (EMECD), which specifies and describes all activities planned and measures implemented to control EME in the project. EME related information shall be implemented in all relevant project plans for the design phase, construction phase, and the verification phase of the project. The EMECD shall ensure that all actions taken are documented. The EMECD shall:

- Describe how the EME activities are integrated into the project organisation - Define EME-related responsibilities and tasks for the different members of the EME team - Describe the main EME-related activities and how they are planned in time - Describe how EME related documentation is to be handled - Define the EME-relevant technical baseline at all times - Define detailed technical requirement to equipment and the installation of such - Define EME-training and requirements to the workforce for installation of EME-related

equipment



103 The EME manager shall produce an EME Maintenance Document (EMEMD), covering all maintenance related documentation such as procedures, diagrams etc. for EME related issues.

104 EME relevant drawings and diagrams, as well as list of drawings and diagrams, shall be clearly identified as “EME relevant”.

C 200 EME test plan

201 The EME manager shall produce an EME Test Plan (EMETP), describing the extent of EME-testing necessary. The EMETP document shall as a minimum contain the following information:

- A detailed list of all electrical and electronic equipment - Applicable test standards - Type of tests to be carried out according to the list of equipment, including explanations of the

rationale for the selection of tests - Pass/fail criteria for the tests - Time schedule - Test procedures, including block diagrams

202 The EME Test Plan (EMETP) shall describe details regarding the following test levels:

- EME Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) for equipment - EME Harbour Acceptance Tests (HAT) for the vessel - EME Sea Acceptance Tests (SAT) for the vessel

203 The EME Test Plan (EMETP) for the vessel shall cover the following aspects:

- Measurement of RADHAZ areas - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) testing - Transmitter versus equipment EME testing - Receiver versus equipment EME testing - Equipment versus equipment EME testing - Measurement of radiated and conducted emissions in critical installation areas

C 300 Cable list

301 A cable list shall be developed, including any special cables from equipment manufacturers.

Guidance note: The purpose of a cable list is to control the amount of cables and cable properties, as well as cable classification, separation, cable screen termination and routing. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

302 The cable list shall, as a minimum, include the following information for all cables:

- Cable identification - Start and end equipment specification - Start location, end location, and EME zone penetration - Cable screen termination principles to be used - Cable type - Cable category - Signal types carried - Capacitance line-ground, per meter and total - Inductance line-earth, per meter



D Design Principles

D 100 General

101 The design of the vessel, including safety systems, navigation systems, communication systems, weapon/sensor systems, combat management systems, propulsion systems, power systems etc., shall ensure that all relevant systems can be operated concurrently at specified performance.

102 Any electrical or electronic equipment shall, as a minimum, be compatible to the EME regulations of the EU or similar.

Guidance note: This may not be sufficient for equipment close to radiating sources or receiving sensors. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



D 200 Lightning protection


D 300 Electrostatic discharge


302 Equipment and systems shall comply with IEC 61000-4-2 or equivalent standards.

D 400 Topside design

401 The yard shall deliver reports at Preliminary Design Review (PDR) and Critical Design Review (CDR) that show its interpretation of mission requirements and constraints related to topside design.

Guidance note: It is the shipyard that produces the vessel’s topside design. The design of the topside, including superstructure and masts, is considered critical for the vessel performance. The topside design is a result of translating mission requirements into system characteristics and conducting trade-offs between alternative system elements. A topside design analysis will identify the major systems competing for topside space and quantify how arrangements influence system performance. When system configurations are changed, an analysis of consequences will be made to improve the topside design solutions. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

402 The shipyard shall deliver reports at Preliminary Design Review (PDR) and Critical Design Review (CDR) that analyses the layout of the vessel’s topside and placement of topside elements. As a minimum the following aspects shall be analysed and discussed:

- Superstructure - Stacks - Stack gas areas - Cranes - Boats - Maximum height of mast - Manned areas - Green water



- Ice - Structural blockage - Gun arc-of-fire - Gun blast area - Replenishment at sea (RAS) stations - Helicopter landing areas - Aviation facilities - The vessel’s roll and pitch - Waveguide restrictions - Below deck requirements - Environment - Maintainability

403 The yard shall deliver reports at PDR and CDR that assess the vessel’s performance, considering system coverage regarding optical blockage of line of sight (LOS) systems.

404 The yard shall deliver three dimensional (3D) electromagnetic topside design general arrangements drawings at PDR and CDR.

405 Systems and equipment location shall be based on approved general arrangement (GA).

406 The topside design analysis shall be reviewed upon changes in the system configuration and GA. NDLO shall be informed on how changes inflict on the topside’s performance.

D 500 EME zones

501 An analysis shall identify any requirements for the establishment of EME zones. The analysis shall justify the need for the zone based on what equipment that will be installed and the equipment’s EME properties. Minimum two EME-zones shall be established: Top deck and below deck.

Guidance note: The establishment of EME zones makes it possible for equipment with different EME qualities to be integrated in a limited spatial volume. The vessel may be divided into the following predefined zones: Zone S Shielded rooms, e.g. rooms for radar instruments, sonar systems, batteries, computer

systems, instrumentation, machinery control etc. Zone T Top deck Zone U Unshielded parts of the vessel (i.e. not topside) Zone W Shielded rooms with windows, e.g. the bridge Other zones may be predefined. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

502 The EME zone analysis report shall derive the required levels (in dB) for shielding effectiveness.

D 600 Equipment EME

601 The vessel’s list of parts shall categorise all electronic and electrical equipment or systems based on electromagnetic limit values.

Guidance note: To ensure that all equipment can be installed in an EME in which it can function without becoming a victim or a source of intolerable electromagnetic (EM) emissions, all electronic or electrical equipment is divided into different categories defined by electromagnetic limit values.



These limit values are based upon a set of EME test criteria that is documented by the suppliers. The categories define where onboard the vessel each piece of equipment can be located. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

602 The EME properties of all electrical and electronic equipment shall be documented. The rationale for necessary EME measures shall be included as part of the EME control document (EMECD).

603 Analysis shall be performed to derive the required electromagnetic limit values for equipment. These analyses shall as a minimum include the following aspects:

- Levels of permissible radiated and conducted emissions - Levels of susceptibility (radiated and conducted emissions) - Equipment installation efforts regarding EME

604 Equipment listed in the EMETP shall be tested according to MIL-STD 461/462 or an equivalent standard.

E Installation

E 100 General


E 200 Shielding


Guidance note: Radiated emissions of unwanted electromagnetic energy are controlled by different EME-zones. The shielding must be effective also for very high frequencies. Choice of shielding material is important, but most important is how the various openings for windows, cable inlets, ventilation etc. is handled, as well as how the shielded rooms are physically made up by welding etc. A penetration will reduce the shielding effectiveness. This require consideration when designing the various structure elements of the shielded zones. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---







208 EME structure elements shall be utilised for the construction of shielded compartments/rooms.

Guidance note: In the construction of shielded compartments, the following structure elements can be utilised:

- EMI type Multi Cable Transits (MCT)



- EMI type cable glands - Shielded doors and hatches - Ventilation ducts with honeycomb filters - EMI filters for conducted emissions - Shielded windows - EMI gaskets


209 All decks and bulkheads encapsulating shielded compartments shall be assembled by continuous welding or soldering.

Guidance note: Proper shielding is achieved when all walls, decks and bulkheads being welded or soldered continuously. Spot-welding, riveting, or other assembly forms, will not provide acceptable shielding effectiveness. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

210 Cable screens, pipes, ventilation ducts etc. shall be decoupled circumferentially at boundaries of shielded zones, and always between top deck and below deck.

Guidance note: For this purpose it is common practice to use EMI - Multi Cable transits (MCTs), EMI cable glands, or similar.

If EMI-MCTs are to be used a back to back solution must be provided for transits that can be subjected to water ingress (Condensation, rain or green sea). The outer MCT shall be conventional, and the inner shall be an EMI-MCT. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

211 At fibre-optic (FO) cable penetrations of shielded zones, metallic tubes bonded circumferential to the shield (as waveguides beyond cut-off) shall be applied.

Guidance note: Although fibre-optic (FO) cables do not couple electromagnetic noise, their penetration of shielded rooms can influence the shielding effectiveness of the EME zone. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

212 The EMI penetration shall be designed to allow cables to be installed, removed and reinstalled without degrading the cables screening effectiveness, and arranged so that water cannot accumulate on the weather side of the penetration.

213 Type tests shall demonstrate that the EMI penetrations are designed to provide minimum 60 [dB] attenuation in the range 60 [kHz] - 60 [MHz].

214 The EMI penetrations shall be made of corrosive-protected materials.

215 The EMI penetrations shall be welded or soldered to provide circumferential contact to the shield.

216 Measurement of prototype(s) shall demonstrate that the ventilation penetrations provide 60 [dB] attenuation in the frequency range 60 [kHz] - 100 [MHz].



217 If the principle of the wave-guide beyond cut-off (WGBCO) frequency cannot be used, honeycomb inserts or similar with 60 [dB] attenuation in the frequency range 60 [kHz] - 100 [MHz] shall be used.

Guidance note: The principle of the wave-guide beyond cut-off (WGBCO) frequency can be used for penetrations of ventilation ducts or piping. No cables etc. must be inserted into these openings. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

218 The ventilation ducts shall be welded or soldered to provide circumferential contact to the shield.

219 If pipeline penetrations are made by EMI MCTs, the pipelines shall be made of corrosive-protected/ galvanized material.

220 If pipelines are made of non-conductive materials, the same principle as for fibre-optic (FO) cables shall be applied. Reference is given to the requirement stated in 211.

221 Shielding elements of shielded doors/hatches shall be made of corrosive-protected materials.

222 Shielded doors/hatches shall provide a minimum of 60 [dB] attenuation in the frequency range of 60 [kHz] - 60 [MHz].

Guidance note: Shielded doors and hatches shall be marked with signs to prevent painting or greasing of EMI gasket and bare metal doorframe flanges. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

223 Shielded windows shall be fitted with conductive EMI-gaskets to ensure circumferential connection of the shielded window to the window frame.

224 Shielded windows shall be made of non-corrosive materials.

225 For shielded windows that are fitted with heating elements, the heating element shall be located on the inside of the shielding zone the window is a part of.

226 Shielded windows shall provide a minimum of 40 [dB] attenuation in the frequency range of 60 [kHz] - 60 [MHz]. The shielding shall not interfere with the optical properties of the window.

Guidance note: The type of shielding material, as well as the size of the window, affects the attenuation of shielded windows. The optical properties must also be considered according to the requirement stated in 225. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

227 Antenna feeder cables between the antenna tuner and the antenna shall be safely arranged and as short as possible.

Guidance note: High frequency (HF) energy from transmitting systems is generated in the transmitter cabinet, and conducted to the antenna tuner by a coaxial cable. From the antenna tuner to the feedpoint of the antenna, a single wire is used. This wire acts as a part of the antenna and radiates high levels of HF energy. This requires careful considerations to avoid radiation hazards (RADHAZ). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



228 All decks and bulkheads encapsulating shielded compartments shall be assembled using continuous welding or soldering to ensure effective shielding.

Guidance note: Spotwelding, riveting, or other assembly techniques, will not provide acceptable shielding effectiveness. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

229 All penetrations into shielded zones shall be concentrated to one place, except for redundant power or signal cables. For system / equipment that requires redundant cabling a separations of the cable penetration is required.

Guidance note: Distributed EME zone penetrations can severely affect the overall shielding effectiveness. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

230 In order to prevent degradation of the shielding effectiveness, the shielded zones shall to be clearly marked.

Guidance note: Entrances to EMI shielded zones shall be marked. The zones themselves can be marked with a special colour. Later installation of equipment can then be conducted with special attention to necessary measures special for a shielded room. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 300 Bonding and earthing


Guidance note: Bonding and earthing has different meanings. Bonding connections are able to carry high frequency (HF) currents up to several hundred MHz. This is not the case for earthing connections, which are normally designed to carry currents in the range 0 - 400 [Hz]. Bonding connections can fulfill requirements to safety earthing connections, but not vice versa. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



Guidance note: Correct termination of cable screens is important to ensure shielding effectiveness of the cable screens. For the cable screens to be effective above a few MHz, cables are terminated to earth at both ends and at any EME zone penetration. As a result of this equipment cabinets need to be made of a conductive metal. Alternatively, other means of bonding the cable screen to earth must be proposed. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---



306 All new high frequency (HF) bonding shall be made according to MIL-STD 1310.



307 Measurement shall demonstrate that for distributed systems the zero-potential reference is terminated to earth at one single point only.

Guidance note: For distributed systems the zero-potential reference should preferably be terminated to earth at the main unit. Power supplies in sub-units must then be floated, if not galvanically isolated from other systems. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

Guidance note: The zero-potential should be floated completely if deemed necessary. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

308 Measurements shall demonstrate that connections between main systems have galvanic separation for all signal and communication line terminals.

Guidance note: Connections between different main systems can lead to unwanted multipoint earthing of the zero reference potential. Such unwanted earthing connection can, for example, occur if a screened cable between different systems is connected at both systems with a screened plug housing, and the zero reference potentials of the different systems are connected to the plug housings/chassis which also is earthed. The return current of the signal between the two different systems that should have been returned on a specific wire within the cable or under the cable screen, will then float in this wire as well as on the cable screen. A potentially large current loop has then been made with the signal return current as part of the loop. Electromagnetic (EM) noise can then be picked up and disturb the signal. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

309 To avoid unwanted noise currents flowing between different systems, common D.C. distribution systems are not earthed. Measurement shall demonstrate that systems connected to common D.C. distribution systems are floated with respect to earth for both polarities.

310 For multi-screened, double screened, or individually pair-screened cables, the outer screen shall be terminated to earth at both ends and at any EME zone penetration.

Guidance note: The other screens may be terminated to earth at the most sensitive end only, or according to manufacturer’s instruction. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: Multiscreened cables must be terminated for optimum performance of the various screens. Double shielded cables must not be confused with cables with two screens. Minimum isolation resistance between the different layers of screen is 1 [MOhm]. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 400 Cabling


402 Transceiver and receiver cables shall not be run in the same pipe.

Guidance note: Cables from receiving antennas are sensitive with regard to pick-up of electromagnetic interference (EMI). ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---




404 Information on cable category and separation shall be included in the cable database.

Guidance note: Different cables carry signals with different signal energy levels. The type of cable chosen must match the signal types, or otherwise crosstalk can occur. Separating cables of different cable categories prevents crosstalk between different cables. MIL-STD, DNV regulations, or similar, should be used. At multi cable transits (MCTs) cables of different categories can be fed through the same MCT if they are segregated as close as possible to the MCT. If crossing of cables with different signal categories must be made at crossing angles less than 90 degrees, the segregation distance must be upheld. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---




Guidance note: Unused and unterminated conductors can cause EMI-pickup. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: Several conductors can be earthed simultaneously at a single point. The other end must then be isolated. Several conductors can be gathered by the use of, for example, a single isolated sleeve. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

408 The cable database shall show that all cables have at least a single braided screen.

Guidance note: To prevent conducted EMI radiation it is necessary to use screened cables. At least one screen must be provided, but multiple screens or other special cables suggested by the equipment manufacturer can be used. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

409 All three phases of A.C. current cables shall have all phases within the same common screen.

Guidance note: Screened single core cables may be accepted upon NDLO approval. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

410 To prevent EMI to be coupled from cable to cable, the installation of equipment with associated cables shall be carefully controlled with regard to the following critical aspects:

- Type of cable support - Distance to earth - Cable screen pick-up loop area - Distance between cables carrying signals of different categories - Cable screen decoupling to earth

411 The contractor shall provide drawings of proposed cableways, showing the distance to any earth-plane.



412 Sensitive equipment shall be installed with sufficient distance from power cables to prevent equipment failure.

Guidance note: Sensitive equipment, e.g. fire alarm sensors, can be highly susceptible to EMI from, for example, power cables. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

413 Transceiver and tuner cables shall be routed below decks as far as possible.

414 Analogue signal types shall be current loops within a range of 4 - 20 [mA].

Guidance note: The choice of signal types is critical with regard to corruption of the signal information due to susceptibility to EMI, in particular for topside signals near transmitting antennas. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

415 Signal lines shall be unearthed and as far as possible balanced.

E 500 Filtering



503 The contractor shall propose a plan for the use of EMI filters.

Guidance note: The purpose of filtering is to reduce the level of conducted EMI into the shielded EME-zones. Conducted EMI can cause system failure. High levels of conducted EMI can cause radiated noise. This is particularly critical in the topside zone, near sensitive sensor antennas. A filter will prevent EMI from entering a shielded zone, as well as prevent EMI leaking out from the EME-zone. There are different types of EMI-filters, including:

- Power filters - Signal filters - Communication filters


504 Isolation resistance to earth should be at least 1 [MOhm], inclusive EMI filter for each galvanically isolated circuit. Filters without discharge resistors shall be marked for all consumers to avoid risk to personnel. Special maintenance procedures shall be established.

505 A plan showing the type and amount of EMI-filters to be used and the attenuation properties of the EMI-filters shall be established to ensure that the appropriate radiated levels are not discredited.



506 Measurements shall demonstrate that the maximum possible one-poled short-circuit current between each phase and earth, through a 1 [kOhm] serial resistance, is below 30 [mA].

Guidance note: EMI-filters in equipment have capacitors inserted between phases and between phases and earth. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e--- Guidance note: A vessel built in GRP has no earthing through fastening bolts etc. Earthing is only possible with the use of a dedicated connection between enclosures and the earth system in the vessel. It is possible that this connection can break off without the knowledge of the operator. If a insulation failure occurs within the enclosure it is possible that a phase comes in contact with the enclosure (which is no longer earthed). If the operator comes in touch with the enclosure and simultaneously is in contact with earth, through feet or other hand on levers, pipes, ladders etc., a possibly lethal current can pass through his/her body. This current is only limited by the internal resistance of the human body and the capacitors between phases and earth. Hence it is vital to limit this current. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

507 The contractor shall establish a spreadsheet showing the one-poled short-circuit current between phase and earth at any network configuration.

Guidance note: Sources of capacitive currents between phases and earths can be EMI-filters, coils in motors and transformers, as well as fluorescent lightning. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 600 Lightning protection


E 700 Electrostatic discharge


702 The supplier shall make a general arrangement (GA) drawing showing rooms containing electrostatic discharge sensitive devices (ESDS).

703 Rooms containing ESDS shall have signs for electrostatic discharge (ESD) protected area according to EN-100015-1.

704 Rooms containing ESDS shall have a floor/deck covering of an electrostatic dissipative material and resistance to earth connection between 106 [Ω] and 109 [Ω].

705 Rooms containing ESDS shall have seats designed of an antistatic material with a resistance from any point to earth connection or floor contact point between 106 [Ω] and 1012 [Ω].

706 Rooms containing Electro Explosive Devices (EEDs) shall have signs for ESD protected area according to EN-100015-1.

707 Rooms for storing and/or handling of EEDs shall be fitted with a floor/deck covering made of conductive material. Measurements, carried out according to EN 100015-1, shall demonstrate that the



resistivity of the floor/deck covering is within the limits stated in descriptions. The measurements shall be reported to NDLO.

708 Storage compartments for EEDs, i.e. shelves, boxes, trays etc., shall be connected to earth to provide a common potential with the floor/deck.

709 Work benches/surfaces for EEDs shall be connected to earth to provide a common potential with the floor/deck. A report including measurements demonstrating that the resistivity between floor/deck and the work benches/surfaces is zero shall be produced.

710 The yard shall provide necessary ESD protection of rooms/areas that may contain explosive fumes, gases or fluids such as gas from charging batteries.

711 Electronic workshops shall be designed as ESD protected areas (EPA) according to EN-100015-1.

712 ESDS spare parts shall be wrapped in metal in/metal out static shielding bags, and labelled or marked with a warning notice, according to the package material described in EN 100015 - 1.

713 Cabinets containing ESDS shall be equipped with snap fasteners for connection of ESD-wristband cord and ESD-temporary work surface cord.

E 800 Marking



F Testing

F 100 General





F 200 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) for equipment


F 300 Harbour Acceptance Tests (HAT) for the vessel


F 400 Sea Acceptance Tests (SAT) for the vessel


The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and Regulations 2013 Pt.1 Ch.1 Sec.15: Storage Rooms for Explosives Page 254


Section 15 Storage Rooms for Explosives This section covers rules and regulations regarding storage rooms for explosives for surface vessels in the Royal Norwegian Navy (RNoN). All general requirements regarding maintenance, procurement, quality assurance (QA), and approbation are covered by Pt.0 – General Information and Requirements. Abbreviations and definitions are listed in Pt.0.

A General

A 100 Application

101 This part covers the structural storage spaces for all kinds of weapons, explosives, pyrotechnics and demolition material on board RNoN surface vessels. The magazines include items such as;

a) Explosives b) Armaments

The primary function of the magazines is to serve the need for storage of all kind of ammunition and its interfaces to transportation in/out as well as feeding to the actual weapon equipment. Magazines and ready use magazines/lockers provide an area to stow armaments and explosives safely and securely in accordance with the Armaments Statement. They are preferably sited to minimize their vulnerability and to allow good access to their respective launchers. Main magazines are sited below the waterline, where possible, to reduce susceptibility to small arms attack and above water weapons. Magazines are also situated with regard to the vulnerability considerations and easy access to the weapon positions. Ammunition routes are provided to efficiently transfer of ammunition and explosives between Replenishment At Sea (RAS) positions, magazines, ready use magazines/lockers and launchers in a safe manner. Primary and secondary routes and methods of ammunition transfer, where necessary, are priorities allowed for. Ready use magazines are provided where necessary to enable limited stockpiling of ammunition in the vicinity of upper deck weapons and pyrotechnic launchers, where these are remote from main magazines. This facility is particularly important in the case of very short range air defence systems and decoy launchers, where the ability to rapidly reload is an essential part of the Anti-Ship Missile Defence.

Guidance note: The objectives of this section are: - To protect the stored and transported explosives from external and internal influences that may

cause unintended ignition. - To reduce the damage of fire or detonation by prescribing internal and external safety

distances - To limit the deterioration of the stored explosives. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

A 200 Definitions







B Basic Requirements

B 100 General



103 Specific national requirements shall be taken into consideration. The applicable requirements are:

- TFF 780 Rules for storage of ammunition and explosives (Norwegian language) - TFF 781 Rules for storage of ammunition and explosives (Norwegian language) - Forsvarets forskrifter for ammunisjonslagre (Norwegian language)

104 Specific NATO requirements shall be taken into considereation. The applicable requirements are:

- STANAG 4440 and AASTP I, AASTP II and AASTP III. - Design Standards for Explosives Safety in MOD ships and Submarines (DEFSTAN

00-101 part 1-4).

105 To ensure that all relevant explosive specific requirements, storage restrictions and safety requirements are adhered to, a comprehensive risk and safety analysis shall be performed and documented in order to verify that storage rooms for explosives are suitable and safe for the intended explosives.

106 All ammunition, explosives and pyrotechnical material storage magazines and lockers shall be situated with the danger of ignition by electromagnetic pulses (EMI/EMC) in mind.

107 The electromagnetic (EM) levels where explosives containing EED circuits are located are not to exceed values in STANAG 1307 and in MIL-STD-464.

108 Security arrangements for magazines shall be provided to prevent unauthorised entry.

109 Ammunition routes shall be provided for rapid transfer of ammunition from RAS stations to main magazines and from main magazines to weapon positions or Ready Use lockers/magazines where applicable.

110 The magazines and weapon handling systems shall allow safe reloading of weapons in designed environmental conditions.

B 200 Plans and particulars to be submitted


Guidance note: For ammunition storerooms on board existing vessels, the venting areas from magazines shall be sufficient to avoid significant overpressures in case of fire or explosion. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

202 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Active and passive countermeasures to avoid and/or to extinguish fire(s) shall be taken into account

203 To ensure that all relevant explosive specific requirements, storage restrictions and safety requirements are adhered to, a comprehensive risk and safety analysis shall be performed and documented in order to verify that storage rooms for explosives are suitable and safe for the intended explosives and ammunition. The plans and analysis shall be approved by NDLO responsible.



C Arrangements

C 100 General





105 DNV rules fully applicable in addition to the environmental requirements are listed in DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 sec.5 table B1.

106 The storage rooms for explosives shall be fitted with arrangements for detecting temperatures, flooding, smoke and fire inside the rooms.


108 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The wave-guides must fulfill the EME/EMC requirements in section 14.

Guidance note: Pipes for flammable liquids, gas or exhaust gases should not pass inside the ammunition storerooms or adjacent rooms. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

109 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Stowage in the magazines shall be rattle free to avoid being a noise source.




113 Magazines and ready use magazines shall in an emergency situation have the capability to be flooded by water spraying systems, with sufficient capacity also under Fire Fighting scenarios.

114 Magazines and ready use magazines shall have local manual activation outside the magazine, and remote automatic and manual activation of fire fighting facilities.

Guidance note: The remote automatic and manual activating of fire counter measures should be an autonomous part of the Integrated Platform Management System (IPMS) ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

115 Classification of electrical equipment shall be based upon the results of the safety analysis of the storerooms for explosives.



116 The classification and installation of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with section 8 (Electrical power generators and transfer) – B500 Enclosures, tables 501.

D Structure

D 100 Structural requirements



103 The magazines shall be designed to support or resist; a) in-plane loads due to dynamic pressure, concentrated weights and equipment attached b) loads due to water pressure outside the bulkheads/hull c) bending loads due to flooding. d) in-plane loads due to docking activities.

104 Magazines which are attached to or form part of the main structure shall not degrade the fatigue life of the ship. Magazines shall be located to protect the ammunitions from external attack.

105 The outer boundaries of magazines, associated airlock boundaries, weapon lift boundaries and doors shall be watertight.

106 Magazines and ready use magazines/lockers above the light harbour waterline shall incorporate ballistic protection. This will include increased plating size or armour plating where necessary.

Guidance note: The ballistic protection design shall be based on evaluation of the safety analysis. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

107 The main deck between multilevel security (MTLS) and machinery compartments shall be locally reinforced for the purpose of preventing fuel oil explosions or fire entering the MTLS.

108 Magazines within the hull shall have arrangements for shock protection of armaments and explosives, and be effective for rack loadings from no load to full load.

109 Weapons and racks shall remain captive in the event of underwater shock and extreme ship motions.

110 Any magazine that is designated for stowage of ammunition containing significant quantities of Propellant shall have a dedicated "Blow off Trunk" to allow venting to atmosphere without structural damage to the magazine or hazard to another compartment or the ship.



E Fire Safety

E 100 General


E 200 Structural fire safety






E 300 System fire safety

301 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: Both smoke and fire shall be detected.

302 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The maximum surface temperature of any equipment should be lower than 60 degrees Celsius (flash point of diesel etc.). The ambient temperature should generally not exceed 25 degrees Celsius. Installed equipment should be within the requirements of DNV RULES FOR SHIPS/HSLCNSC Pt.4 Ch.9 sec.5 table B1.

Guidance note: The electrical and mechanical equipment installed inside storage rooms for explosives shall be in accordance with section 8 (Electrical power generators and transfer) – B500 Enclosures, tables 501. ---e-n-d---of---G-u-i-d-a-n-c-e---n-o-t-e---

E 400 Fire protection




404 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: The sprinkler activation alarms and the flooding detectors shall also be connected to the main alarm system and/or IPMS.




406 Following rules apply in addition to rules specified by DNV: There shall be possible to leave the valves locked or unlocked, upon the commanding officer’s assessment.


F Radiation Hazards


102 Requirements regarding radiation hazards in section 13 and 14 are to be fulfilled.

G Signboards

G 100 General


102 The access doors, hatches and emergency escape hatches to storage rooms for explosives and ammunition shall be labelled with the corresponding hazard classification. Exceptions are to be approved by NDLO.

Documents

The Royal Norwegian Navy Standard Requirements and